SenoClaire INSTALLATION MANUAL - IM - 5415901-5-1EN - 1 PDF

SenoClaire
GE Breast Tomosynthesis
Installation Manual
OPERATING DOCUMENTATION
5415901-5-1EN
Revision 1
SenoClaire GE Breast Tomosynthesis
Direction 5415901-5-1EN, Revision 1
2
Important Information
LANGUAGE
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
(BG) • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на
клиента е да осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали

упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на

доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар,
механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危
險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受
傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj
servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili
pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
Important Information 3
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajiště‐
ní překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a
pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního

servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive
vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens
ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk

stød, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoorde‐
lijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding

werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de

operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok,
mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the cus‐
tomer's responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been con‐
sulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or
patient from electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastu‐
tab klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga

tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või pat‐

siendi vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
4 Important Information
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tar‐
vittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän
huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteis‐

ton käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'an‐
glais, il incombe au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et
de maintenance n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur

ou le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des
Kunden für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen
und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendienst‐

technikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische
oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.

(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των
αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε
συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός

στον τεχνικό σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή
άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége
a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben

leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg

áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það
skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð
og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda
eða sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente
è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il pre‐

sente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto al‐
la manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti mec‐
canici o altri rischi.
警告このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業
者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでくださ
い。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、
感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.

(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는
것은 고객의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지

마십시오.
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서

비스 제공자, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다.
BRĪDINĀJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienā‐
kums ir nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un sapraša‐

nas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, me‐

hānisku vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai
pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo
paslaugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio

eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento suža‐
lojimai dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar
å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, oper‐
atøren eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre
farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłu‐
maczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręczni‐

kiem serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisan‐

ta, operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao
cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual
de assistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou

paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idio‐
ma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual
de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do

operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză,
este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui

manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului

sau pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на

(RU) английском языке.
• Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно
обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к

данному руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому,

что специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар
электрическим током, механическую травму или другое повреждение.
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodi‐
lačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputst‐
vo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca

ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a nepor‐

ozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, ob‐

sluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohroze‐
nie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el
inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido

este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servi‐
cios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas,
mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar
kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på servicete‐
knikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller
andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka za‐
gotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razu‐

meli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali

drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep
ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen,

operatör veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
This page left intentionally blank.
Revision History
Date Reference Revision Main modification
2013–04 5415901-1-1EN 2 M3 Release.
2014–04 5415901-2-1EN 1 M4 Release.
2014–07 5415901-3-1EN 1 M4 FDA / Canada Release.
2014–11 5415901-4-1EN 1 Aurora Vitality Release.
2016–03 5415901-5-1EN 1 Pollux Release.

Updated for Positioner Software upgrade, Image Position fix,
Essential Upgrade kit for SenoClaire introduction and to re‐
solve the following SPRs:
• HCSDM00365157: FMI 12211 removal and Essential
Upgrade Kit for SenoClaire introduction.
• HCSDM00380501: Recon Box Heat Output addition.
• HCSDM00376609: Gantry software release update (Pol‐

lux version).
• HCSDM00381321: CMN CPU Board version and filesize

update.
• HCSDM00391084: update of ADS and IDC versions to

56.21 (ADS) and 13.11-1.1 (IDC).
• HCSDM00397247: minor corrections.
Revision History 11
12 Revision History
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 SAFETY.................................................................................................................................31
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................31
2 Definition of Warnings and Notes..................................................................................................32
3 Job Card LOTO A001 - Lock-Out / Tag-Out (LOTO) Procedures................................................. 33
3.4.1 Prepare the LOTO procedure............................................................................................35
3.4.2 Identify the energy sources on the system........................................................................ 35
3.4.3 Switch the Senographe system OFF.................................................................................36
3.4.4 Isolation of the Generator Line Supply power source........................................................36
3.4.4.1 Isolating the Mains Distribution Panel............................................................................ 36
3.4.4.2 Isolating the Room Lamps power source....................................................................... 37
3.4.5 Apply LOTO.......................................................................................................................37
3.4.5.1 If the activity requires one Field Engineer...................................................................... 37
3.4.5.2 If the activity requires more than one Field Engineer..................................................... 38
3.4.5.3 Final steps...................................................................................................................... 38
3.4.6 Discharge stored energy................................................................................................... 39
3.4.7 Verify room lamp electrical source is within safe limits......................................................40
3.4.8 PROCEDURE FOR THE RECONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT................................ 42
Chapter 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................43

1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................43
1.1 Scope and Applicability of the Publication............................................................................43
1.2 Content of this Publication....................................................................................................44
1.3 Publication Conventions....................................................................................................... 45
1.3.1 Reference Conventions............................................................................................... 45
1.3.2 Graphical User Interface Conventions.........................................................................45
1.3.2.1 Windows and Dialog Boxes, Radio Buttons, Check Boxes and Fields...............45
1.3.2.2 Buttons................................................................................................................45
1.3.2.3 Menus................................................................................................................. 45
1.3.2.4 Generator menu..................................................................................................46
1.3.2.5 Keyboard Keys................................................................................................... 46
Table of Contents 13
1.3.2.6 Mouse Button......................................................................................................46

1.3.3 Command Line Interface Conventions........................................................................ 46
1.3.3.1 Command Strings............................................................................................... 46
1.3.3.2 System Prompts and Responses....................................................................... 46
1.3.3.3 Directory, Path Names and Filenames............................................................... 47
1.3.4 Entering and Typing Instructions................................................................................. 47
1.3.5 References to spacial locations of the systems...........................................................47
1.4 Acronyms Glossary.............................................................................................................. 48
1.5 Proprietary Considerations................................................................................................... 51
1.5.1 CATEGORIES OF SERVICE ENGINEER...................................................................51
1.5.2 SERVICE TOOLS........................................................................................................51
1.5.2.1 Embedded Service Software.............................................................................. 51
1.5.2.2 Access to Generator Install and Maintenance Menus........................................ 52
1.5.2.3 IQST Phantom.................................................................................................... 52
1.5.2.4 Enabling Class C Access to Diagnostics Functions........................................... 52
1.5.3 SERVICE PUBLICATIONS..........................................................................................52
1.5.3.1 Service Manual (SM) Class A.............................................................................52
1.5.3.2 Service Manual (SM) Class C.............................................................................52
1.5.3.3 Service Manual (SM) Class M............................................................................ 53
2 GE Breast Tomosynthesis Labels and Symbols........................................................................... 54
2.1 Meaning of symbols used in labels.......................................................................................54
2.2 Meaning of symbols on the equipment and accessories......................................................56
Chapter 3 PRE INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................57

1 Pre Installation Requirements....................................................................................................... 57
1.1 About this Chapter................................................................................................................57
1.2 Environmental Requirements............................................................................................... 58
1.2.1 GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit working environment.................................................... 58
1.2.2 GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit transport and short term (<5 days) storage
conditions...........................................................................................................58
1.2.3 Long term storage........................................................................................................58
1.2.4 Heat Output................................................................................................................. 58
14 Table of Contents
1.3 IEC60601-1-2 Electromagnetic Standards Compliance....................................................... 59

1.3.1 General........................................................................................................................59
1.3.2 Electromagnetic Emission........................................................................................... 59
1.3.3 Electromagnetic Immunity........................................................................................... 59
1.3.4 Recommended Separation Distances for Portable and Mobile Radio
Frequency Communications Equipment IEC 60601-1-2................................... 61
1.3.5 Use Limitation.............................................................................................................. 62
1.3.6 Installation Requirements and Environmental Control.................................................62
1.3.6.1 Cable Shielding & Grounding............................................................................. 62
1.3.6.2 Separated Power Supply Distribution Panel & Line............................................62
1.3.6.3 Subsystem & Accessories Power Supply Distribution........................................ 62
1.3.6.4 Stacked Components & Equipment....................................................................63
1.3.6.5 Static Magnetic Field Limits................................................................................ 63
1.3.6.6 Electrostatic Discharge Environment & Recommendations............................... 63
1.4 Electrical Requirements........................................................................................................64
1.4.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................. 64
1.4.2 kVA Load Characteristics............................................................................................ 64
1.5 Planning for Storage.............................................................................................................65
1.5.1 Temporary Storage in the Hospital.............................................................................. 65
1.5.2 Packing Information..................................................................................................... 65
1.5.3 Constraints for Moving the Equipment Into the Room................................................. 65
1.6 Room Layout Planning......................................................................................................... 67
1.6.1 Dimensions and Masses..............................................................................................67
1.6.2 Layout Constraints for Positioning the Reconstruction Station....................................67
1.6.2.1 Floor and Wall Spacing.......................................................................................67
1.6.2.2 General Layout................................................................................................... 70
1.6.3 Anchoring to the Floor................................................................................................. 72
1.6.3.1 The Positioning Template................................................................................... 72
1.6.3.2 Gantry Floor Requirements................................................................................ 72
1.6.3.3 Anchoring Inserts................................................................................................72
1.6.4 Interconnecting Cables Path and Length.....................................................................73
1.7 Interoperability and Networking Connections....................................................................... 76

1.7.1 DICOM Compatibility................................................................................................... 76
1.7.2 Storage Capacity......................................................................................................... 76
1.7.3 Networking Connections..............................................................................................76
1.8 Associated Review Workstations......................................................................................... 77
1.9 Cable Lay-out and Pin-out....................................................................................................78
1.9.1 Internal Reconstruction Station Cabling...................................................................... 78
1.9.1.1 Ground Cable – C5-C5 AWG12 LG450 (5365831)............................................ 78
1.9.1.2 Ground Cable – FAS C5 AWG12 LG420 (5365830).......................................... 78
1.9.1.3 Ground Cable – FAS C5 AWG12 LG1000 (5366584)........................................ 78
1.9.2 Reconstruction Station to Control Station Cabling.......................................................79
1.9.2.1 Short Harness Cables.........................................................................................79
1.9.2.1.1 W801 Cable — Short Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Reconstruction
Computer to ADS Computer (5434079).................................................79
1.9.2.1.2 W802 Cable – Short Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Hospital
Network (5434078)................................................................................ 79
1.9.2.1.3 Short Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable (5434166)...................80
1.9.2.1.4 W805 Cable – Short Reconstruction Station Housing Earth Cable........... 80
1.9.2.2 Long Harness Cables......................................................................................... 81
1.9.2.2.1 W803 Cable — Long Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Reconstruction
Computer to ADS Computer (5434175).................................................81
1.9.2.2.2 W804 Cable – Long Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Hospital
Network (5434176)................................................................................ 81
1.9.2.2.3 Long Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable (5434167)................... 82
1.9.2.2.4 W806 Cable – Long Reconstruction Station Housing Earth Cable............ 82
1.10 Specifications..................................................................................................................... 84
1.10.1 Maximum tolerance of displayed constants in DBT mode.........................................84
1.10.1.1 Manual mode exposure accuracy selected on the X-ray console.................... 84
1.10.1.2 AOP mode exposure accuracy displayed on the acquisition workstation.........84
1.10.1.3 Compression force and breast thickness displayed on the Gantry Readout.... 84
1.10.1.4 Tube angulation displayed on the Gantry Readout.......................................... 84
1.10.2 X-ray tube head movement....................................................................................... 84
1.10.3 Radiation and filter information.................................................................................. 84

1.10.3.1 Source to Image Distance (SID)....................................................................... 84
1.10.3.2 Radiation reference axis................................................................................... 84
1.10.3.3 Nominal X-ray tube voltages and currents........................................................85
1.10.3.3.1 Irradiation in AOP mode...........................................................................85
1.10.3.3.2 Irradiation in Manual mode...................................................................... 85
1.10.3.4 Nominal focal spot size with the MTD...............................................................85
1.10.3.5 Dimensions and locations of all available effective image receptive areas...... 85
1.10.3.5.1 FOV for 2D acquisitions with MTD...........................................................85
1.10.3.5.2 FOV for 3D acquisitions........................................................................... 86
1.10.3.6 Attenuation equivalence................................................................................... 86
1.10.3.6.1 Attenuation equivalence at 100 kVp........................................................ 86
1.10.3.6.2 Attenuation equivalence at 30 kVp.......................................................... 87
1.10.4 Dose Display and Dose Display Accuracy for AGD...................................................87
1.10.4.1 Dose Display.....................................................................................................87
1.10.4.2 Dose Display Accuracy for AGD.......................................................................87
1.10.5 Applicable Classifications ......................................................................................... 88
2 Pre Installation Procedures........................................................................................................... 89
2.1 About this chapter.................................................................................................................89
2.2 Job Card PRE A001 - Image Backup and RRA Analysis..................................................... 90
2.2.1 Objective......................................................................................................................90
2.2.2 Procedure.................................................................................................................... 90
2.3 Job Card PRE A002 - Ensure Minimum System Level is Met..............................................91
2.3.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................. 91
2.3.2 Define the necessary checks.......................................................................................91
2.3.3 Perform FMI12075 checks...........................................................................................94
2.3.3.1 Physical checks.................................................................................................. 94
2.3.3.2 Service desktop checks...................................................................................... 94
2.3.4 Check the Control Station version............................................................................... 95
2.3.5 Next Actions.................................................................................................................96
2.3.5.1 FMI12075 is not applied..................................................................................... 96
2.3.5.2 The Control Station is a V1/V2/V3...................................................................... 96

2.3.5.3 The appropriate FMIs are applied and the Control Station is a V4 or higher......96
2.3.6 Record Form................................................................................................................96
2.4 Job Card PRE A003 - Pre Installation Planning - Ensure compatibility with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option.................................................................................. 98
2.4.1 Ordering Kits................................................................................................................98
2.4.2 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS................................................................................. 99
2.4.3 Special Tools and Equipment...................................................................................... 99
2.4.4 Pre-GE Breast Tomosynthesis Upgrade Scheduling Tasks...................................... 100
2.4.5 Potential Need For Rotation-Related Gantry Hardware............................................ 100
2.4.5.1 Deciding What Rotation-Related Gantry Parts to Take Onsite.........................101
2.4.5.2 Q1 2009 Essential Systems (5144816-5) Manufactured With the 3000N
Rotation Gas Spring.................................................................................. 103
2.4.6 Potential Need to Change BSLM Board.................................................................... 104
2.4.7 Potential Need For New Monitor on Systems Upgraded by Accelera Kit.................. 105
2.4.8 Potential Need For Long Reconstruction Cable Harness.......................................... 105
2.4.9 Planning Upgrades of IDI Mammography Workflow Solutions.................................. 105
2.4.10 Obtaining Test BTO Images to Check PACS Compatibility.....................................105
2.5 Job Card PRE A004 - Checking for Damage..................................................................... 107
2.5.1 POSSIBLE TYPES OF DAMAGE..............................................................................107
2.5.2 CHECKING FOR EXTERNAL DAMAGE...................................................................110
2.5.2.1 Delivery Inspection with Courier....................................................................... 110
2.5.2.2 Conduct post-delivery Inspections....................................................................110
2.5.3 CHECKING FOR INTERNAL DAMAGE....................................................................110
2.5.4 REPORTING DAMAGE.............................................................................................110
2.6 Job Card PRE A005 - Unpacking the kit............................................................................ 112
2.6.4.1 Reception................................................................................................................113
2.6.4.2 Packaging description.............................................................................................113
2.6.4.3 Unpacking the kit.................................................................................................... 115
2.6.4.3.1 Reconstruction computer.....................................................................................115
2.6.4.3.2 Reconstruction housing....................................................................................... 117
2.6.4.3.3 Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD).............................................................118
2.7 Job Card PRE A006 - Overall system behavior check....................................................... 122
2.7.1 Check the system for Gantry related errors...............................................................122
2.7.2 Check the anchoring of the system........................................................................... 122
2.7.3 Perform an acquisition............................................................................................... 122
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................... 123

1 Tomosynthesis Theory................................................................................................................ 123
1.1 Principles of Operation....................................................................................................... 123
1.2 Detector Performance........................................................................................................ 124
1.3 Angular Sweep Range and Number of Projections............................................................ 124
1.4 Step-and-shoot tube motion............................................................................................... 125
1.5 The 3D X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence............................................................................... 125
1.5.1 Full FOV X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence.................................................................... 125
1.5.2 Partial FOV X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence................................................................126
2 Main GE Breast Tomosynthesis Option Components.................................................................128
2.1 Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD)........................................................................... 129
2.1.1 Application Aspects of the MTD.................................................................................129
2.1.2 System Function Aspects of the MTD....................................................................... 133
2.1.3 Main characteristics of the MTD................................................................................ 136
2.1.3.1 MTD grid........................................................................................................... 136
2.1.3.2 MTD breast plate.............................................................................................. 136
2.1.3.3 MTD Dimensions and mass..............................................................................136
2.2 MTD Compatible Detector Rails......................................................................................... 137
2.3 Precise 50N Rotation Clutch.............................................................................................. 137
2.4 Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable................................................................................. 137
2.5 Reconstruction Computer...................................................................................................137
2.5.1 Application Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer................................................137
2.5.2 System Function Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer...................................... 138
2.5.2.1 Reconstruction Computer Hardware................................................................ 138
2.5.2.2 Power Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer.............................................. 138
2.5.2.3 Networking Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer...................................... 139
2.5.2.4 Unique ID (MAC address) of the Reconstruction Computer.............................139

2.6 3D Foot Pedal.....................................................................................................................139
2.6.1 Application Aspects of the 3D Foot Pedal................................................................. 139
2.6.2 System Function Aspects of the 3D Foot Pedal........................................................ 140
2.7 DBT Compatible Lift Board.................................................................................................140
2.8 Multiplug and UPS Supply Cable....................................................................................... 141
2.9 Gigabit Ethernet Switch...................................................................................................... 142
2.10 Software and Firmware Versions..................................................................................... 143
3 Product History............................................................................................................................146
3.1 Software Evolution..............................................................................................................146
3.2 Hardware Evolution............................................................................................................ 147
3.2.1 Version 4....................................................................................................................147
3.2.2 Aurora M4.................................................................................................................. 147
4 Exposure Sequence Description................................................................................................. 148
4.1 2D Exposure Sequence Description...................................................................................148
4.2 3D Exposure Sequence Description...................................................................................149
5 System Differences..................................................................................................................... 151
5.1 Differences to the ADS Browser.........................................................................................151
5.1.1 Available Reconstruction Disk Space........................................................................ 151
5.1.2 Launching Volume Reconstruction Manually.............................................................152
5.1.3 Reconstruction Queue............................................................................................... 152
5.2 Differences to the Service Desktop.................................................................................... 153
5.2.1 Launching the Service Desktop................................................................................. 153
5.2.2 Home Page................................................................................................................153
5.2.3 Calibrations................................................................................................................154
5.2.3.1 Detector calibrations......................................................................................... 154
5.2.3.2 Calibration: Positioner Summary...................................................................... 155
5.2.4 IQ Checks.................................................................................................................. 156
5.2.5 Reconstruction Computer Configuration....................................................................158
5.3 Networking Differences...................................................................................................... 160
5.3.1 System Networking and Internal Communication......................................................160
5.3.2 Firewall and Port Forwarding.....................................................................................162

5.3.3 Network File System and Changes to the Database................................................. 165
5.3.3.1 Network File System and Database................................................................. 165
5.4 Other Differences To The System...................................................................................... 169
5.4.1 Fine View and eContrast........................................................................................... 169
5.4.1.1 Image processing............................................................................................. 169
5.4.1.2 Processed image.............................................................................................. 169
5.4.2 Mechanical motion.....................................................................................................169
5.4.2.1 Source starting position.................................................................................... 169
5.4.2.2 Source trajectory...............................................................................................169
5.4.2.3 Apparent focal spot size and handling of vibrations......................................... 170
5.4.3 X-ray tube.................................................................................................................. 170
5.4.3.1 Introduction....................................................................................................... 170
5.4.3.2 Focal spot......................................................................................................... 170
5.4.3.2.1 Possible values for direct focal distance.................................................. 170
5.4.3.2.2 Position of the intersection of the reference axis with the image
reception area for a specified direct focal distance..............................170
5.4.3.2.3 Angle of the reference axis to the plane of the image reception area......170
6 System Diagrams........................................................................................................................ 171
6.1 Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram........................................................................... 171
6.2 Column Block Diagram.......................................................................................................172
6.3 Compression Arm Block Diagram...................................................................................... 173
6.4 Control Station Block Diagram........................................................................................... 175
6.5 Reconstruction Station Block Diagram............................................................................... 180
Chapter 5 INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 181

1 About this chapter........................................................................................................................181
2 Scenario IST A001 - Installation..................................................................................................182
2.1 Context............................................................................................................................... 182
2.2 Steering Guide....................................................................................................................182
3 Job Card IST A000 - AOP Configuration Check......................................................................... 187
3.3.1 For all systems................................................................................................................ 187
3.3.1.1 Generator AOP Mode Configuration Check................................................................. 187

3.3.1.2 ADS Computer AOP Mode Configuration Check......................................................... 187
3.3.2 For Penduick and above systems with Stereotaxy..........................................................188
4 Job Card IST A001 - Default Internal IP Address Checks...........................................................189
5 Job Card IST A002 - Lift board....................................................................................................191
5.3.1 Disassembly of Lift Board................................................................................................191
5.3.2 Installation of the Lift Board............................................................................................. 193
5.3.3 Firmware Check.............................................................................................................. 195
5.3.4 Check Gantry Readout Cable Position............................................................................196
5.3.5 Functional checks............................................................................................................196
6 Job Card IST A003 - 3D foot pedal............................................................................................. 197
7 Job Card IST A004 - Install Accelera Option (systems with V1/V2/V3 Control Station only)...... 199
8 Job Card IST A005 - Ethernet switch.......................................................................................... 201
8.3.1 Accessing the Ethernet switch.........................................................................................201
8.3.2 Removing the Ethernet switch.........................................................................................202
8.3.3 Installing the new Ethernet switch................................................................................... 202
9 Job Card IST A006 - ADS RAM upgrade.................................................................................... 206
9.4.1 Remove the Z400 from the Control Station..................................................................... 207
9.4.2 Accessing the motherboard.............................................................................................207
9.4.3 Installing the new RAM....................................................................................................209
9.4.4 Reassemble the AWS unit...............................................................................................210
9.4.5 Reconfiguring the System Memory................................................................................. 211
10 Job Card IST A007 - Generator ePROMs Upgrade.................................................................. 213
10.3.1 Back up Generator Parameters.....................................................................................214
10.3.2 ePROMs upgrade..........................................................................................................214
10.3.3 Generator Parameters restore.......................................................................................216
11 Job Card IST A008 - Reconstruction Station............................................................................ 218
11.4.1 Installing the multiplug................................................................................................... 227
11.4.2 Connecting the multiplug to the Generator AC supply.................................................. 229
11.4.3 Positioning of the Reconstruction housing.................................................................... 230
11.4.3.1 The reconstruction can be placed behind the Control Station....................................231
11.4.3.2 If the reconstruction cannot be placed behind the Control Station............................. 232
11.4.3.3 Anchoring the Reconstruction housing ......................................................................232
11.4.4 Opening the Reconstruction housing............................................................................ 233
11.4.5 Routing the Reconstruction Station cable harness........................................................234
11.4.5.1 The system cable harness enters the Control Station by the left-hand side.............. 234
11.4.5.2 The system cable harness enters the Control Station by the right-hand side............ 238
11.4.6 Insert the Reconstruction computer into the housing.................................................... 241
11.4.7 Connecting the Reconstruction computer..................................................................... 242
11.4.8 Grounding the Reconstruction Station...........................................................................246
12 Job Card IST A009 - MTD Deflectors........................................................................................249
13 Job Card IST A010 - Acquisition System Backup..................................................................... 251
13.3.1 Update IDC files on the AWS........................................................................................ 251
13.3.2 ADS Backup.................................................................................................................. 251
13.3.2.1 Query and record the settings of the Network Interface Card (NIC)...........................252
13.3.2.2 Manually Backup System Options..............................................................................253
13.3.3 IDC Backup................................................................................................................... 254
14 Job Card IST A011 - Gantry Components Software Update.....................................................255
15 Job Card IST A012 - IDC Software Upgrade............................................................................ 256
15.3.1 Install the Operating System and IDC application software (35 minutes)..................... 257
15.3.2 Update IDC Files........................................................................................................... 257
15.3.3 Restore IDC Configuration............................................................................................ 257
15.3.3.1 For upgraded systems that had the V1/V2, or V3 Control Station (with SB150
or U20 computer)...................................................................................................257
15.3.3.2 For upgraded systems that already had the V4 Control Station (with Z400
computer) or V5 Control Station (with Kontron R2 computer)............................... 257
16 Job Card IST A012a - IDC Calibration Restore.........................................................................258
17 Job Card IST A012b - Detector Calibration (for new systems and those just field
upgraded to Accelera)................................................................................................. 259
18 Job Card IST A012c - Configure Detector.................................................................................261
18.3.1 Update IDC Files........................................................................................................... 261
18.3.2 Load Detector Parameters............................................................................................ 262
18.3.3 Load Detector Firmware (pre-LFOV2 systems only)..................................................... 262
19 Job Card IST A013 - AWS Software Installation....................................................................... 264

19.3.1 ADS Installation From Scratch...................................................................................... 265
19.3.2 Verifying ADS installation Success................................................................................266
20 Job Card IST A013a – Collimator Check Script Installation...................................................... 267
21 Job Card IST A014 - Create RSA Key and Update ADS Hostname.........................................269
21.3.1 Ensure that the Reconstruction Computer is Powered ON........................................... 269
21.3.2 Create RSA Key and Update ADS Hostname...............................................................269
22 Job Card IST A014a - AWS Configuration Restore.................................................................. 271
22.4.1 Restore ADS configuration parameters.........................................................................271
22.4.2 Post-restore tasks..........................................................................................................272
23 Job Card IST A014b - AWS Configuration................................................................................ 274
23.2.1 Restore Tasks............................................................................................................... 274
23.2.2 Post-restore Tasks........................................................................................................ 275
24 Job Card IST A015 – MTD Unique ID Declaration.................................................................... 276
25 Job Card IST A016 - Provide Documentation........................................................................... 278
25.3.1 User and Service Technical Publications...................................................................... 278
25.3.2 Other Technical Publications.........................................................................................279
26 Job Card IST A017 - Send Localization Card and Send Completion Report............................ 280
27 Job Card IST A018 - Image Processing Configuration............................................................. 281
28 Job Card IST A019 - Stereotaxy Configuration......................................................................... 282
29 Job Card IST A021 - MTD table stand...................................................................................... 284
30 Job Card IST A022 - Upgrade Rotation Board and Rotation Gas Spring................................. 287
30.4.1 Check and if necessary, upgrade Rotation Board......................................................... 289
30.4.2 Check and if necessary, upgrade Rotation Gas Spring.................................................289
31 Job Card IST A023 - Detector Rails.......................................................................................... 292
31.4.1 Determine if the Existing Detector Rails Need Changing.............................................. 293
31.4.2 Remove the Existing Detector Rails.............................................................................. 293
31.4.3 Install the Compatible Detector Rails............................................................................ 294
32 Job Card IST A024 - Upgrade Precise 50N Rotation Clutch.....................................................298
32.3.1 Prerequisites..................................................................................................................298
32.3.2 Disassembly of the Clutch............................................................................................. 299
32.3.3 Reassembly of the Clutch..............................................................................................299

32.3.4 Check Cable Positioning............................................................................................... 302
33 Job Card IST A025 – BSLM Board Compatibility Check...........................................................304
34 Job Card IST A027 - Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable...................................................... 306
35 Job Card ELE A021 – External Network Configuration............................................................. 311
35.3.1 Obtain summary of previous external networking information from manual backup..... 315
35.3.2 Re-configure external network IP address, external network netmask and default
gateway on the Reconstruction Computer............................................................ 315
35.3.2.1 Configure the External Network IP Address; Netmask, and Routing (Gateway)
Information on the Reconstruction Computer........................................................315
35.3.2.2 Adding additional gateways or default routes.............................................................316
35.3.3 Restore permitted hosts................................................................................................ 318
35.3.4 Make hospital network connection, and if necessary restore Network Interface
Card (NIC) speed settings..................................................................................... 319
35.3.4.1 Make network connection to the hospital network......................................................319
35.3.4.2 Determine hospital maximum network speed.............................................................319
35.3.4.3 If necessary, permanently configure the supported network speed........................... 321
36 Job Card ELE A022 – Worklist AE Title Configuration.............................................................. 325
36.4.1 Set the Worklist AETitle.................................................................................................325
36.4.2 Check the Worklist AETitle has been set...................................................................... 326
37 Job Card ELE A025 - Reconstruction Computer and/or ADS Computer Post Install
Configuration............................................................................................................... 328
37.3.1 Restoring the Reconstruction Computer Configuration (post LFC)............................... 328
37.3.1.1 Reestablish connectivity with the ADS Computer...................................................... 328
37.3.1.2 Restore the Reconstruction Computer Configuration.................................................329
37.3.2 Restoring the ADS Computer Configuration (post LFC)................................................331
37.3.2.1 Reestablish connectivity with the Reconstruction Computer......................................331
37.3.2.2 Restore the ADS Computer Configuration................................................................. 332
38 Job Card ELE A030 - Software and firmware reload or update................................................ 334
38.1 Positioner software and firmware..................................................................................... 334
38.1.1 Gantry CPU software (Poseidon)............................................................................ 334
38.1.2 Gantry node firmware.............................................................................................. 334
38.2 MTD firmware................................................................................................................... 334

38.3 ADS software....................................................................................................................334
38.4 IDC software.....................................................................................................................335
38.5 Reconstruction software................................................................................................... 335
39 Job Card ELE A052 - Back Up/Restore.................................................................................... 337
39.4.1 Backup procedure......................................................................................................... 337
39.4.2 Restore procedure.........................................................................................................338
39.4.3 IDC reboot..................................................................................................................... 340
39.4.4 Backup troubleshooting................................................................................................. 340
40 Job Card ELE A055a - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT1 network).................................343
40.3.1 Create a Backup Directory............................................................................................ 346
40.3.2 Disable the Second Internal Network............................................................................ 347
40.3.3 Change IDC IP Address................................................................................................ 347
40.3.4 Change Poseidon (Gantry CPU) IP Address.................................................................348
40.3.5 Re-enable the Second Internal Network........................................................................349
40.3.6 Change the ADS Computer Internal IP Address........................................................... 349
40.3.7 Copy Backup Files from the IPbak Directory to CD-R...................................................356
40.3.8 Completion.................................................................................................................... 357
40.3.9 Steering Guide For Future Component Upgrades.........................................................357
40.3.9.1 Steering Guide for Future AWS Software Upgrades on the ADS Computer..............357
40.3.9.2 Steering Guide for Future Software Upgrades on the IDC......................................... 357
40.3.9.3 Steering Guide for Future Software Upgrades on the Gantry CPU............................358
41 Job Card ELE A055b - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT2 network).................................359
41.3.1 Modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the
Reconstruction Computer......................................................................................363
41.3.2 Modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the ADS
Computer...............................................................................................................365
41.3.2.1 Modify the Solaris Network Settings on the ADS Computer.......................................366
41.3.2.2 Update the hosts file on the ADS Computer...............................................................375
41.3.3 Reverting back the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the
ADS Computer to the default values..................................................................... 377
41.3.3.1 Revert back the Solaris Network Settings on the ADS Computer.............................. 377
41.3.3.2 Revert back the hosts file on the ADS Computer....................................................... 387
Chapter 6 CALIBRATIONS AND CONFIGURATION.......................................................................... 391

1 Job Card CAL A001 - Detector Gain Calibration 3D................................................................... 391
1.4.1 Detector Gain Calibration................................................................................................ 392
1.4.2 Corrective actions after failure.........................................................................................393
2 Job Card CAL A043 - Detector Gain Calibration 2D MTD.......................................................... 395
2.4.1 Detector Gain Calibration................................................................................................ 395
3 Job Card CAL A048 - Calibration of Compression Force Sensor MTD...................................... 398
3.4.1 Compression Force Sensor Calibration...........................................................................399
3.4.2 Compression Force Sensor Calibration Check............................................................... 400
4 Job Card CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset Calibration MTD.......................................... 401
4.4.1 Paddle Number References............................................................................................ 401
4.4.2 Display the existing Offset for Compression Paddles......................................................402
4.4.3 Define the Current Offset for Each of the Compression Paddles.................................... 403
4.4.4 Specify final the Offset for Each of the Compression Paddles........................................ 404
5 Job Card CAL A050 - Compression Thickness Calibration MTD................................................ 407
5.4.1 Compression Thickness Calibration................................................................................ 407
5.4.2 Compression Thickness Calibration Check.....................................................................409
6 Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration with MTD....................................................................... 410
7 Job Card CFG A001 - Reconstruction Computer Configuration................................................. 412
7.1 Accessing the Reconstruction Computer Configuration Pages..........................................412
7.2 Reconstruction Computer Configuration Pages................................................................. 412
7.3 Access................................................................................................................................ 413
7.4 DICOM................................................................................................................................413
7.5 Image Quality..................................................................................................................... 414
7.5.1 General IQ Configuration Parameters....................................................................... 415
7.6 Networking..........................................................................................................................415
7.6.1 Configuring the external network IP address and netmask....................................... 415
7.6.2 Configuring the default gateway................................................................................ 417
8 Job Card CFG A002 - Modify Tomo Volume Images Windowing Preset Order..........................418
Chapter 7 CHECKS..............................................................................................................................421
1 Job Card CHK A001 - Angulation Check.................................................................................... 421
1.4.1 Column to Detector Earth Cables....................................................................................421
1.4.2 Detector Cable Set.......................................................................................................... 423
2 Job Card CHK A002 - Compression Paddle Chest Wall Test..................................................... 426
2.4.1 Compression Paddle Chest Wall Test.............................................................................426
2.4.2 Compression Paddle (Coin) Measurements....................................................................427
2.4.3 Action Limits.................................................................................................................... 431
3 Job Card CHK A003 - Flat Field 3D............................................................................................ 433
3.4.1 Accessing the test........................................................................................................... 435
3.4.2 Performing the test.......................................................................................................... 435
3.4.3 Corrective action in case of failure.................................................................................. 436
3.4.3.1 Brightness Non Uniformity Test Fails........................................................................... 436
3.4.3.2 Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) Non uniformity Fails..........................................................437
4 Job Card CHK A004 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score 3D.....................................................439
5 Job Card CHK A005 - AOP check 3D......................................................................................... 443
5.4.1 Accessing the test screen................................................................................................444
6 Job Card CHK A006 - Volume Coverage....................................................................................446
7 Job Card CHK A010 - Grid texture..............................................................................................449
7.4.1 Accessing the test........................................................................................................... 450
8 Job Card CHK A011 - Ground Continuity and Leakage Current Tests....................................... 452
8.4.1 Zero the Resistance Offset of the Electrical Safety Analyzer.......................................... 454
8.4.2 Prepare the System for the Tests....................................................................................454
8.4.3 Perform Protective Earth Resistance Tests.....................................................................456
8.4.4 Perform Leakage Current Tests...................................................................................... 459
9 Job Card CHK A012 - Overall system behavior check................................................................464

9.1 Check the system for Gantry related errors........................................................................464
10 Job Card CHK A020 – Collimator Compatibility Check............................................................. 465
11 Job Card CHK A029 - Breast Support Tests for the MTD......................................................... 467
11.3.1 MTD Locking Mechanism Tests.................................................................................... 468
11.3.1.1 Test MTD Locking Mechanism Locking Action...........................................................468
11.3.1.2 Test MTD 3D light.......................................................................................................469
11.3.1.3 Test MTD Locking Mechanism Release Action..........................................................470
11.3.2 Red Line Test................................................................................................................ 471
11.3.3 5 mm Test......................................................................................................................473
12 Job Card CHK A033 — CNR and MTF Measurement with MTD.............................................. 474
13 Job Card CHK A037 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score 2D MTD.......................................... 477
13.4.1 Preparing the test.......................................................................................................... 478
13.4.2 Accessing the test......................................................................................................... 479
13.4.3 Performing the test........................................................................................................ 479
14 Job Card CHK A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check 2D MTD.................................................... 482
14.4.1 Accessing the test......................................................................................................... 483
14.4.2 Performing the test........................................................................................................ 483
15 Job Card CHK A050 - Breast Tomosynthesis Object Construction Checks............................. 485
15.4.1 Initial RIS/HIS Configuration Check...............................................................................486
15.4.2 BTO Construction From a Worklist from RIS/HIS (DICOM Conformance Statement).. 487
16 Job Card CHK A051 - PACS Compatibility Tests With Breast Tomosynthesis Objects........... 491
16.4.1 PACS Compatibility Checks With BTO..........................................................................491
Chapter 8 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND FOLLOW-UP................................................................. 497

1 About this chapter........................................................................................................................497
2 LBK-A001 - System configuration form....................................................................................... 498
2.1 General System Information...............................................................................................498
2.2 CESM Option......................................................................................................................501
2.3 CAD Configuration..............................................................................................................501
3 LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual record sheets.................... 502
3.1 Site information and general configuration......................................................................... 503

3.2 Filter management..............................................................................................................504
3.3 Browser preferences.......................................................................................................... 507
3.4 Medical application preferences......................................................................................... 508
3.5 Worklist management.........................................................................................................512
3.6 Worklist Query Definitions.................................................................................................. 513
3.7 Network management........................................................................................................ 513
3.8 Printer management........................................................................................................... 514
3.9 PPS management.............................................................................................................. 516
3.10 Needle setup.................................................................................................................... 517
3.11 AOP configuration............................................................................................................ 518
3.12 Network routing information (S93ROUTE File)................................................................ 519
3.13 IP filters information (permitted network hosts)................................................................ 520
4 LBK-A004 - System Configuration form Reconstruction Computer............................................ 521
4.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................ 521
4.2 MANUAL PARAMETER BACKUP..................................................................................... 521
Chapter 1 Safety
1 Introduction
This chapter contains safety information specific to the option.
For safety information regarding the System refer to the Safety chapter in the Core SIP.
CAUTION
Connection of the system to a network/data coupling that includes other
equipment could result in previously unidentified risks to patients, operators or
third parties
The responsible organization should identify, analyze, evaluate and control these
risks.
Subsequent changes to the network/data coupling could introduce new risks and
require additional analysis.
Changes to the network/data coupling include:
• changes in network/data coupling configuration,
• connection of additional items to the network/data coupling
• disconnecting items from the network/data coupling
• update of equipment connected to the network/data coupling
• upgrade of equipment connected to the network/data coupling.
WARNING
IF THIS EQUIPMENT IS MODIFIED, APPROPRIATE INSPECTION AND
TESTING MUST BE CONDUCTED TO ENSURE CONTINUED SAFE USE OF
THE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING
THE USE OF ACCESSORIES, TRANSDUCERS AND CABLES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF TRANSDUCERS AND
CABLES SOLD BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE SYSTEM AS
REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR INTERNAL COMPONENTS, MAY RESULT IN
INCREASED EMISSIONS OR DECREASED IMMUNITY OF THE SYSTEM.
Chapter 1 Safety 31
2 Definition of Warnings and Notes

DANGER
INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT
AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
WARNING
INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Used for instructions to the Operator to prevent damage to property.
NOTE: Used to draw attention to information that is important for the Operator to know.
32 2 Definition of Warnings and Notes

3 Job Card LOTO A001 - Lock-Out / Tag-Out (LOTO) Procedures

3.1 Personnel Requirements
Personnel
Preliminary Reqs Procedure Finalization
Requirements
1 Field Engineer Not Applicable 25 mins Not Applicable
3.2 Overview
Lock-out / Tag-out (LOTO) is a process that ensures all energy sources are locked in a safe
condition, and remain secured in order to prevent the unintentional energizing of equipment.
This Job Card establishes the minimum requirements according to GEHC Standards, for locking
out live power in order to achieve the power isolation required to carry out any installation,
deinstallation, maintenance, or repair work on the Senographe system.
All authorized personnel are required to follow these instructions, as well as any other safety
procedures related to the operation of the Senographe system, or to work carried out in areas
close to the Senographe system.
3.3 Preliminary Requirements
3.3.1 Tools and Test Equipment
Illustration 1-1: LOTO kit
Chapter 1 Safety 33
Item Qty Effectivity Part# Manufacturer

Small Yellow Box (A) 1 Used to secure - -
disconnected
power cable
connections.
Large Yellow Box (B) 1 Used to secure - -
disconnected
power cable
connections.
Red Padlock (and key) (C) 1 Used during - -
and Red Label (D) work time of a
Field Engineer.
Yellow Padlock and key (E) 1 Used during - -
and Yellow Label (F) non-work time
of a Field
Engineer.
Mutihasp (G) 1 Used in - -
conjunction
with multiple
padlocks when
more than one
Field Engineer
is required for
the task.
Blue "Lockout Point" Labels 1 - - -
(H)
Standard Tool Box 1 - - -
Digital Multimeter with a 1 - - -
1000 V rating
3.3.2 Safety
WARNING
THE FOLLOWING ELECTRICAL RISK IS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SYSTEM:
220V MONOPHASE AC MAINS POWER SUPPLY IN THE LINE SUPPLY
CABLE GOING FROM THE MAINS DISTRIBUTION PANEL INTO THE
GENERATOR.
FAILURE TO ISOLATE DANGEROUS POWER SOURCES MAY CAUSE
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
34 3 Job Card LOTO A001 - Lock-Out / Tag-Out (LOTO)

Procedures
WARNING
STORED RESIDUAL VOLTAGE WITHIN THE CAPACITORS OF GENERATOR.
WARNING
EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR THE ROOM LAMPS THAT ARE
CONNECTED TO THE GENERATOR RELAY BOARD.
3.3.3 Required Conditions
Condition Reference Effectivity
The external power source for the room - -
lamps must be under 30 V. If the room
lamps power source exceeds 30 V you
must change this power source.
To perform a LOTO procedure you must - -
have undergone LOTO training .
3.4 Procedure
3.4.1 Prepare the LOTO procedure
Before the actual procedure start, a few preparatory steps must be performed.
1. If not already, obtain the site specific LOTO procedure available to hand.
The specific LOTO procedure may vary from site to site and depends on the Mains
Distribution Panel at the hospital.
The specific LOTO procedure will be similar in content to the present Job Card, but may
address items that are specific to the hospital configuration.
2. Verbally inform all personnel:
• of the date and time on which the lock-out will take place,
• of the date and time at which the equipment will be operational again.
3. Inform all the users of the Senographe system that it is currently decommissioned from
operation and that they can no longer use the Senographe system until they are instructed
that the Senographe system is recommissioned.
3.4.2 Identify the energy sources on the system
1. On the Mains Distribution Panel, identify the power source which supplies AC power to the
Line Supply Cable which goes into the Generator.
Chapter 1 Safety 35
2. Identify the points where there is electrical energy in the system and the magnitude or the
electrical energy.
3. Identify the power source which supplies the lamp cables that go into the Generator Relay
board.
3.4.3 Switch the Senographe system OFF
1. Go to the AWS Browser.
2.
Click the [system shutdown] button .
A confirmation message appears asking if the entire system should be shut down.
3. Click on [YES].
Complete system and UPS shut down takes about two minutes from switch-off.
NOTE: The Control Station follows an automatic shutdown procedure. No prompts are
displayed.
Do not disturb this procedure by attempting to enter commands at this time. It
is designed to safeguard image and patient data.
4. Ensure that the Acquisition Workstation has completed its shutdown.
Shutdown is complete when there is no longer any display on the LCD Monitor screen
(i.e., the screen appears black), and the LEDs on the UPS are off.
3.4.4 Isolation of the Generator Line Supply power source
You must isolate two types of power source which lead into the Generator of the Senographe
system:
• the Mains Distribution Panel which supplies the power source for the Line Supply Cable
going into the Generator,
• the power source for the room lamps running into the Generator.
3.4.4.1 Isolating the Mains Distribution Panel

The Mains Distribution Panel may vary in different hospital. The specific details are listed in the
site specific LOTO procedure. Use the following generic steps to isolate the power source going
to the Senographe system:
1. Turn the handle of the Mains Distribution Panel into the OFF position to switch off the AC
mains power going to the Generator cabinet.

Procedures
2. Press the OFF button on the front of the Mains Distribution Panel.
3. Turn all the necessary switches/breakers on the front of the Mains Distribution Panel into the
OFF position.
3.4.4.2 Isolating the Room Lamps power source
1. Locate the power source of the room lamps that route electrical energy into the Relay Board
on the Generator.
2. Isolate the power source.
The room lamps power source can vary in different hospitals. Typically you will need to
cut the power source circuit breaker or isolator.
3.4.5 Apply LOTO
If the activity requires one Field Engineer go to Section 3.4.5.1. If the activity requires more than
one Field Engineer go to Section 3.4.5.2.
3.4.5.1 If the activity requires one Field Engineer
NOTE: The key and the red LOTO padlock are the personal property of the individual Field
Engineer and must never be loaned to others.
1. Install an open red LOTO padlock onto the Mains Distribution Panel.
2. Insert a red LOTO label to isolate incoming supply.
Chapter 1 Safety 37
3. Close the red LOTO padlock.

3.4.5.2 If the activity requires more than one Field Engineer
NOTE: The key and the red LOTO padlock is the personal property of the individual Field
Engineer and must never be loaned to others.
1. Install the Multihasp onto the Mains Distribution Panel.
If required, use the appropriate RED plastic adapter from the LOTO kit to lock-out
individual breakers according to size or type.
2. Install one red LOTO padlock and one red LOTO tag on the Multihasp for each Field
Engineer.
3.4.5.3 Final steps

1. Write the date and Field Engineer name on each of the red LOTO labels.
2. Apply reasonable (not excessive) force to perform a "try-out". Make sure that the LOTO
device does not allow you to switch on the power at the Mains Distribution Panel.

Procedures
3.4.6 Discharge stored energy

1. Remove the four Generator side panels (see Job Card PHY A042 - Remove/Reinstall
Generator Covers in the Senographe Essential SIP).
2. Use a Digital Multimeter to ensure that the Line Supply Cable voltage between L1 and N is
at 0 V.
3. Wait for at least ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge .
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
THE CAPACITORS STORE A HIGH AMOUNT OF ELECTRIC ENERGY
WAIT AT LEAST TEN MINUTES FOR THE CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE
4. Check for residual voltage using a Digital Multimeter (do not rely on Neon lights).
5. Use a voltmeter with a rating of 1000 VDC to check that there is no residual voltage
between screws S1 and S2 on the Generator.
Chapter 1 Safety 39
6. Use the Digital Multimeter to check that the 27 V circuit is at 0 V between the following items
of the Supply Command Board 200PL2:
a. Test Points P27V and 0/27V.
b. Connections on each side of Fuse F3.
3.4.7 Verify room lamp electrical source is within safe limits

The cables between the XJ1, XJ2 and XJ3 connectors on the Generator Relay board contain a
live voltage of up to 30 V from an external source. This voltage is not harmful to people working

Procedures
on the Generator. However, the source must be isolated and off when you undertake
maintenance or corrective work so that there is no risk of causing a short circuit which can
damage the Generator or the external power supplies. For personnel safety, it is extremely
important that you ensure that this voltage is no more than the values specified in the following
steps.
1. Switch on the room lamp power source in the hospital.
2. Use a Digital Multimeter to ensure that the X-ray ON and Seno ON lamp cables voltage
between the XJ1 and XJ2 connectors on the Generator Relay board are at 30 V or less:
• If the voltage is above 30 V (AC or DC) then before you proceed with your planned
maintenance or corrective tasks, perform the following action: change the electrical
energy source which supplies power to the X-ray ON and Seno ON lamp cables to
ensure that no more than 30 V (AC or DC) is supplied to the Generator Relay board.
• If the voltage is 30 V (AC or DC) or less, continue.

3. Close the room door to ensure that a voltage is present on the Relay board XJ3 connector.
4. Use a Digital Multimeter to ensure that the room door cables voltage between the XJ3
connector on the Generator Relay board are at 24 V DC or less.
• If the voltage is above 24 V DC then, before you proceed with your planned
maintenance or corrective tasks, perform the following action: change the electrical
energy source which supplies power to the room lamp cables so that no more than
24 V DC is supplied to the Generator Relay board.
• If the voltage is 24 V DC or less then continue.

5. Isolate the power source of the room lamps that route electrical energy into the Relay Board
on the Generator.
The room lamps power source can vary in different hospitals, but typically you will need
to cut the power source circuit breaker or isolator.
Chapter 1 Safety 41
3.4.8 PROCEDURE FOR THE RECONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT

Follow this procedure to return the Senographe system or subsystem components to its normal
operation state:
1. Remove the tools from the area of the system.
2. Make sure that all the parts and covers are correctly fitted.
3. Inform everybody of the re-connection of the device.
4. Check the area and the equipment.
5. Remove the LOTO devices including locking pins or bolts.
6. Reestablish the power to the system.
7. Return the equipment in its normal operating state.
8. Perform a system function check.
3.5 Finalization
No finalization steps.

Procedures
Chapter 2 General Description

1 Introduction
1.1 Scope and Applicability of the Publication
This Service publication provides all information required to understand and plan the installation,
and to install the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
This publication contains only class A information.
It is intended for use by Field Engineers installing and maintaining the system who are
employed by:
• GEMS.
• A third party supplier with an agreed contract with GE.
• A third party supplier without an agreed contract with GE.
Chapter 2 General Description 43

1.2 Content of this Publication

This Service Manual contains the following chapters:
• Pre Installation
Specifies the site planning requirements and pre-installation planning procedures required
for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• System Description
Describes the main technical aspects of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• Installation
Provides a steering guide with appropriate installation Job Cards to install the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis option.
• Calibrations and Configuration

Provides Job Cards to calibrate and configure the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• Checks
Provides Job Cards to check various aspects of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• System Identification and Follow-up

Gives system configuration and service history information, by providing Log Book (LBK)
forms for noting down the existing parameters of the Core Senographe Essential and the
GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
44 1 Introduction
1.3 Publication Conventions

System information, such as command strings, prompts and responses, is represented in
consistent ways throughout this publication.
1.3.1 Reference Conventions
Italics are used to reference other publications:
For more information on installing the Bucky, refer to the Operator Manual.
Blue text is used for hyperlink cross references to other sections within the publication:
For more information about the difference between entering and typing, refer to Section 1.3.4.
1.3.2 Graphical User Interface Conventions
1.3.2.1 Windows and Dialog Boxes, Radio Buttons, Check Boxes and Fields
Titles of windows and dialog boxes are in bold. Also, check boxes, radio buttons and fields are
also in bold. For example:
• The Parameters dialog box appears.
• The Save As dialog box contains a Save in: field, a [Save] button, and a [Cancel] button.
• In the Parameters dialog box, enable the 10 x 12 check box, and click [OK].
• In the Save As dialog box, type an appropriate filename in the Filename field, and click
[Save].
1.3.2.2 Buttons
Buttons are surrounded by square brackets. For example:
• Click the [OK] button to continue.
• Click [OK] to continue.
• In the Save As dialog box clicking the [Save] button will save the specified file, while clicking
the [Cancel] button will cancel the save operation.
1.3.2.3 Menus
When an instruction to select a menu option is given, the path to the menu option will be
represented with the menu options in normal typeface and each level separated by an arrow.
Instructions to select menu items within the GUI can vary, as follows:
• If it is obvious which window the procedure is describing, the selection of the menu is simply
as follows:
From the menu bar, select View→Toolbars→Edit.
• If it is not obvious which window the procedure is describing, the instruction also includes
the window before the menu selection as follows:
In the Arbortext Editor window, select View→Toolbars→Edit.

1.3.2.4 Generator menu

When an instruction to navigate in the Generator menu is given, the path will be represented
with the menu options in bold capital letters and each level separated by a slash:
SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CKSUM/CKSUM
1.3.2.5 Keyboard Keys
Keyboard key names are surrounded by angled brackets, as follows:
• Press the <Y> key to continue.
• Press the <Esc> key to exit.
• Press the <Up Arrow> cursor key to choose the 60 Hz option and press the <Spacebar> to
continue.
1.3.2.6 Mouse Button
It is assumed that the left mouse button is the primary one, as follows:
• When an instruction simply says to click, you must press the left mouse button.
• When an instruction describes which mouse button to click (right mouse click, or middle
mouse click), you must press the appropriate mouse button.
1.3.3 Command Line Interface Conventions
1.3.3.1 Command Strings
Command strings that you enter appear in bold face courier font:
cd /tmp
NOTE: When entering commands, you must type the command string exactly as shown,
including spaces, and then press the <Return> key. However, on some occasions (for
example responding to prompts in an executed script) you do not press the <Return>
key. For more information about the difference between entering and typing, refer to
Section 1.3.4.
Variable parameters appear in italics:
mkdir date
An explanation of the variable follows the command string, as in the following example:
where date is the current date, and takes the format YYYYMMDD.
1.3.3.2 System Prompts and Responses
System prompts and responses appear in courier font:
Start of Backup
BackUp of Network Management was Successful
BackUp of Worklist Management was Successful
BackUp of Printer Management was Successful
BackUp of Review Room Management was Successful
BackUp of Filter Management was Successful
46 1 Introduction
1.3.3.3 Directory, Path Names and Filenames

Directory names, path names and filenames appear in courier font:
The /tmp directory contains temporary files that are deleted when the system reboots.
1.3.4 Entering and Typing Instructions
Depending on the situation, you are instructed to either type or enter a command or string of
text.
When required to press the <Return> key after typing a command or text string, the command
or text string is prefixed with enter or entering. For example, in a command line interface (CLI)
you are instructed as follows:
Move to the temp directory, by entering:
cd /tmp
In some cases you are not required to press the return key after typing a command or string of
text, for example:
• field entries in a graphical user interface (GUI)
• typing a menu option in a CLI which does not require you to press the return (or enter) key
In these cases, you are instructed to type the appropriate command or string of text. For
example, to enter your name in a GUI field you are instructed as follows:
Type your first name in the First Name field.
or
Type 192.168.0.5 in the IP Address field.
1.3.5 References to spacial locations of the systems
References to the sides of the parts of the system (e.g. Gantry and the Control Station) are
made from the absolute standpoint of the part itself, as shown in the below example:

1.4 Acronyms Glossary

Acronym Meaning
A
ACR American College of Radiology
ADS Apollo Digital System
ADU Analog to Digital Unit (or "count")
AGD Average Glandular Dose
AOP Automatic Optimization of Parameters
ARC Analog Readout Chip
B
BNU Brightness Non Uniformity
BPA Bisphenol A
C
CC CranioCaudal
CESM Contrasted Enhanced Spectral Mammography
CF Conversion Factor
CNR Contrast
CsI Cesium Iodide
CTQ Critical to Quality
D
DBT Digital Breast Tomosynthesis
DEHP Di Ethylhexyl Phtalate
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
DMR Dual Molybdenium
DQE Detective Quantum Efficiency
DRS Design Requirement Specification
E
ESAK Entrance Skin Air Kerma
ESE Entrance Skin Exposure
EUREF European Reference Organization for Quality Assured Breast Screening and Diagnostic
Services
F
FE Field Engineer
FFDM Full Field Digital Mammography
FOV Field of view
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
G
GEN Generator
GUI Graphical User Interface
H
HFM High Frequency Modulation
48 1 Introduction
Acronym Meaning
HVL Half
I
IDC Image Detection Controller
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IFF Image Feedback Function
IM Installation Manual
IQ Image Quality
IQST Image Quality Signature Test
K
kV kiloVolt
kVp kiloVolt peak
L
LF Large Focal Spot
LFOV Large Field Of View
LRS Long Range Scatter
LSB Least significant bit
LSL Lower Specification Limit
LUT Look Up Table
M
mA milliAmpere
mAs milliAmpere per second
MG DICOM code for Mammography Modality
MLO MedioLateral Oblique
Mo Molybdenum
MPC Medical Procedure Card
MQSA Mammography Quality Standard Acts
MTD Motorized Tomosynthesis Device
MTF Modulation Transfer Function
N
N/A Not Applicable
NPS Noise Power Spectrum
O
OLC On Line Center
OM Operator Manual
OME Operator Manual Extract
OPET Overall Pre-Exposure Time
OS Operating System
P
PIM Pre-Installation Manual
PMMA PolyMethyl MethAcrylate

Acronym Meaning
PN Part Number
PPS Performed Procedure Step
Q
QAP Quality Assurance Procedure
QC Quality Control
QG Quick Guide
QIF Quantum Improvement Factor
R
RAC Risk Assessment and Control
Rh Rhodium
RoHS Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances
ROI Region Of Interest
RRA Repeat and Reject Analysis
RWS Review WorkStation
S
SDNR Signal Difference to Noise Ratio
SF Small Focal Spot
SID Source to Image Distance
SIP Service Information Procedures
SM Service Manual
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
SPS Scheduled Procedure Step
T
Tp Transmission of Primary Radiation
Ts Transmission of Secondary Radiation
U
UID Unique IDentifier
USL Upper Specification Limit
50 1 Introduction
1.5 Proprietary Considerations

This chapter contains information relating to the proprietary aspects of installation and service of
the Senographe system.
• The level of service tools and support available to a service engineer working on the system
at any time depends upon:
○ The equipment life cycle (first installation, in warranty, out of warranty).

○ The category of the service engineer. Access to proprietary service tools is restricted to
GEHC personnel and to service organizations which have entered contracts with GEHC.
○ The existence of a service contract between the customer and GEHC or a recognized
distributor).
• Outside of warranty, the customer can establish a service contract directly with GEHC, or
with a non- GEHC service organization. Non-GEHC service organizations can have Peer
license or Exclusive contracts with GEHC.
1.5.1 CATEGORIES OF SERVICE ENGINEER

Three categories of service engineer can be involved in service operations on the Senographe
Acquisition equipment:
• GE Exclusive. Engineers and technicians employed directly by GE or by recognized
distributors (organizations having exclusive agreements with GE). They carry a current
service key (see ) and have access to all proprietary information and tools, including OLC
and Insite access.
• Peer license. Engineers and technicians employed by organizations which have limited
agreements with GE. For example, hospitals who wish to perform their own maintenance
can enter Peer license agreements with GE.
• Third party. Engineers and technicians employed by organizations which have no licensing
agreement with GE. These can include service organizations which are in competition with
GE.
1.5.2 SERVICE TOOLS
1.5.2.1 Embedded Service Software
Access to some embedded service software is restricted when the category of service is
Regular or Advanced, as summarized here:
Service software Service level
A C M
Regular Advanced Exclusive
Error log No links to corrective actions With links to corrective actions With links to corrective actions
Diagnostics No automated procedures With automated procedures With automated procedures
Image quality Some restrictions Some restrictions No restrictions
Calibrations No restrictions No restrictions No restrictions
Configuration:

Summary No restrictions No restrictions No restrictions

Site information
General Contract date not modifiable Contract date not modifiable Contract date is modifiable
Insite No access No access Insite access
Utilities N/A N/A Scripts
1.5.2.2 Access to Generator Install and Maintenance Menus
• The Generator Install and Maintenance Menus on the X-ray Console are protected with a
password.
• To access these menus:
○ Press the <SETUP> key and select the option PASSWORD.

○ Enter the password code 5332 to enter the Install and Maintenance menus.
1.5.2.3 IQST Phantom
An IQST Phantom is shipped with the system; there must be one on each site.
An IQST Phantom is essential for certain proprietary (Class M) calibration and verification
operations.
1.5.2.4 Enabling Class C Access to Diagnostics Functions
To enable diagnostic for class C users, GE FE must go on-site with their class M service key
2150965-5 to connect the same service key, allowing to change the installation date on the
system. They must change this date to first day of class-C contract. For a period of one year
after this date, the diagnostic functions are enabled on-site. This operation needs to be repeated
every year, until the end of the class C contract.
1.5.3 SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
1.5.3.1 Service Manual (SM) Class A
• The SIP Class A is a “white” document. It contains only non-proprietary information. It is

intended for use by any service engineer involved in servicing the equipment, including
Third Party employees employed by service organizations in competition with GE.
• Class A information includes all necessary information (descriptive and procedural) for pre-
installation work, installation, and maintenance of the Senographe Essential.
• Class A Job Card numbers are identified with the prefix A.

1.5.3.2 Service Manual (SM) Class C
• The SIP Class C is a “yellow” document. It intended for use only by service engineers
operating under a Peer license, such as employees of a hospital having signed an
agreement with GE.
• In addition to all Class A information, the SIP Class C includes advanced information
covering the theory of operation and troubleshooting.
• Class C Job Card numbers are identified with the prefix C.
52 1 Introduction
1.5.3.3 Service Manual (SM) Class M
• The SIP Class M is a “red” document, containing GE-proprietary information. It is intended

for use only by service engineers with GE Exclusive rights, employed directly by GE or by
organizations having an exclusive agreement with GE.
• In addition to all Class A and Class C information, the SIP Class M includes procedures for
advanced Image Quality checks and for Insite check-out.
• Class M Job Card numbers are identified with the prefix M.

2 GE Breast Tomosynthesis Labels and Symbols

The label for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option (Illustration 2-1) is located on the on the
Reconstruction Station housing.
Illustration 2-1: Example of GE Breast Tomosynthesis Label
2.1 Meaning of symbols used in labels
Type B equipment
Alternating current
54 2 GE Breast Tomosynthesis Labels and Symbols

This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted mu‐
nicipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufac‐
turer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
Name and address of the manufacturer
Date of manufacture
Medical device catalogue number
Medical device serial number
Consult instructions for use. This symbol is white and blue.
Symbol indicating that the Instructions For Use are supplied in electronic form.

2.2 Meaning of symbols on the equipment and accessories
Symbol used on Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD) compatible accessories, such as the compression
paddles. This symbol may be blue or white.
Symbol indicating the direction to turn the unlocking knob to unlock the MTD compression paddle. Turn the
knob clockwise to unlock the paddle.
Symbol indicating the direction to turn the manual adjustment knob to decompress the patient’s breast man‐
ually. Turn the manual adjustment knob away from the patient to decompress the breast.
56 2 GE Breast Tomosynthesis Labels and Symbols

Chapter 3 Pre Installation

1 Pre Installation Requirements
1.1 About this Chapter
The following pre installation requirements are specific to the option:
• Environmental Requirements
• IEC60601-1-2 Electromagnetic Standards Compliance
• Planning for Storage
• Room Layout Planning
• Networking connections
• Associated review workstations
The following requirements are common between the option and the core system, they can be
found in the Pre-Installation System Requirements chapter in the Service Information and
Procedures of the system:
• Noise
• Structural requirements
• Electrical requirements.
• Door lights and safety switch
• Planning for radiation protection
• Insite connection
Chapter 3 Pre Installation 57

1.2 Environmental Requirements

Environmental requirement for the system remain the same as for the Senographe Essential.
For more information, refer to the Pre-Installation System Requirements chapter in the Service
Information and Procedures of the system.
1.2.1 GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit working environment
Table 3-1: GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit working environment
Relative humidity Temperature Atmospheric pressure Altitude

(non-condensing)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
10% 80% 15°C 35°C 700hPa 1060hPa 0m 3000 m
59°F 95°F 0 ft 9840 ft
1.2.2 GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit transport and short term (<5 days) storage conditions
Table 3-2: GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit transport and short term (<5 days) storage conditions -
temperature and humidity
Relative humidity Temperature Atmospheric pressure

(non-condensing)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
10% 85% –20°C 70°C 500hPa 1060hPa
-4°F 158°F
1.2.3 Long term storage

Contact your Field Engineer prior to placing the GE Breast Tomosynthesis in long term storage.
1.2.4 Heat Output
Component kW BTU/h
Reconstruction Computer
0.650 2217
Heat Output (in standby)
58 1 Pre Installation Requirements

1.3 IEC60601-1-2 Electromagnetic Standards Compliance

1.3.1 General
This option complies with the IEC60601-1-2 Edition 2 and 3 EMC standard for medical devices.
It has been tested on a Senographe Essential system. The option is suitable for use in
electromagnetic environments as defined in the limits and recommendations given in the
following tables:
• Emission Compliance level and limits (Table 3-3).
• Immunity Compliance levels and recommendations for ensuring that the equipment retains
its clinical utility (Table 3-4).
This equipment complies with the above EMC standard when used with cables supplied by the
manufacturer up to the maximum lengths permitted by the system design specifications.
1.3.2 Electromagnetic Emission
CAUTION
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option is intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis option should assure that it is used in such an electromagnetic
environment.
Table 3-3: Electromagnetic emission
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option

uses RF energy only for its internal func‐
RF emissions
Group 1 tion. Therefore, its RF emissions are very
CISPR11
low and are not likely to cause any inter‐
ference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A
CISPR11 The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option is
suitable for use in all establishments other
Harmonic emissions than domestic and those directly connect‐
Not applicable
IEC 61000-3-2 ed to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for
Voltage fluctuations/flicker emissions Not applicable domestic purposes.
IEC 61000-3-3
1.3.3 Electromagnetic Immunity

The Senographe system is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The
purchaser or Operator of a Senographe system must ensure that it is used in an
electromagnetic environment as described below:
CAUTION
environment.

Table 3-4: Electromagnetic immunity
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment
guidance
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ±6 kV contact For 240 Vac / 50Hz Floors should be wood, con‐
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±6 kV contact crete or ceramic tile. If floors
±8 kV air are covered with synthetic ma‐
terial, the relative humidity
should be at least 30 %.
Electrical fast transient/burst ±2 kV for power supply lines For 240 Vac / 50Hz and 200 Mains power quality should be
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output lines Vac / 50Hz that of a typical commercial or
±2 kV for power supply lines hospital environment.
±1 kV for input/output Lines
Surge IEC ±1 kV line(s) to line(s) For 240 Vac / 50Hz and 200 Mains power quality should be
61000-4-5 ±2 kV line(s) to earth Vac / 50Hz that of a typical commercial or
±1 kV mode differential hospital environment.
±2 kV mode common
Voltage dips, short interrup‐ <5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for 5 For 240 Vac / 50Hz 0 Vac dur‐ Mains power quality should be
tions and voltage variations on s ing 5 s that of a typical commercial or
power supply input lines And for 200 Vac / 50Hz 0 Vac hospital environment. If the
IEC 61000-4-11 during 5 s user of the GE Breast Tomo‐
synthesis option requires con‐
tinued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recom‐
mended that the GE Breast To‐
mosynthesis option be pow‐
ered from an uninterruptible
power supply or a battery.
As the GE Breast Tomosynthe‐
sis option is part of a system
which rated input current ex‐
ceeds 16 A per phase, it is ex‐
empt from voltage dips tests.
Power frequency (50/60 Hz) 3 A/m 3 A/m for 50Hz Power frequency magnetic
magnetic field And 3 A/m for 60Hz fields should be at levels char‐
IEC 61000-4-8 acteristic of a typical location in
a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
CAUTION
environment.
Table 3-5: Electromagnetic immunity
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications

equipment should be used no closer to any
Conducted RF 3 Vrms part of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option,
3V
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz including cables, than the recommended sep‐
aration distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.

Recommended separation distance

d = 1.17√P 150 kHz to 80 MHz
d = 1.17√P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.33√P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the rec‐
ommended separation distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
Radiated radio-frequency 3 V/m determined by an electromagnetic site survey
[E1] = 3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2,5 GHz (1) should be less than the compliance level
in each frequency range (2).
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equip‐
ment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects and people.
1. Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios,
amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the
electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the meas‐
ured field strength in the location in which the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option is used exceeds the applicable RF compli‐
ance level above, the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal perform‐
ance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
option.
2. Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
1.3.4 Recommended Separation Distances for Portable and Mobile Radio Frequency
Communications Equipment IEC 60601-1-2
CAUTION
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option is intended for use in an electromagnetic
environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or
the user of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option as recommended below, according to the
maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Table 3-6: RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter

Rated maximum output power m
of transmitter
W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 1.17√P d = 1.17√P d = 2.33√P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.16 1.16 2.33
10 3.69 3.69 7.37

100 11.70 11.70 23.30
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be
determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects and people.
1.3.5 Use Limitation

External components:
CAUTION
The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified by
GEMS can result in the degraded Electromagnetic compatibility of the
Senographe.
Refer to the Component Index in the Parts section of the Service Manual for a
list.
1.3.6 Installation Requirements and Environmental Control
In order to minimize interference risks, the following requirements apply.
1.3.6.1 Cable Shielding & Grounding
All interconnecting cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of
cables not properly shielded and grounded can result in the equipment causing radio frequency
interference.
1.3.6.2 Separated Power Supply Distribution Panel & Line
CAUTION
This equipment/system is intended for use by healthcare professionals only. This
equipment/system may cause radio interference or may disrupt the operation of
nearby equipment. It may be necessary to take mitigation measures, such as re-
orienting or relocating the GE Breast Tomosynthesis equipment or shielding the
location.
This product complies with the radiated emission limits of the CISPR11 Group1 Class A
standard.
The Senographe is primarily intended for use in non-domestic environments, and not connected
directly to the public mains supply network. It is primarily intended for use in environments (such
as hospitals) with a dedicated supply system, and in an X-ray shielded room.
To avoid interference in the event that the Senographe is used in a domestic environment (in a
doctors office, for example), it is recommended that it must be connected to a separate AC
power distribution panel and line, and it must be installed in an X-ray shielded room.
1.3.6.3 Subsystem & Accessories Power Supply Distribution
All components, accessories, subsystems, and systems which are electrically connected to the
Senographe must have AC power supplied by the same power distribution panel and line.

NOTE: You can not connect together different electrical devices and supply them by different
AC power distribution lines.
In order to avoid interference, all components and accessories connected to the
Senographe must be connected to the same AC power distribution panel. This AC
power distribution panel which is itself supplied by a single power line.
1.3.6.4 Stacked Components & Equipment
The Senographe must not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or
stacked use is necessary, the Senographe must be monitored to ensure that normal operation
occurs in the configuration in which it is used.
1.3.6.5 Static Magnetic Field Limits
In order to avoid interference on the Senographe system, static field limits from the surrounding
environment are specified.
Static field is specified as less than 1 Gauss in the Examination room (Gantry room), and in the
Control Area (for all Subsystems).
Static field is specified as less than 3 Gauss in the Technical Room.
1.3.6.6 Electrostatic Discharge Environment & Recommendations
In order to reduce electrostatic discharge interference, a charge dissipative floor must be
installed to prevent charge accumulation.
The dissipative floor material must be connected to the system reference ground, if applicable.
Relative humidity must be maintained above 30 percent.

1.4 Electrical Requirements

1.4.1 Introduction
The option’s electrical requirements are identical to the Core system’s requirements, except for
the kVA Load Characteristics.
1.4.2 kVA Load Characteristics
• Maximum power in standby: 1.5 kVA.
• Maximum instantaneous power (during exposures, up to 6 seconds) 9 kVA.
• Power factor: 0.6.
• Line current crest factor: 1.7 at 200 V.

1.5 Planning for Storage

1.5.1 Temporary Storage in the Hospital
There is normally a short delay (e.g., overnight) between the delivery of the equipment and its
installation.
If this delay lasts for more than two days, it is essential that a suitable storage room is available
to receive the equipment in its crates.
Refer to the Environmental Requirements section in the Pre-Installation Manual section of the
Core SIP for information on the environmental requirement.
1.5.2 Packing Information
Table 3-7 lists the main dimensions and masses of shipping crate for the GE Breast
Table 3-7: SHIPPING DIMENSIONS AND MASSES.
Dimensions in mm (inches) Mass in kg (lbs)

Item
Depth Width Height
Pallet 1200 800 1420 137 kg

(47.3 ) (31.5) (55.9) (301.4 lbs)
1.5.3 Constraints for Moving the Equipment Into the Room

Illustration 3-1shows the constraints of moving the equipment into the room in terms of the
shipping crate.

Illustration 3-1: Constraints for Moving the Equipment Into the Room
• the sense of direction is dictated by the pallet lift entry points of the pallet
• the lid and two doors must be closed when moving the crate on a pallet lift

1.6 Room Layout Planning

1.6.1 Dimensions and Masses
Refer to the following pages for more information on major components provided by the option.
For more information on the core system major components, refer to the Room layout planning
section of the Core SIP.
Table 3-8: Dimensions and Masses
Component Depth Width Height Mass

mm (inches) mm (inches) mm (inches) kg (lbs)
Gantry (with MTD) 1273 616 1930 (76) to 2430 418

(50.1) (245.25) (95.67) (922)
Required space: ()
1842
(72.5)
Reconstruction housing 278 590 520 Empty: 19

(10.95) (23.23) (20.48) (42)
With the reconstruction
station: 36
(80)
1.6.2 Layout Constraints for Positioning the Reconstruction Station

The Reconstruction Station can either be placed behind the Control Station or away from the
Control Station. In most situations the Reconstruction Station is placed behind the Control
Station.
• By default (for situations where the Reconstruction Station is directly behind the Control
Station), a cable harness of 600 mm (23.62”) is provided in the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
kit. At the Control Station end, approximately 50 mm (1.97”) of the cable harness is inside
the Control Station. At the Reconstruction Station end, approximately 135 mm (5.31”) of the
cable harness is inside the Reconstruction Station. The remaining 415 mm (16.34”) of cable
harness is external, and facilitates the close proximity curving of the cable harness between
the Control Station and the Reconstruction station. For more information about the cables
supplied within the 600 mm cable harness, see Section 1.9.2.1, Short Harness Cables.
• For situations where the Reconstruction Station cannot be placed directly behind the Control
Station, a cable harness of 8200 mm (322.83”) (5434153) can be ordered. At the Control
Station end, approximately 50 mm (1.97”) of the cable harness is inside the Control Station.
At the Reconstruction Station end, approximately 135 mm (5.31”) of the cable harness is
inside the Reconstruction Station. The remaining 8015 mm (312.55”) of cable harness is
external, and facilitates the cable connection between the Control Station and the
Reconstruction station. In this case, suitable provision (plinths, under-floor conduits, etc.)
must be made for passing cable harness between the Control Station and Reconstruction
Station. For more information about the cables supplied within the 8200 mm (322.83”) cable
harness, see Section 1.9.2.2, Long Harness Cables.
1.6.2.1 Floor and Wall Spacing

The footprint of the Reconstruction Station housing is 590 mm x 278 mm (23.23” x 10.94”)
(Illustration 3-2). For serviceability reasons, the front side of the Reconstruction Station needs

1000 mm of space to allow the opening of the front side panel and accessing the inside of the
Reconstruction Station.
Illustration 3-2: Floor space requirement when Reconstruction Station is on its own
(Reconstruction Station footprint)
Illustration 3-3 and Illustration 3-4 show the floor space requirements when the Reconstruction
Station housing can be placed directly behind the Control Station.

Illustration 3-3: Floor space requirement when Reconstruction Station is behind the Control
Station with the monitor arm on the right

Illustration 3-4: Floor space requirement when Reconstruction Station is behind the Control
Station with the monitor arm on the left
1.6.2.2 General Layout

Illustration 3-5 shows the general layout recommendations when the Reconstruction Station
housing can be placed directly behind the Control Station.

Illustration 3-5: General layout suggestion when Reconstruction Station is behind the Control
Station with the monitor arm on the right
The diagram below generically highlights the constraints mentioned above, which you must
consider when planning a room layout.
1. Reconstruction Computer Housing
2. Monitor Arm
3. Control Station
4. Gantry
5. Generator
Apply the following distances between the Control Station equipped with Reconstruction Station
located directly behind it, and the Gantry:
• minimum distance of 500 mm allowed for free movement around the Gantry and the
Reconstruction Station housing
NOTE: If an existing install base system has a space of less than 500 mm and more than
150 mm between the Tube Head the wall of the room, the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis option can be installed.

• minimum distance of 1000 mm at the back of the Reconstruction Station housing for
serviceability
• minimum distance of 1000 mm from the X-ray Source in the Tube Head and the Radiation
Screen on the Control Station
• maximum distance depending on Gantry cables length : see the Pre-Installation System
Requirements chapter in the Core System SIP/PIM.
After the room layout is decided, suitable provision (plinths, under-floor conduits, etc.) must be
made for passing cables and conduits.
In the following situations it is not possible to place the Reconstruction Station behind the
Control Station:
• if the customer has the TechInsight option (the MDS will be already positioned behind the
Control Station)
• if below the floor behind the Control Station there is under floor cabling or piping that inhibits
the fixation of the Reconstruction Station
• if the monitor arm is on the left side of the Control Station and the right edge, top edge, or
top right corner (looking down) of the Reconstruction Station are closer than a 1000 mm to
the Gantry Tube Head
• the Control Station is in a separate room, close to the wall, such that a gap of at least 1278
mm is not present between the rear of the Control Station and the wall making the
serviceability of the Reconstruction Station impossible (i.e. less than 1000 mm gap is
present from the rear of the Reconstruction Station housing)
1.6.3 Anchoring to the Floor
1.6.3.1 The Positioning Template
The installation kit supplied with the equipment includes one template printed on white paper.
This template assists with the layout of the Reconstruction housing and positioning the anchors.
The template is provided in the Reconstruction housing itself.
1.6.3.2 Gantry Floor Requirements
The Senographe Essential equipped with the MTD may vibrate during Tomosynthesis
Acquisition and cause IQ issues if the Gantry is not installed on a flat floor surface as specified
in Floor Requirements section of the Core SIP. The floor surface must remain horizontal and flat
within ±2.5 mm per meter (±1/10 inch in 39 inches) after installation of the Gantry.
WARNING
FAILURE TO RESPECT THE FLOOR REQUIREMENTS FOR THE GANTRY
CAN RESULT IN VIBRATION OF THE MTD CAUSING IQ ISSUES.
1.6.3.3 Anchoring Inserts

The recommendations listed in the table below correspond to the anchoring inserts that are
supplied in the same box as the Reconstruction Station Housing. You must choose to use

different anchoring inserts if your floor thickness is less than 120 mm and/or if you are installing
the option in a seismic area.
Anchoring holes in the floor 4
Number of holes in the plate 4
Diameter of the hole in the plate 12 mm
Hole diameter in the floor 16 mm
Minimum Hole depth in the floor 90 mm
Provided inserts Hilti HAM M10x80 Universal Expanding Raw Plug

External diameter of 16 mm for a screw with 10 mm diameter
Maximum bolt load pull tension (at each bolt) 580 daN
Minimum floor thickness 120 mm
Recommended tightening torque 45 Nm on concrete

20 Nm on masonry (brick)
If you use different anchoring inserts to those supplied, you must use the recommendations
corresponding with those anchoring inserts and not those listed in this table. Your local
structural engineer is responsible for evaluating the recommendations of third-party anchoring
inserts.
1.6.4 Interconnecting Cables Path and Length
Illustration 3-6 and Illustration 3-7 are provided to help planning cable runs between subsystems
with the short and long Reconstruction Station cable harness, respectively.
Codification color on the illustration:
• Black = Harness, Shipped with the system and the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option (short
harness by default, and a long harness can be ordered if necessary)
• Red = Power AC supply (Line Supply Cable) (GEMS supplies a usable length = 6.5 m
(21’-4”) cable)
• Blue = Door light and switch (local adaptation)
• Green = Insite connection
• Purple = X-ray Console Cable
CAUTION
Cables between Generator and Gantry and X-ray Console are fragile:
Protect these cables in a cable housing or ensure that the cable path is safe.

Illustration 3-6: Interconnecting Cables Path and Length – Short Reconstruction Station Cable
Harness

Illustration 3-7: Interconnecting Cables Path and Length – Long Reconstruction Station Cable
Harness

1.7 Interoperability and Networking Connections

The DICOM committee has defined a dedicated DICOM standard format, called DICOM Breast
Tomosynthesis Object (BTO), to store the breast 3D volume data. GE Breast Tomosynthesis
option implements this new format.
As Tomosynthesis generates more data for each exam than conventional mammography, a
larger archiving capacity is required.
Therefore, integrating the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option to an existing workflow implies to
check:
• the DICOM compatibility of other systems (PACs) (see Section 1.7.1)
• the storage capacity corresponds to the Tomosynthesis intended use (see Section 1.7.2)
• the networking on site corresponds to the Tomosynthesis intended use (see Section 1.7.3)
The customer needs to be aware of these needs and can contact a GE representative for
further information and guidance on DICOM object generated and its storage.
1.7.1 DICOM Compatibility
All workflow actors (such as PACS, archiver…) that will receive the Tomosynthesis images must
support : DICOM Storage as SCP for : Breast Tomosynthesis Image
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.13.1.3 (SOP class UID) with at least one of the following proposed
transfer syntax:
• Explicit VR Big Endian - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.2
• Implicit VR Little Endian - 1.2.840.10008.1.2
• Explicit VR Little Endian - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
• Lossless JPEG Compression - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.70
• Lossy JPEG Compression - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.51 (when authorized on site)

1.7.2 Storage Capacity
A GE representative can support the customer to evaluate the storage capacity needed for the
intended use of Tomosynthesis. The customer might plan to upgrade the storage capacity
available to meet the storage need.
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option installation shall be synchronized to the data storage
capacity upgrade when applicable.
1.7.3 Networking Connections
In order to benefit from the optimal performance of the option, the client should provide a
Gigabit Ethernet compatible connection to the network.
Other networking requirements remain the same as those described in the Core SIP.
NOTE: From ADS 56.10 delivered with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, the AE title
used for worklist no longer includes WL_ and keeps letter case.
No other change in DICOM declaration is required.

1.8 Associated Review Workstations

The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option requires a Review Workstation compatible with DICOM
Digital Breast Tomosynthesis images to display the reconstructed 3D objects.
The IDI mammography Workflow solution 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build 382) and
above releases are compatible with this DICOM format.
NOTE: Before installing the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, ensure that customer’s IDI
Mammography Workflow Solutions system is already at version 4.7.0 V-Preview
(named MR3 or Build 382) or above. If the customer’s IDI Mammography Workflow
Solutions system needs upgrading to version 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build
382) or above, it can take several weeks to receive the upgrade software.
In scenarios where the customer’s IDI Mammography Workflow Solutions system
needs upgrading to version 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build 382) or above,
ensure that you plan enough time so that the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option can be
installed after the upgrade of the IDI Mammography Workflow Solutions system.

1.9 Cable Lay-out and Pin-out

Cables that are visible from a serviceability perspective are those within the Reconstruction
Station (see Section 1.9.1) or those within the harness going from the Reconstruction Station to
the Control Station (see Section 1.9.2).
1.9.1 Internal Reconstruction Station Cabling
The internal Reconstruction Station cabling consists of only ground cables, as described in the
sub-sections below.
1.9.1.1 Ground Cable – C5-C5 AWG12 LG450 (5365831)
Two 0.45 m ground cables with C5 connectors at each end exists, going from the
Reconstruction Station housing Ground Bar to the following:
• rear panel Ground connection on the Reconstruction Computer
• Reconstruction Station housing fixed side cover
Illustration 3-8: Ground Cable – C5-C5 AWG12 LG450
1.9.1.2 Ground Cable – FAS C5 AWG12 LG420 (5365830)

Two 0.42 m ground cables with a C5 connector at one end and a FAS connector at the other
end exists, going from the Reconstruction Station housing Ground Bar to the following:
• Reconstruction Station housing rear (left) trap door
• Reconstruction Station housing removable side cover
Illustration 3-9: Ground Cable – FAS C5 AWG12 LG420
1.9.1.3 Ground Cable – FAS C5 AWG12 LG1000 (5366584)

A 1 m ground cable with a C5 connector at one end and a FAS connector at the other end,
going from the Reconstruction Station housing Ground Bar to the Reconstruction Station
housing front (right) trap door.
Illustration 3-10: Ground Cable – FAS C5 AWG12 LG1000

1.9.2 Reconstruction Station to Control Station Cabling

The set of cables going between the Reconstruction Station and the Control Station vary
according to whether the short or long harness is installed.
1.9.2.1 Short Harness Cables
This section describes the cables in the short harness going from Reconstruction Station to
Control Station.
1.9.2.1.1 W801 Cable — Short Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Reconstruction Computer to ADS
Computer (5434079)
2.5 m TIA certified CAT 6E gigabit Ethernet cable going from the Reconstruction Computer
bottom RJ45 connector (eth0) to the ADS Computer lower RJ45 connector (e1000g0).
The pairing and pinout of the W801 cable are summarized in Illustration 3-11 and Table 3-9.
Illustration 3-11: W801 Cable Pinouts
Table 3-9: W801 Cable Pinouts
Pin Number Reconstruction Color Function Pin Number on ADS Com‐

Computer end puter end
1 White Tx+ 1
2 Orange Tx- 2
3 White Rx+ 3
6 Green Rx- 6
5 White Not Used 5
4 Blue Not Used 4
7 White Not Used 7
8 Brown Not Used 8
1.9.2.1.2 W802 Cable – Short Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Hospital Network (5434078)
upper RJ45 connector (eth1) to the CAT6 Ethernet Junction in the base of the Control Station.

Illustration 3-12: W802 Pinouts
Pin Number Reconstruction Color Function Pin Number on hospital

Computer end end
1 White Tx+ 1
2 Orange Tx- 2
3 White Rx+ 3
6 Green Rx- 6
5 White Not Used 5
4 Blue Not Used 4
7 White Not Used 7
8 Brown Not Used 8
1.9.2.1.3 Short Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable (5434166)

2.0 m AC supply cable going from the Reconstruction Computer rear panel AC connector to the
AC multi-connector in the base of the Control Station.
Illustration 3-13 shows the parings and pinouts of the Live (L), Earth (E), and Neutral (N) cables
in the Short Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable.
Illustration 3-13: Short Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable Pinouts
1.9.2.1.4 W805 Cable – Short Reconstruction Station Housing Earth Cable

2.5 m ground cable going from the Ground Bar in the Reconstruction Station housing to the
Ground Bar in the Control Station housing.

Illustration 3-14: W805 Cable – Short Reconstruction Station Housing Earth Cable
1.9.2.2 Long Harness Cables

This section describes the cables in the long harness going from Reconstruction Station to
Control Station.
1.9.2.2.1 W803 Cable — Long Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Reconstruction Computer to ADS
Computer (5434175)
bottom RJ45 connector (eth0) to the ADS Computer lower RJ45 connector (e1000g0).
Pin Number Reconstruction Color Function Pin Number on ADS Com‐

Computer end puter end
1 White Tx+ 1
2 Orange Tx- 2
3 White Rx+ 3
6 Green Rx- 6
5 White Not Used 5
4 Blue Not Used 4
7 White Not Used 7
8 Brown Not Used 8
1.9.2.2.2 W804 Cable – Long Gigabit Ethernet Cable for the Hospital Network (5434176)
upper RJ45 connector (eth1) to the CAT6 Ethernet Junction in the base of the Control Station.

Pin Number Reconstruction Color Function Pin Number on hospital

Computer end end
1 White Tx+ 1
2 Orange Tx- 2
3 White Rx+ 3
6 Green Rx- 6
5 White Not Used 5
4 Blue Not Used 4
7 White Not Used 7
8 Brown Not Used 8
1.9.2.2.3 Long Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable (5434167)

9.85 m AC supply cable going from the Reconstruction Computer rear panel AC connector to
the AC multi-connector in the base of the Control Station.
Illustration 3-17 shows the parings and pinouts of the Live (L), Earth (E), and Neutral (N) cables
in the Long Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable.
Illustration 3-17: Long Reconstruction Computer AC Supply Cable Pinouts
1.9.2.2.4 W806 Cable – Long Reconstruction Station Housing Earth Cable

10.2 m ground cable going from the Ground Bar in the Reconstruction Station housing to the
Ground Bar in the Control Station housing.

Illustration 3-18: W806 Cable – Long Reconstruction Station Housing Earth Cable

1.10 Specifications
1.10.1 Maximum tolerance of displayed constants in DBT mode
1.10.1.1 Manual mode exposure accuracy selected on the X-ray console
mAs accuracy is within ± (10% +0.2 mAs) of the technical parameters selected on the X-ray
console.
Measurement Conditions:
Connect an HV voltage divider (Machlett Dynalizer IIIA; ratio 10 kV/1 V) in series with the x-ray
tube. Connect a waveform analyzer (Tektronix 7854) to the output of the divider; the analyzer
receives a signal proportional to the voltage applied to the tube. The mAs values are given by:
where T1 is the time at which the high voltage reaches 75% of its maximum value, and T2 is the
time at which the high voltage returns to 75% of the maximum value.
1.10.1.2 AOP mode exposure accuracy displayed on the acquisition workstation
mAs accuracy per projection in GE Breast Tomosynthesis AOP Mode is within ± (10% +0.2
mAs) annotated in the image displayed on the acquisition workstation.
1.10.1.3 Compression force and breast thickness displayed on the Gantry Readout
Compression Force: ± 10 newton
Breast Thickness: ± 10 mm
1.10.1.4 Tube angulation displayed on the Gantry Readout
Angulation value: ± 0.2°
1.10.2 X-ray tube head movement
The X-ray tube head during rotation or angulation moves at a constant speed of 10° per second.
1.10.3 Radiation and filter information
1.10.3.1 Source to Image Distance (SID)
Fixed SID: 660 mm
1.10.3.2 Radiation reference axis
Conforming to standard mammography practice, the radiation reference axis is directed at the
chest wall edge of the digital detector; radiation is shielded so that there is no radiation directed
behind the chest wall.

1.10.3.3 Nominal X-ray tube voltages and currents

1.10.3.3.1 Irradiation in AOP mode
• Nominal shortest irradiation time in AOP mode: 40 ms.
• Range of X-ray tube voltage during irradiation in AOP mode: 24 through 35 kVp.
• Range of X-ray tube current during irradiation in AOP mode: 30 through 100 mA.
1.10.3.3.2 Irradiation in Manual mode
• Nominal shortest irradiation time in Manual mode: 40 ms.
• Range of X-ray tube voltage during irradiation in Manual mode: 22 through 49 kVp.
• Range of X-ray tube current during irradiation in Manual mode: 21.4 through 100 mA.
1.10.3.4 Nominal focal spot size with the MTD
Large focal spot: 0.3 mm.
1.10.3.5 Dimensions and locations of all available effective image receptive areas
The field of view (FOV) is the area that is irradiated by X-rays during an exposure. Prior to
exposure, its size (e.g. 9 x 9, 9 x 19, 13 x 21, 13 x 18, 19 x 23 and 24 x 31) and position (left,
right, centered) are set by pressing the Collimator light and FOV control buttons.
1.10.3.5.1 FOV for 2D acquisitions with MTD
FOV settings for 2D acquisitions with the MTD inserted are the same as on the Senographe
Essential with the Bucky. Table 3-13 below gives the initial FOV size and position automatically
taken by the system depending on the Arm angle and compression paddle type inserted for 2D
acquisitions (and 3D acquisitions).
Table 3-13: Initial FOV Sizes and Positions for 2D and 3D acquisitions
MTD Dedicated Paddle Type Arm Rotation Angle Initial FOV size, and position at paddle insertion
Size Position
Standard 24 x 31 Paddle for -90° ≤ angle ≤ +90° 24 x 31 Centered

MTD
Elevated 24 x 31 Paddle for
MTD
Sliding 19 x 23 Paddle for MTD -10° ≤ angle ≤ +10° 19 x 23 Centered
Sliding 19 x 23 Paddle for MTD +11° ≤ angle ≤ +90° 19 x 23 Off-centered Right
Sliding 19 x 23 Paddle for MTD -90° ≤ angle ≤ -11° 19 x 23 Off-centered Left
For 2D acquisitions, the 9 x 9, 9 x 19, 13 x 21, 13 x 18, 19 x 23 and 24 x 31 FOVs are available,
as summarized in Table 3-14.
Table 3-14: FOV Sizes and Positions According Paddle Types and Positions
Mode MTD Dedicated Paddle Type Paddle Position FOV Size & Position

• 24 x 31
• 19 x 23
Centered
• 13 x 18
• 9x9
• 19 x 23 Left
Sliding 19 x 23 Paddle for MTD
Left • 13 x 21 Left
• 9 x 19 Left
• 19 x 23 Right
Right • 13 x 21 Right
• 9 x 19 Right
Contact
Standard 24 x 31 Paddle for MTD • 24 x 31

Elevated 24 x 31 Paddle for MTD
• 19 x 23
• 19 x 23 Left
• 19 x 23 Right
• 13 x 18
Centered
• 13 x 21 Left
• 13 x 21 Right
• 9x9
• 9 x 19 Left
• 9 x 19 Right
1.10.3.5.2 FOV for 3D acquisitions

For 3D acquisitions, only 19 x 23, 24 x 31 FOV are available. Table 3-13 above gives the initial
FOV size and position automatically taken by the system depending on the Arm angle and
compression paddle type inserted for 3D acquisitions (and 2D acquisitions). For 3D acquisition,
the FOV Size cannot be modified. However for 2D acquisitions, it is possible to modify the FOV
size (see Table 3-14 above).
1.10.3.6 Attenuation equivalence
1.10.3.6.1 Attenuation equivalence at 100 kVp
Attenuation equivalence for components in the X-ray beam, in accordance with FDA HHS 21
CFR, § 1020.30, for measurements made at a potential of 100 kVp, using an X-ray beam with
an HVL of 3.6 mm of aluminum.
Component Al equivalence (mm)
Image receptor support on the MTD less than 0.2

1.10.3.6.2 Attenuation equivalence at 30 kVp

Attenuation equivalence for components in the X-ray beam for measurements made at a
potential of 30 kVp, using an X-ray beam with an HVL of 0.3 mm of aluminum.
Component Al equivalence (mm)
Image receptor support on the MTD less than 0.3
1.10.4 Dose Display and Dose Display Accuracy for AGD

1.10.4.1 Dose Display
The displayed estimates of the dose to the patient are calculated as follows:
• Entrance Skin Exposure (ESE) for the entire sequence of exposures in 3D mode, or per
exposure in 2D mode.
This quantity, also known as Entrance Skin Air Kerma (ESAK), corresponds to the free-in-air
airkerma, in the plane of the compression paddle in contact with the breast, with no back-
scatter contribution from the breast. It is calculated using a calibrated model taking into
account the attenuation of the X-ray beam by the compression paddle.
• Average Glandular Dose (AGD) for the entire sequence of exposures in 3D mode, or per
exposure in 2D mode.
This conventional quantity (AGD) is obtained by multiplying the above-mentioned ESE and
the Normalized glandular Dose (DgN) for the technique factors used. The DgN values are
interpolated from the tables contained in "Spectral dependence of glandular tissue dose in
screen-film mammography" (Xieng Wu, Gary T. Barnes, Douglas M. Tucker, Radiology
1991; 179:143-148), and "Molybdenum target-Rhodium filter and Rhodium target-Rhodium
filter mammography" - Xieng Wu, Gary T. Barnes, Douglas M. Tucker, Radiology 1994;
193:83-89.
The interpolated DgN values, for each interpolation point chosen, are accurate within 9%
compared with the values in the tables.
Average glandular dose for 3D is computed with the same formulas as for 2D mode. Given
the tomo sequence parameters, the error made on that calculation is approximately 1%.
Based on "Computation of the glandular radiation dose in digital tomosynthesis of the
breast" - Ioannis Sechopoulos, Sankararaman Suryanarayanan, Srinivasan Vedantham,
Carl D’Orsi, Andrew Karellas, Med. Phys. 2007; 34 (1):221-232.
1.10.4.2 Dose Display Accuracy for AGD
The values calculated for ESE are accurate within 30%.
The values calculated for AGD, (DgN * ESE), are accurate within 40%.
NOTE: When using a compression device that does not completely cover the breast, the
entrance surface of the breast may no longer be a plane, and the distance from focal
spot to skin is not clearly defined. In addition, the ESE value is not uniform between
parts covered and not covered by the paddle, because of the attenuation caused by
the paddle. In such cases, a single accurate value cannot be provided. However, the
displayed ESE value continues to be calculated using the same convention as in the
regular exam.

NOTE: When the ESE is not accurate because of the conditions described above, or when
the breast is partially irradiated (e.g., due to the collimation being smaller than the
breast), the AGD definition is no longer directly applicable. In such cases, the
displayed AGD value should be used as an indication only.
1.10.5 Applicable Classifications
The following classifications are the same as the Core Senographe Essential system (for more
information, refer to the Pre-Installation System Requirements chapter of the Service
Information and Procedures of the Core Senographe Essential system):
• Type of protection against electric shock : CLASS 1
• Degree of protection against electric shock : TYPE B
• Method(s) of sterilization or disinfection recommended by the manufacturer : refer to the

System Hygiene chapter of the Operator Manual
• Degree of safety of application in the presence of a FLAMMABLE AN-AESTHETIC
MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE : must not be used in the
presence of flammable gases
• Mode of operation : Continuous operation with intermittent loading
The degree of protection against harmful ingress of water for the parts in the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis Service are, as follows:
• MTD : IPX0
• 3D footswitch : IPX5

2 Pre Installation Procedures

2.1 About this chapter
This chapter contains the Job Cards describing the verification procedure necessary to ensure
compatibility of the system with the option.

2.2 Job Card PRE A001 - Image Backup and RRA Analysis
2.2.1 Objective
Image backup:
For security reasons, the images existing on AWS must be archived on CD ROM or PACS
(Radstore). The customer must do this task before the arrival of the FE. This could represent a
large amount of time.
RRA analysis:
The data for the automated repeat reject analysis (RRA) is stored in a computer in the
acquisition workstation (AWS). In the event of an AWS hardware failure, there is some risk that
this data will be lost. That is why periodic data backup is included in the automated repeat
analysis procedure.
For customers using RRA, the repeat and reject analysis must be done before the upgrade is
performed. The customer must do this task before the arrival of the FE. For more information,
refer to the Operator to the QC Manual. This could represent a large amount of time.
2.2.2 Procedure
Contact the customer before coming onsite to ensure that they have performed the images
backup, and RRA analysis backup.
90 2 Pre Installation Procedures

2.3 Job Card PRE A002 - Ensure Minimum System Level is Met
2.3.1 Introduction
Before you apply the kit, you must ensure that the Senographe System has had FMI12075
applied and that it is equipped with the necessary hardware. Also, if the Senographe System is
a pre-Sunburst system or non-CESM system, you must ensure that the Senographe System
has had FMI12166 applied. This Job Card gives you the procedure to follow to define what are
the necessary actions to ensure compatibility of the system with the kit.
2.3.2 Define the necessary checks
To define the necessary checks, follow these steps:
1. Define the model number by looking on the system identification label. It is on the cover of
the Generator Cabinet. Illustration 3-19 below shows an example of the system identification
labelling.
2. Check which options have been added to the system by checking which Upgrade Labels
have been stuck next to the system identification label:
○ Stereotaxy: 5123686
○ CESM: 5392184
Illustration 3-19: Location of system identification label
3. Record the model number and the upgrades applied to the system in the form in Section
2.3.6
4. Consult Table 3-15 below to define the necessary checks.

NOTE: For any system with the Stereotaxy option installed, the rotation board and the
rotation gas spring are at the necessary level.
If the Stereotaxy option is installed on the system, do not check for FMI12075, but
check the Control Station version, and only check the rotation clutch when you are
asked to check the Rotation-related hardware.
NOTE: If the CESM option is installed on the system, do not check for FMI12075, but check
the Control Station version.
Table 3-15: System level - Necessary checks
Manufacturing Ver‐
Technical Release Model Number Next actions
sion(ADS Version)
M3
Sirius M3 5144816
(40.11)
Sirius M3A Plus M3A Plus Standard 5144816
(41.00)
M3A Plus International 5144816-1-1
(41.00)
Sirius M3A FB M3A FB Standard 5144816
(41.02)
M3A FB International 5144816-1-1
(41.02) 1. Check if FMI12075 is already
Sirius M3A Bucky M3A Bucky Standard 5144816 applied following the proce‐
(41.02) dure described in Section
2.3.3
M3A Bucky International 5144816-1-1
(41.02) 2. Check Control Station version
following the procedure de‐
Sirius M4 M4 Standard 5144816 scribed in Section 2.3.4
(41.02)
M4 International 5144816-1-1
(41.02)
Sirius M41 M41 Standard 5144816
(41.02)
(41.02)
M42 International
Sirius M42
(V1/V2 CS : 43.00) 5144816-2-1
(IS4-2 Madras)
(V3 CS : 53.00)
M44 International
Sirius M44
(V1/V2 CS : 43.10.1) 5144816-3 Check Control Station version fol‐
(IS4-3 Fwd Prod)
(V3 CS : 53.10.1) lowing the procedure described in
Sirius M45 M45 International 5144816-4 Section 2.3.4
(Orion 1) (V3 CS : 53.10.10)

Manufacturing Ver‐
Technical Release Model Number Next actions
sion(ADS Version)
Sirius M46 M46 International 5144816-5
(Slave) (V3 CS : 53.10.10)
Sirius M47 (*) M47 International
5144816-5
(KiwiM3s1) (V3 CS : 53.30)
(Litchi2K) (V3 CS : 53.30)
(Zodiac) (V3 CS : 53.30) and
5144816-7-LE
5144816-8
Sirius M410 M410 International
and
(Penduick) (V3 CS : 53.40)
5144816-8-LE
Sirius M411 M411 International 5144816-9 No check required. Go to Section
(LFOV2 + Z400) (V4 CS : 54.10) and 2.3.5
5144816-9-LE
(Sunburst) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-10-LE
(eIFU) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-11-LE
(SFDA) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-12-LE
(CE removal) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-13-LE
(Vitality) (V5 CS : 55.40) and
5144816-14-LE
or higher
IB system upgraded N/A N/A Check Control Station version fol‐
with CESM option (55.10 or 55.20) lowing the procedure described in
Section 2.3.4.
If the Senographe system is not listed in this table proceed to Job Card PRE A003 - Pre Installation
Planning - Ensure compatibility with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option
* — System upgraded with Stereotaxy Kit (ADS SW 53.30, 3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) and
Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488–12))

2.3.3 Perform FMI12075 checks

2.3.3.1 Physical checks
1. Check the log books to see if there is an entry suggesting that the Senographe system has
been updated to FMI12075.
2. Check the presence of the FMI12075 identification label that should have been stuck on the
bottom of the Gantry column front cover.
2.3.3.2 Service desktop checks

1. Use one of the following two methods to access the Service Desktop.
○
In the Browser, click the Tools menu button then click Service Desktop in the
context menu.
○ Use the right mouse button to click in the background of the Browser screen, then select
Service Tools/Service Desktop from the pop-up menu.
2. From the SITE INFORMATION page of the Service Desktop, ensure that the firmware and
software versions listed are equal to or greater than the values listed in Table 3-16.
Table 3-16: Required FW and SW versions
Board Component FW/SW versions after

FMI 12075 - Seno Essential
Gantry CPU Poseidon NSC1.1.7
Bucky Bucky HC12 13.6.6
Bucky CPLD 5.0.3 [1]
Rotation Rotation HC12 5.9.4
Rotation DSP 5.13.5
Rotation CPLD 5.1.2[1]
Lift Lift HC12 5.10.2
Lift DSP 5.6.3
Lift CPLD 10.0.1/5.0.1 [1][2]
Compression Compression HC12 5.7.1
Compression CPLD 5.1.4 [1]

Board Component FW/SW versions after

FMI 12075 - Seno Essential
Tilt Tilt HC12 5.4.0
Tilt CPLD 5.1.5 [1]
ADS Workstation 53.10.1
IDC IDC 9.3-1
DMR Generator DMR V1.10 CMN
PDU PDU HC12 4.0.7 (will be displayed
V12334.12630.7)/ 5.0.7 [3]
Notes:
[1]
: means these are not supplied on the FMI 12075 CD-ROM and are not needed.
[2]
: means that both versions 5.0.1 and 10.0.1 are acceptable. The previous version of Lift
CPLD will work with this configuration. The new lift CPLD is only needed if lift brake option is
included.
[3]
: means that both versions 4.0.7 and 5.0.7 are acceptable.
2.3.4 Check the Control Station version

To be compatible with the kit, the Control Station must be at least a V4.
To check the Control Station version, follow these steps:
1. Use one of the following two methods to access the Service Desktop:
○
In the Browser, click the [Tools menu] button then click Service Desktop in the
drop-down menu.
OR
○ Right-click in the background of the Browser screen, then select Service Tools/Service
Desktop from the context menu.
2. On the SITE INFORMATION page of the Service Desktop check the AWS application
version.
○ If the version number starts with a 4, e.g. 43.00, the Control Station is a V1 or V2.
○ If the version number starts with a 5, e.g. 53.00, the Control Station is a V3, V4 or V5.
3. If the Control Station is a V3, V4 or V5 follow these steps:
○ If the Omega cover has no vents, it is a V3 Control Station.

○ If the Omega cover has vents, it is a V4 or a V5 Control Station. See Illustration 3-20.

Illustration 3-20: Example of the Omega cover of the V4 Control Station
4. Record this information in the form in Section 2.3.6.

2.3.5 Next Actions
2.3.5.1 FMI12075 is not applied
Define a time with the customer to perform FMI12075 before you proceed to Job Card PRE
A003 - Pre Installation Planning - Ensure compatibility with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
option.
2.3.5.2 The Control Station is a V1/V2/V3
Define a time with the customer to perform the hardware upgrades of Accelera V1/V2/V3 to V5
before you proceed to Job Card PRE A003 - Pre Installation Planning - Ensure compatibility
with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
Since the option upgrades the software of the different subsystems to new versions, the
software upgrades contained in Accelera V1/V2/V3 to V5 are not necessary.
2.3.5.3 The appropriate FMIs are applied and the Control Station is a V4 or higher
Proceed directly to Job Card PRE A003 - Pre Installation Planning - Ensure compatibility with
the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
2.3.6 Record Form
Copy or print out this form to record the information collected with this Job Card.

Table 3-17: Record Form
Checks Check results
System level
Upgrades
FMI 12075
Control Station Version

2.4 Job Card PRE A003 - Pre Installation Planning - Ensure compatibility with the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis option
2.4.1 Ordering Kits
Before going on-site to install the Kit, order the following kits based on the existing system
configuration. Use the recorded results of the checks performed in the JC PRE A002 Ensure
Minimum System Level is Met. See the situations detailed below to know which kits to order.
• The system is at IS43 (FMI12075) level
• The system contains at least a V4 Control Station
• The Gantry contains following Rotation-related Gantry parts at the level as specified below:
○ Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488–12 or above)

○ 3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719)
○ Precise 50N Rotation Clutch (5481350)
Therefore, before going on-site to install the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit, check the existing
configuration and then order the following kits based on the existing system configuration.
Table 3-18: Kits to order depending on the installation scenario
Scenario System Level (Model Number) Order:
Scenario A Senographe Essential - LFOV2 - V4 Control Station • GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit (5434135-5)
(5144816-9)
Senographe Essential - Sunburst - V4 Control Station • Execute Job Card PM A001, section 2.2 Check
(5144816-10) for Rotation Slippage Issues and decide if you
Senographe Essential - eIFU – V4 Control Station need to install Rotation Motor Brake Upgrade kit.
(5144816-11)
Senographe Essential - SFDA – V4 Control Station • Potentially a Breast Support Locking Mechanism
(5144816-12) (BSLM) board (see Section 2.4.6)
Senographe Essential - CE removal – V4 Control Sta‐
tion (5144816-13) (system already installed)
Senographe Essential - Vitality – V5 Control Station
(5144816-14) (system already installed)
Scenario B Senographe Essential - Penduick - V3 Control Station The following kits:

(5144816-8) • GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit (5434135-5)
• Accelera 2 Kit for Senographe Essential

(S30331YW)
• Essential Hardware Upgrade Kit for SenoClaire

(S30361AV)
• Potentially a BSLM board (see Section 2.4.6)

Scenario System Level (Model Number) Order:
Scenario C Senographe Essential - Pre-Penduick - V1 Control Sta‐ The following kits:

tion (5144816) and Senographe Essential - Pre-Pendu‐ • GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit (5434135-5)
ick - V2 Control Station (5144816, 5144816-1-1)
(S30331YW)

(S30361AV)
• Potential need for a new monitor with DVI connec‐

tion (see Section 2.4.7)
Scenario D Senographe Essential - Pre-Penduick - V3 Control Sta‐ The following kits:

tion (5144816-2-1, 5144816-3, 5144816-4, 5144816-5, • GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit (5434135-5)
5144816-6, 5144816-7)
(S30331YW)

(S30361AV)
Scenario E Senographe Essential - LFOV2 - V3 Control Station The following kits:

(5144816-2-1, 5144816-3, 5144816-4, 5144816-5, • GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit (5434135-5)
5144816-6, 5144816-7, 5144816-8) – systems that
have been upgraded using the Nautilus Kit. • Accelera 2 Kit for Senographe Essential
(S30331YW)

(S30361AV)
Scenario F Senographe Essential - CE removal – V4 Control Sta‐ • GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit (5434135-5)
tion (5144816-13) (not yet installed)
Senographe Essential Systems - V5 Control Station • Execute Job Card PM A001, section 2.2 Check
(5144816-14) (not yet installed) for Rotation Slippage Issues and decide if you
need to install Rotation Motor Brake Upgrade kit.
2.4.2 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS

The following manpower is required:
• 1 Field Engineer for about 16.5 hours in total, including procedure reading, material
unpacking, software/hardware upgrade, verification and IQ tests.
• If the Stereotaxy option is present, 1 Field Engineer for an additional 2 hours in total to
configure the Stereotaxy Positioner.
2.4.3 Special Tools and Equipment
• Tools and phantom for IQ tests:
○ Flat Field Phantom

○ ACR standard Phantom

○ IQST standard Phantom with adapter for Mag Stand
○ Set of acrylic plates
• Tools for lift calibration, rotation calibration (standard toolbox)
• Optional Male DVI to Female VGA adaptor for temporarily connecting the ADS monitor to
the IDC.
• Ensure that you still have the LFOV Mammo Detector Manufacturing Data CD-ROM to
reload the detector data onto the Essential IDC. The LFOV Mammo Detector Manufacturing
Data CD-ROM is unique to the detector installed with the Senographe system. If you need
another LFOV Mammo Detector Manufacturing Data CD-ROM, contact the Online Center in
the appropriate Pole for Detector Data, quoting the detector ID of the system.
• If you are upgrading a Pre-Penduick Senographe Essential with a V1/V2 Control Station
(scenario C) then the existing LFOV Mammo Detector Manufacturing Data will be on a
floppy diskette which cannot be read by Z400/ R2 Computers that replaces the SB-150
Computer. In these scenarios you need to order LFOV Mammo Detector Manufacturing
Data CD-ROM to use instead of the diskette. To do this, contact the Online Center in the
appropriate Pole for Detector Data, quoting the detector ID of the system.
2.4.4 Pre-GE Breast Tomosynthesis Upgrade Scheduling Tasks
Before going on-site to perform the GE Breast Tomosynthesis upgrade, ensure that you have
scheduled the availability of the following people during the day of the visit:
• GST Team to perform InSite checkout.
• Hospital Physicist to perform the related post-upgrade tests according to their local
requirements
• If the Stereotaxy option is present, the Medical Applications Specialist so appropriate

Stereotaxy related training can be given to the Operator.
2.4.5 Potential Need For Rotation-Related Gantry Hardware
In order for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option to work, the Gantry needs to contain the
following Rotation-related Gantry parts at the level as specified below.
• 3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719)
• Precise 50N Rotation Clutch (5481350)
• Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488–12 or above)
For system older than 5144816-8 included, Essential Upgrade Kit for SenoClaire must be
installed. It contains among others gantry related parts:
• Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488–13)

Table 3-19 summarizes the forward production systems that were already manufactured with
these parts, and which do not need to be upgraded with that particular part.
Table 3-19: Forward production systems manufactured with GE Breast Tomosynthesis
compatible Rotation-related Gantry parts
Minimum Rotation-related Gantry part required for GE Breast Forward Production System (Model Number)
Tomosynthesis
Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488-12) IS4–3 (5144816-3)
3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) Litchi (5144816–6)
Precise 50N Rotation Clutch (5481350) CE removal (5144816-13)
NOTE: Systems upgraded with the Stereotaxy Kit will contain the necessary 3000N Rotation
Gas Spring (5154719) and Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector
(2375488-12), but will contain the non-50N V2 Rotation Clutch (2345968–3), which
will need upgrading with the 50N V2 Rotation Clutch (5481350).
2.4.5.1 Deciding What Rotation-Related Gantry Parts to Take Onsite
Table 3-20 describes which Rotation-related Gantry parts you need to order and take on-site.
Once on-site, you will perform the necessary physical checks, and if necessary upgrade those
parts.
Table 3-20: Rotation-related Gantry Parts that need changing as a function of Model Number
Rotation-related Gantry Parts to

Manufacturing Ver‐ order (assuming they have never
Technical Release Model Number
sion(ADS Version) been changed during the system
lifetime)
M3
Sirius M3 5144816
(40.11)
Sirius M3A Plus M3A Plus Standard 5144816
(41.00)
M3A Plus International 5144816-1-1
(41.00)
Sirius M3A FB M3A FB Standard 5144816
(41.02)
M3A FB International 5144816-1-1 Essential Hardware Upgrade Kit
(41.02) for SenoClaire (S30361AV)
Sirius M3A Bucky M3A Bucky Standard 5144816
(41.02)
M3A Bucky International 5144816-1-1
(41.02)
(41.02)
(41.02)


lifetime)
(41.02)
(41.02)
M42 International
Sirius M42
(V1/V2 CS : 43.00) 5144816-2-1
(IS4-2 Madras)
(V3 CS : 53.00)
M44 International
Sirius M44
(V1/V2 CS : 43.10.1) 5144816-3
(IS4-3 Fwd Prod)
(V3 CS : 53.10.1)
(Orion 1) (V3 CS : 53.10.10)
Sirius M46 (*) M46 International 5144816-5
(Slave) (V3 CS : 53.10.10)
Sirius M47 (**) M47 International
5144816-5
(KiwiM3s1) (V3 CS : 53.30)
(Litchi2K) (V3 CS : 53.30)
(Zodiac) (V3 CS : 53.30) and
5144816-7-LE
5144816-8
Sirius M410 M410 International
and
(Penduick) (V3 CS : 53.40)
5144816-8-LE
(LFOV2 + Z400) (V4 CS : 54.10) and
5144816-9-LE
(Sunburst) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-10-LE
Execute Job Card PM A001 , sec‐
Sirius M413 M413 International 5144816-11 tion 2.2 Check for Rotation Slip‐
(eIFU) (V4 CS : 54.20) and page Issues and decide if you
5144816-11-LE need to install Rotation Motor
Brake Upgrade kit.
(SFDA) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-12-LE
(CE removal) (V4 CS : 54.20) and
5144816-13-LE


lifetime)
(Vitality) (V5 CS : 55.40) and
5144816-14-LE
or higher
IB system upgraded N/A N/A Depends on the Model Number of
with CESM option (55.10 or 55.20) the IB System as listed above.
* — Some Q1 2009 Essential Systems (5144816-5) not upgraded with the Stereotaxy Upgrade Kit were
already manufactured with the 3000N Rotation Gas Spring. For more information, see Section 2.4.5.2.
** — System upgraded with Stereotaxy Kit (ADS SW 53.30, 3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) and
Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488–12)), but will contain the non-50N V2 Rota‐
tion Clutch (2345968–3), which will need upgrading with the 50N V2 Rotation Clutch (5481350).
2.4.5.2 Q1 2009 Essential Systems (5144816-5) Manufactured With the 3000N Rotation Gas Spring
Some Essential Systems with model number 5144816-5 that were never upgraded with the
Stereotaxy Kit may already have 3000 N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) required by the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• All Senographe Essential systems manufactured after April 1st 2009 have the 3000 N
Rotation Gas Spring (5154719), which is compatible with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
option. In this case, you do not need to change the Rotation Gas Spring.
• Senographe Essential systems manufactured before April 1st 2009 may have the 2600 N
Rotation Gas Spring (2412202) or 3000 N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719). The 2600 N
Rotation Gas Spring (2412202) is not compatible with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option,
whereas the 3000 N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) is compatible with the GE Breast
Table 3-21 summarizes the Senographe Essential systems manufactured before April 1st 2009
that have the new 3000 N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719), which is compatible with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option. To identify your system, check the labels on the base of the
Gantry and on the Generator covers.
Table 3-21: Q1 2009 Essential Systems manufactured with the 3000 N Rotation Gas Spring
Manufacturing date Gantry S/N System S/N
2009–01–21 4590MC6 574095BU6
2009–01–21 4592MC2 574102BU0
2009–01–26 4591MC4 574449BU5
2009–01–29 4611MC0 574451BU1
2009–01–29 4609MC4 574452BU9
2009–01–29 4612MC8 574920BU5
2009–01–30 4610MC2 574454BU5
2009–01–30 4613MC6 574453BU7

Manufacturing date Gantry S/N System S/N
2009–02–02 4616MC9 574918BU9
2009–02–04 4614MC4 574919BU7
2009–02–02 4615MC1 574914BU8
2009–02–04 4617MC7 574913BU0
2009–02–05 4622MC7 574916BU3
2009–02–09 4621MC9 575260BU5
2009–02–10 4624MC3 575261BU3
2009–02–11 4618MC5 575263BU9
2009–02–13 4623MC5 574912BU2
2009–02–19 4629MC2 575450BU2
2009–02–19 4628MC4 575446BU0
2009–02–23 4626MC8 575442BU9
2009–02–25 4630MC0 575262BU1
2009–03–02 4625MC0 575264BU7
2009–03–03 4619MC3 575443BU7
2009–03–09 4634MC2 576017BU8
2009–03–09 4631MC8 576018BU6
2009–03–10 4627MC6 576005BU3
2009–03–10 4633MC4 576004BU6
2009–03–12 4632MC6 575449BU4
2009–03–16 4635MC9 576007BU9
2009–03–16 4639MC1 576008BU7
2009–03–17 4656MC5 576003BU8
2009–03–18 4654MC0 576010BU3
2009–03–18 4643MC3 576012BU9
2009–03–18 4657MC3 576009BU5
2009–03–24 4640MC9 575981BU6
2009–03–24 4636MC7 575983BU2
2009–03–25 4667MC2 575984BU0
2009–03–26 4642MC5 576011BU1
2.4.6 Potential Need to Change BSLM Board

In older Gantries, there may be a need to change the Breast Support Locking Mechanism
board. Some BSLM Boards in the install base are not compatible with the MTD because they
store excessive charge from the Gantry CAN bus, which the MTD is sensitive to. When a BSLM
Board is not compatible with the MTD, there is a lapse of CAN communication between the
MTD and the Gantry, and the MTD will not boot up when plugged into the Gantry. Order a
BSLM Board (5137301-3) and take it on-site in case it needs changing during the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis upgrade.

2.4.7 Potential Need For New Monitor on Systems Upgraded by Accelera Kit
If you are upgrading a system with a V1/V2 Control Station with the Accelera Kit (scenario C),
and if the customer has a monitor without a DVI connection, you must order a monitor with a
DVI connection (19" LCD Monitor PN: 51487020-4).
2.4.8 Potential Need For Long Reconstruction Cable Harness
If during the pre-installation planning phase (see Section 1.6.2, Layout Constraints for
Positioning the Reconstruction Station) it was decided that the Reconstruction Station cannot be
positioned directly behind the Control Station, order the Long Reconstruction Station Cable
Harness (5434153).
2.4.9 Planning Upgrades of IDI Mammography Workflow Solutions
Before installing the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, ensure that customer’s IDI
Mammography Workflow Solutions system is already at version 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3
or Build 382) or above has a Tomo license. If the customer’s IDI Mammography Workflow
Solutions system needs upgrading to version 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build 382) or
above, it can take several weeks to receive the upgrade software. In scenarios where the
customer’s IDI Mammography Workflow Solutions system needs upgrading to version 4.7.0 V-
Preview (named MR3 or Build 382) or above, ensure that you plan enough time so that the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option can be installed after the upgrade of the IDI Mammography
Workflow Solutions system.
NOTE: If the customer’s IDI 4.7.0 version is not at build 382 (also named MR3) or above,
Breast Tomosynthesis Objects will not be supported.
2.4.10 Obtaining Test BTO Images to Check PACS Compatibility
Before going on site, you should obtain test BTO images so that they can be used to check
PACs compatibility.
1. On a USB flash memory device, copy the folder e6 from the following FTP server address:
ftp://medical.nema.org/MEDICAL/Dicom/DataSets/WG15/BreastTomoImage/
GE_BreastTomo_2012_10/
To establish this FTP connection, you must configure your FTP client as follows:
○ FTP host : medical.nema.org

○ Username : anonymous
○ Password : your e-mail address
○ Remote Start Folder : MEDICAL/Dicom/DataSets/WG15/BreastTomoImage/
GE_BreastTomo_2012_10/
If you are within the GE network when connecting to the remote FTP server, you will need to
configure the advanced settings in your FTP client so it can traverse the GE proxy.
○ Proxy host : ftp-proxy.med.ge.com

○ Port : 21

○ User Id : blank (nothing)

○ Password : blank (nothing)
○ FTP Proxy : UserId = user@hostname
NOTE: The images from the link indicated above were generated for connectivity testing
purposes only. They are not representatives for the display nor for any other
functionality
NOTE: Depending on your Internet connection speed. The folders may take some time
(order of minutes) to update within your FTP client.
2. Once the e6 folder from the FTP server have finished downloading (could take up to 2 hours
depending on your Internet connection), verify that the folder structure and file structure/size
is as follows within the e6 folder:
○ s36
■ i150.MGDC.2 — 171,241 KB
■ i151.MGDC.1 — 18,159 KB
○ s43
■ i164.MGDC.1 — 18,466 KB
■ i165.MGDC.2 — 170,751 KB
○ s44
■ i166.MGDC.2 — 163,213 KB
■ i167.MGDC.1 — 18,659 KB
○ s46
■ i170.MGDC.2 — 163,212 KB
■ i171.MGDC.1 — 18,659 KB
If any of the files are missing or not the file sizes quoted above, download the contents of
the e6 folder from the FTP server.
3. Copy the e6 folder from the FTP server to a USB flash memory device.

2.5 Job Card PRE A004 - Checking for Damage

The option kit is inspected for proper operation and appearance before shipment. However, it is
necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received. The option kit is supplied in one
pallet that contains the following elements:
• Motorized Tomosynthesis Device,
• Reconstruction Housing,
• Reconstruction Computer,
• Technical publication,
• Accessory kit, which includes:
○ Short Reconstruction Station Cable Harness

○ CAT6 Ethernet Coupler
○ 3D Foot Pedal
○ Lift Board
○ Multi-plug
○ UPS Power Cable
○ Ethernet Switch
○ 20 x Tie Wraps
○ Z400 RAM Modules
○ Generator EPROMs
• Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD,
• Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD,
• Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD,
• Software upgrade kit,
• Detector Rails,
• 50N V2 Rotation Clutch,
• Gas Spring for Rotation Worm Gear.
2.5.1 POSSIBLE TYPES OF DAMAGE

Two types of possible damage can exist, as follows:

• External (noted) damage: damage is visible on the packages and there may or may not be
actual damage to the contents of the packages. This type of damage is a consequence of
bad transportation.
• Internal (concealed) damage: no damage is visible on the packages however there is actual
damage to the contents of the packages. This type of damage is a consequence of bad
manufacturing.
The illustration below summarizes the general process to determine:

• whether any of the option components are damaged
• the cause (and liability) of possible damage
• whether you have to make a claim for damage with the carrier company
• whether you have to make a manufacturing claim for damage or components considered
dead on arrival (DOA) with GE Healthcare

The damage checking process is split into two main phases:

• The first phase must be undertaken during the delivery complaint period defined by your
country consumer laws (usually 14 days). So that in the event that external damage has
occurred, the liability of the damage can be attributed to the carrier company.
NOTICE
External (noted) damage must be reported to the carrier immediately upon
discovery, or in any event within the delivery complaint period (defined by your
local consumer laws) after receiving the delivery (e.g.14 days in the USA). A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if a post-delivery
inspection is not requested within the delivery complaint period defined by your
country consumer laws (usually 14 days).

• The second phase can be undertaken later during the installation of the option. Any damage
found during this phase is considered as either physical DOA or electrical DOA, which is the
responsibility of GE Healthcare manufacturing.
2.5.2 CHECKING FOR EXTERNAL DAMAGE
2.5.2.1 Delivery Inspection with Courier
When the shipment of the option kit arrives, a General Electric representative or a hospital
receiving agent must proceed as follows for each of the pallet.
1. Closely examine each pallet for visible damage, and check any shock and tilt indicators
present.
If the pallets in the shipment show visible signs of damage, excessive shock, etc. you must
perform a delivery inspection as follows:
a. Open the pallet immediately to check the contents, and ask the driver to inspect the
contents with you.
b. Write a precise description of the damage on your copy and carriers copy of the delivery
receipt, along with the notation "damage in shipment".
c. Sign for the shipment and arrange a post-delivery inspection within delivery complaint
period defined by your country consumer laws.
d. Contact GE Healthcare to report the initial damage according to Section 2.5.4 Reporting
Damage.
If the pallets in the shipment do not show visible signs of damage or excessive shock, no
action is required other than to sign for the shipment.
2. Move the pallet into or close to the x-ray room, ready for unpacking.
2.5.2.2 Conduct post-delivery Inspections
Contact the Customer Service Department at phone number provided on the carriers bill to help
you determine whether a post-delivery inspection and formal written report is required.
Occasionally, the carrier may not have an inspector examine the damaged freight. Instead, they
may request that you do the post-delivery inspection yourself and keep a written description.
This written description can be used if a transportation claim is filed later. Note, that a post-
delivery inspection report is not a transportation claim.
Once you have completed a post-delivery the details of the damage to GE Healthcare and the
carrier according to Section 2.5.4 Reporting Damage.
2.5.3 CHECKING FOR INTERNAL DAMAGE
As soon as possible after delivery, unpack, and inspect your shipment. If you discover internal
(concealed) damage, report it to GE Healthcare immediately according to Section 2.5.4
Reporting Damage.
2.5.4 REPORTING DAMAGE
1. Contact the GE Healthcare Distributor and/or GE Healthcare Account Manager from which
the product was purchased to inform them of the damage. Be ready to supply the following
information:

○ name of carrier,
○ delivery date,
○ consignee name,
○ freight or express bill number,
○ item damaged,
○ extent of damage.
2. The GE Healthcare Distributor and/or GE Healthcare Account Manager will contact the
factory of origin to determine the most cost effective way to repair the damage.
○ If damage deemed to warrant a factory repair, a Return Merchandise Authorization

(RMA) will be issued to return damaged product to factory. Factory will provide quote to
repair damaged equipment after inspection of damage upon receipt of damaged
equipment. Do not ship any damaged product back to factory without an RMA.
○ If damage is deemed minimal and can be repaired in the field with replacement parts,
the factory will provide a quote to the consignee to purchase those parts.
○ If damage is deemed catastrophic and requires complete replacement of damaged

equipment, GE Healthcare will provide a quote to the consignee with quote to replace
damaged equipment.
3. Discuss how to proceed with your GE Healthcare Distributor and/or GE Healthcare Account
Manager:
○ If you determined that the bad transportation was to blame for the damage then your GE
Healthcare Distributor and/or GE Healthcare Account Manager will advise you how to file
a transportation claim and how to proceed with the transportation claim process.
○ If you determined that the transportation was not to blame for the damage then your GE
Healthcare Distributor and/or GE Healthcare Account Manager will advise you how to file
a manufacturing claim and how to proceed with the manufacturing claim process.

2.6 Job Card PRE A005 - Unpacking the kit

2.6.1 Personnel Requirements
Personnel
Requirements
2.6.2 Overview
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit is delivered on only one pallet.
The objective of this Job Card is to unpack the MTD, the upgrade kit, the accessories, the
Reconstruction housing and computer to check them for damage and move them to the
mammography room.
In addition to the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit, the Essential Upgrade Kit for Senoclaire may
have been ordered and delivered at the same time. The content and unpacking instructions of
the Essential Upgrade Kit for Senoclaire are beyond the scope of this Job Card. However, if it
was ordered, you must ensure that the Essential Upgrade Kit for Senoclaire has also been
delivered.
2.6.3 Preliminary Requirements
2.6.3.1 Tools and Test Equipment

Safety gloves 1 - - -
2.6.3.2 Safety
WARNING
RISKS OF CRUSHING INJURIES.
THE MOTORIZED TOMOSYNTHESIS DEVICE (MTD) WEIGHS OVER 12 KG.
ALWAYS USE BOTH HANDS TO MANIPULATE THE MTD WHEN
MANIPULATING THE DEVICE. BE CAREFUL DURING THE MANIPULATION
OF THE MTD.
WARNING
THE RECONSTRUCTION HOUSING AND THE RECONSTRUCTION
COMPUTER ARE HEAVY.
NEVER LIFT THE HOUSING OR COMPUTER. TO MOVE THEM, TILT THE
EQUIPMENT 15° AND USE YOUR LEG TO PUSH IT TO DESTINATION.
ALWAYS USE BOTH HANDS TO MANIPULATE THE RECONSTRUCTION
HOUSING AND COMPUTER.

CAUTION
Risks of bruising injuries during manipulation of paddles.
Handle the paddles with care.
CAUTION
Risk of cut when opening the kit and handling the packaging.
Wear protective gloves.
2.6.3.3 Required Conditions

The pallet is on flat, level ground. - -
2.6.4 Procedure
2.6.4.1 Reception
The kit is delivered on a single pallet. At reception check the entire consignment for damage
according to Job Card PRE A004 - Checking for damage
2.6.4.2 Packaging description
1. Open the three latches (see Illustration 3-21) to release the top cover and the doors of the
package.
Illustration 3-21: Package closed
2. Push the top cover and open the doors.

Refer to Table 3-22 for a description of the pallet content.

Table 3-22: Pallet content
Identification Content
A Protective Foam
B Software kit
C Technical Publications (Operator Manual, Installation Manual)
D Plastic Detector Rails and Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable
E Precise 50N Clutch
F Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD
G Deflector set

Identification Content
H Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD
I Accessory kit
J Reconstruction Computer
K Reconstruction Housing
L Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (M1) and Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD (M2)
2.6.4.3 Unpacking the kit

1. Open each box that you remove the package and check the items for damage such as
scratches or visible impacts.
2. Remove the following:
a. foam (A in Table 3-22),
b. Software kit (B in Table 3-22),
c. Technical Publications (C in Table 3-22),
d. Plastic Detector Rails and Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable (D in Table 3-22)
e. Precise 50N Clutch (E in Table 3-22)
f. Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD (F in Table 3-22),
g. Deflector set (G in Table 3-22),
h. Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD (H in Table 3-22),
i. Accessory kit (I in Table 3-22).
j. Reconstruction Computer (J in Table 3-22)
k. Reconstruction Housing (K in Table 3-22)
l. Motorized Tomosynthesis Device and Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD (L in Table
3-22)
2.6.4.3.1 Reconstruction computer
WARNING
COMPUTER ARE HEAVY.
CAUTION
Risk of cut when opening the kit and handling the packaging.
Wear protective gloves.

NOTICE
Make sure the computer is on an even non-slippery surface at all time.
Leave the computer on the ground, do not lift it to put it on a table.
1. Remove the Reconstruction computer box from the package.
Use the handle that is cut in the box, as indicated in Illustration 3-22.
Illustration 3-22: Reconstruction computer box in pallet
2. Check that the inscription open here is present in the top left corner of the box.
If the open here inscription is not in the top left corner, turn the box before you open it.
3. Open the box on the side of the open here inscription.
4. The computer is protected by two protective foams and a black plastic bag, see Illustration
3-23
Illustration 3-23: Reconstruction computer in box

WARNING
COMPUTER ARE HEAVY.
NEVER LIFT THE HOUSING OR COMPUTER.
5. Remove the computer from the box:
a. Slide your hands on the sides of the computer.
b. Pull the computer on each side alternatively to take it out of the box.
6. Remove the foam and plastic bag.
a. Remove the foam on top.
b. Open the top of the plastic bag and slide it down.
NOTICE
Hold the computer to prevent it from falling when you remove the protective
foam.
c. Put the computer on its side.

d. Put the computer on its top.
e. Remove the protective foam and the plastic bag.
f. Put the computer on its side then put it back on its base.
7. Remove and discard the front protection of the computer.
2.6.4.3.2 Reconstruction housing
1. Remove the Reconstruction housing box from the package.
Use the handles attached to the side of the box, as indicated in Illustration 3-24.
Illustration 3-24: Reconstruction housing box in pallet
2. Put the box on its base as indicated by the position of the handles.

WARNING
COMPUTER ARE HEAVY.
NEVER LIFT THE HOUSING OR COMPUTER.
3. Open the side of the box.
4. Remove the housing from the box:
a. Slide your hands on the sides of the housing.
b. Pull the housing on each side alternatively to take it out of the box.
5. Remove the protective foams.

a. Put the housing on its side.
b. Put the housing on its top.
c. Remove the protective foam.
d. Put the housing on its side.
e. Put the housing on its base.
f. Remove the protective foam.
2.6.4.3.3 Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD)
1. Pull on the MTD box to access the latches on each side.
2. Open the latches, see Illustration 3-25

Illustration 3-25: MTD box in pallet
3. Push the MTD box back into the pallet.

4. Push the front cover of the box up and position it so it stays in place on top of the box, see
Illustration 3-26.
Illustration 3-26: Open the MTD box

5. Pull the MTD box so it is one tenth out of he pallet.

6. Push the top cover so the box stays open.
7. Remove the two parts of the MTD table stand from the box and assemble them.
8. Remove the protective foams indicated in Illustration 3-27.
Illustration 3-27: MTD protective foams
9. Remove the plastic sheet protecting the MTD grid.
WARNING
OF THE MTD.
10. Remove the MTD from its packaging.
a. Pivot the MTD to position it vertically.
b. Lift the MTD using the handles and put the MTD on its table stand.

2.6.5 Finalization
Unless the customer asks otherwise, dispose of the packaging following the hospital guidelines
for waste management. Ensure you do not throw away important items such as the TRA sheet
as it is needed later on when sending the localization card.

2.7 Job Card PRE A006 - Overall system behavior check

The objective of the procedures described in this Job Card is to check the system for problems
that could critically interfere with the intended use of the option.
2.7.1 Check the system for Gantry related errors
In the Error Log section of the Service Desktop (see How to use the Error Log in the Core SIP),
check the presence of any Gantry related errors.
If any Gantry related errors are present, follow the recommended actions described in the Error
Messages chapter of the Core SIP.
2.7.2 Check the anchoring of the system
Given the specificities of the option, the system anchoring needs to be checked to ensure its
optimal performance.
Check the three or five (for seismic areas) inserts of the Gantry, indicated in Illustration 3-28:
Illustration 3-28: Gantry anchoring
If the inserts are loose, tighten them accordingly. If the inserts remain loose, contact your OLC
as further corrective actions need to be performed before performing more exams.
2.7.3 Perform an acquisition
Perform an acquisition using AOP mode with a Flat Field Phantom and check the following:
• AOP mode is working as expected
• Collimator blades are not visible in the image
• Grey level is correct (image is not black or white)
• No visible artifacts, dust or bad pixels present
If there are any of the issues listed above, resolve them before performing the upgrade of the
system.

Chapter 4 System Description

1 Tomosynthesis Theory
1.1 Principles of Operation
Digital Breast Tomosynthesis (DBT) is a mammographic technique that uses sequential, low-
dose, mammographic exposures of a compressed breast taken at multiple angles to
“synthesize” high resolution, mammographic quality “planes” through the entire breast.
DBT acquires a sequence of low-dose X-ray projection views at different angles through the
compressed breast that are reconstructed into multiple images of different planes parallel to the
detector through the breast. Each DBT image has a narrow range of focus, blurring or
eliminating the structured noise caused by overlapping fibroglandular tissues or other structures.
In normal 2D acquisition, lesions can be hidden by superimposed normal tissue (see Illustration
4-1) while 3D acquisition allows performing angulated views of the breast. During the DBT
exam, a sequence of low-dose X-ray projection views is taken at different tube angles with
respect to the perpendicular of the breast support plane (see Illustration 4-2).
Illustration 4-1: Normal 2D acquisition Illustration 4-2: 3D acquisition at different tube angles to the
detector
A set of tomographic planes spanning the entire thickness of the compressed breast is
generated, from the acquired projection images, using a tomosynthesis reconstruction
algorithm. Each reconstructed image has a narrow range of focus, representing a plane parallel
to the breast support surface, where the structures belonging to the height of interest are
optimally rendered, eliminating the structured noise caused by overlapping fibroglandular
tissues above and below the plane. In the DBT reconstruction process, projection views are
shifted and added resulting in objects at a given height being in focus in a given reconstructed
plane (see Illustration 4-3).
Chapter 4 System Description 123

Illustration 4-3: Example of 3D reconstruction at different heights
1.2 Detector Performance

GE Breast Tomosynthesis uses the existing Senographe Essential 100 micron (pixel size/
resolution) detector for DBT images, as for conventional 2D acquisitions. The efficiency and
rapid readout capability of the entire 24x31 cm detector array maintains the 100 micron
resolution of the Senographe Essential detector in the reconstructed DBT images, without pixel
binning (the addition of several pixels into a single larger pixel). This design results in no loss of
spatial resolution, allowing small objects such as microcalcifications to be well characterized in
both 2D and DBT images.
The detector also includes a large operating temperature range, providing detector stability
during tomosynthesis acquisitions. Low radiation dose is particularly important when screening
asymptomatic women for breast cancer. To keep patient dose low when performing a DBT
examination, high detector efficiency (high DQE) is required. The Senographe Essential digital
detector is well-suited for this application since it has high DQE even at the low patient dose
needed for each DBT projection view acquisition. As a result, GE Breast Tomosynthesis has
been designed to keep the total DBT dose equivalent to that of a single 2D MLO or CC view.
1.3 Angular Sweep Range and Number of Projections
There are design trade-offs in selecting the tube motion, angular sweep range, number of
projections, acquisition and compression time and resultant dose of the DBT acquisition. Larger
angle and a higher number of projections allow better separation of overlapping tissues, yielding
better removal of out-of-plane structures. Smaller sweep angles and fewer projection views yield
124 1 Tomosynthesis Theory

sharper detail, lower patient dose, and shorter acquisition times, meaning shorter patient
compression and a lower likelihood of patient motion. Optimizing these trade-offs, GE Breast
Tomosynthesis acquires nine projection views over a 25° sweep angle, providing both short
acquisition times and high in-plane spatial resolution while achieving excellent elimination of
out-of-plane tissues.
1.4 Step-and-shoot tube motion
GE Breast Tomosynthesis acquires projection views at nine evenly spaced, fixed tube locations.
This is achieved by starting and stopping tube motion to acquire each projection view. Step-and-
shoot motion has a distinct advantage over continuous tube motion during acquisition.
Continuous tube motion blurs the apparent focal spot size, while step-and-shoot has a focal
spot size comparable to that in conventional mammography, yielding sharper images, which is
important for micro-calcification visualization.
1.5 The 3D X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence
The starting position of an X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence is ±15.63°. Whether X-rays are shot at
this starting position, depends on the FOV being used, compression paddle position and the
laterality chosen in the exam. Before shooting the first X-ray exposure, the Tube Head will either
not move (0°) or move by approximately 3° or 6° depending on the FOV being used, the
compression paddle position, and the laterality chosen in the exam.
NOTE: The angle values mentioned in this section refer to the value is displayed on the
Gantry LCD. The ADS software and Gantry CPU board use different reference planes
for the Tube Head angle. The Gantry CPU board takes the plane in which the
angulation isocenter is a reference, whereas the ADS software ADS takes the image
plane as a reference. As a result of these difference reference planes, the Tube Head
angle value displayed on the ADS Browser will differ slightly from the value displayed
on the Gantry LCD.
1.5.1 Full FOV X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence
In the case when the Standard 24x31 paddle for MTD is used, Elevated 24x31 paddle for MTD
is used or no compression paddle is used, the full FOV is available, and the first X-ray exposure
is only ever taken after the Tube Head moves by approximately 3° as indicated in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Full (24x31) FOV X-ray Exposure Sequences
Sweep for Rotation an‐ Sweep for Rotation an‐ Sweep for Rotation an‐ Sweep for Rotation an‐
gle in [-90°;-11°] gle in [-10°;+10°] gle in [-10°;+10°] gle in [+90°;+11°]
Laterality: Both Laterality: Left Laterality: Right Laterality: Both
Start Position 15.63°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5° 15.63°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5°
Exposure 1 12.50°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5°

(moves 3°) (moves 3°) (moves 3°) (moves 3°)
Exposure 2 9.38°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5°
Exposure 3 6.25°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5°
Exposure 4 3.13°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 5 0.00°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5°
Exposure 6 -3.13°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 7 -6.25°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5°

Sweep for Rotation an‐ Sweep for Rotation an‐ Sweep for Rotation an‐ Sweep for Rotation an‐
gle in [-90°;-11°] gle in [-10°;+10°] gle in [-10°;+10°] gle in [+90°;+11°]
Laterality: Both Laterality: Left Laterality: Right Laterality: Both
Exposure 8 -9.38°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5°
Exposure 9 -12.50°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5°
All service related calibrations and checks that contain an X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence, either
do not use a compression paddle or only use the Standard 24x31 paddle for MTD. Therefore,
from a service perspective, only the full FOV X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence summarized in is
Table 4-1 witnessed.
1.5.2 Partial FOV X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence
When the Sliding 19x23 paddle for MTD is used, the FOV is smaller. Before shooting the first X-
ray exposure, the Tube Head will either not move (0°) or move by approximately 3° or 6°
depending on the FOV position being used, and the laterality chosen in the exam as
summarized in Table 4-2 , Table 4-3, and Table 4-4.
Table 4-2: Partial (19x23) FOV X-ray Exposure Sequences — Sweep for Rotation angle in
[-90+, -11°] — Laterality : Both
FOV 19x23 Left FOV 19x23 Center FOV 19x23 Right

Laterality: Both Laterality: Both Laterality: Both
Start Position 15.63°±0.5° 15.6°±0.5° 15.63°±0.5°
Exposure 1 15.63°±0.5° (no movement) 12.50°±0.5° (moves 3°) 9.38°±0.5° (moves 6°)
Exposure 2 12.50°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5°
Exposure 3 9.38°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 4 6.25°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5°
Exposure 5 3.13°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 6 0.00°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5°
Exposure 7 -3.13°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5°
Exposure 8 -6.25°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5°
Exposure 9 -9.38°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5°
[-10°, +10°]
FOV 19x23 Left FOV 19x23 Left FOV 19x23 Cen‐ FOV 19x23 Cen‐ FOV 19x23 Right FOV 19x23
Laterality: Left Laterality: Right ter ter Laterality: Left Right
Laterality: Left Laterality: Right Laterality: Right
Start Position -15.63°±0.5° 15.63°±0.5° -15.6°±0.5° 15.6°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5° 15.63°±0.5°
Exposure 1 -9.38°±0.5° 15.63°±0.5° (no -12.50°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5° (no 9.38°±0.5°

(moves 6°) movement) (moves 3°) (moves 3°) movement) (moves 6°)
Exposure 2 -6.25°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5°
Exposure 3 -3.13°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 4 0.00°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5°
Exposure 5 3.13°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 6 6.25°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5°
126 1 Tomosynthesis Theory

FOV 19x23 Left FOV 19x23 Left FOV 19x23 Cen‐ FOV 19x23 Cen‐ FOV 19x23 Right FOV 19x23
Laterality: Left Laterality: Right ter ter Laterality: Left Right
Laterality: Left Laterality: Right Laterality: Right
Exposure 7 9.38°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5°
Exposure 8 12.50°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5°
Exposure 9 15.63°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5°
[+11°, +90°] — Laterality : Both
FOV 19x23 Left FOV 19x23 Center FOV 19x23 Right

Laterality: Both Laterality: Both Laterality: Both
Start Position -15.63°±0.5° -15.6°±0.5° -15.63°±0.5°
Exposure 1 -9.38°±0.5° (moves 6°) -12.50°±0.5° (moves 3°) -15.63°±0.5° (no movement)
Exposure 2 -6.25°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5° -12.50°±0.5°
Exposure 3 -3.13°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5° -9.38°±0.5°
Exposure 4 0.00°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5° -6.25°±0.5°
Exposure 5 3.13°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5° -3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 6 6.25°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5° 0.00°±0.5°
Exposure 7 9.38°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5° 3.13°±0.5°
Exposure 8 12.50°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5° 6.25°±0.5°
Exposure 9 15.63°±0.5° 12.50°±0.5° 9.38°±0.5°

2 Main GE Breast Tomosynthesis Option Components

In order for Digital Breast Tomosynthesis (DBT) to be possible, an existing Senographe
Essential system must be upgraded with the following components:
• Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD) and dedicated MTD compression paddles (see
Section 2.1) which is plugged into the Breast Support connectors on the Gantry instead of
the Bucky or Mag Stand.
• MTD compatible Detector Rails (see Section 2.2).
• Precise 50N Rotation Clutch (see Section 2.3).
• Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable (see Section 2.4).
• Reconstruction Computer (see Section 2.5) housed in a separate Reconstruction Station

housing located either close behind or far away from the Control Station.
• A multiplug with UPS supply cable (see Section 2.8) in the Control Station, which shares the
original AC power source from the Gantry between the components in the Control Station
and the Reconstruction Computer in the Reconstruction Station.
• Gigabit Ethernet Switch (see Section 2.9) in the Control Station — required so that the data
going between the Reconstruction Computer, ADS Computer and IDC Computer is fast
enough to allow the reconstruction volumes on the Reconstruction Computer to be created
in a timely manner.
• Additional memory in the ADS Computer (required on Z400 Computer) to support the extra
processing power required when acquiring each of the nine projection images in a 3D exam.
• 3D foot pedal (see Section 2.6) . The 3D foot pedal requires a compatible DBT Lift Board in
the Gantry, which has an additional connector for the 3D foot pedal (see Section 2.7).
• A short or long harness (depending on the location of the Reconstruction Station) containing
all the necessary power, ground and network cables for connecting the ADS Computer to
the Reconstruction Computer.
• Software to support the DBT functionality on the Generator (DBT Compatible Generator
CPU Board EPROMs), Gantry, ADS Computer, IDC Computer, and Reconstruction
Computer. For more information, see Section 2.10.
Illustration 4-4 summarizes the majority of the physical components required to enable DBT
functionality on a Senographe Essential system.
128 2 Main GE Breast Tomosynthesis Option Components

Illustration 4-4: Summary of physical components required to enable DBT
2.1 Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD)

2.1.1 Application Aspects of the MTD
The Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD) is the specific breast support designed for GE
Breast Tomosynthesis, with anti-scatter grid, compression carriage and paddle holder
assembly, which is attached directly to the digital detector. It allows fixed compression of the
breast independent of the X-ray tube movements needed for DBT view acquisitions.

Illustration 4-5: Motorized Tomosynthesis Device (MTD) description
1. 3D/2D motion switch button (toggles between 2D contact mode and 3D DBT mode)
2. 3D light indicator (when ON the MTD is in 3D DBT mode, and when OFF the MTD is in 2D
contact mode)
NOTE: The MTD remembers the last mode (2D contact or 3D DBT) that was used.
3. MTD compression knobs
4. MTD protection shield
5. Paddle unlocking button
6. MTD Handle
7. Dedicated MTD Compression Paddle(s)
8. Carbon cover of the breast support
The MTD can be installed on the digital detector in a similar manner to installation of a
magnification stand or stereotactic biopsy device. Once installed, the MTD is automatically
detected and the dedicated medical application becomes available on the Control Station.
The MTD provides the same functions as the standard Senographe Essential positioner, and
allows you to perform 3D DBT acquisitions as well as 2D contact mode acquisitions, using MTD
dedicated Compression Paddles. The 2D contact mode acquisitions with the MTD however are
limited to the rotation angle of between +90° and –90°. The dedicated MTD Compression
Paddles are easily identifiable their MTD logo as shown in Illustration 4-6.

Illustration 4-6: Dedicated MTD Compression Paddles — with MTD Compression Paddle Logo
The functions of vertical positioning (lift), rotation, patient positioning with light localizer and
breast compression with the MTD are similar to those of a standard mammography examination
on the Senographe Essential. Compression can either be done using the foot pedals as usual,
or manually turning the MTD compression knobs in the appropriate direction, as follows:
• Turning the MTD compression knob downwards (towards yourself while facing the front of
the digital detector) moves the compression trolly downwards (increasing the compression).
• Turning the MTD compression knob upwards (away from yourself while facing the front of
the digital detector) moves the compression trolley upwards (decreasing the compression).
The MTD includes a moving grid with gridlines aligned to accommodate both 2D contact mode
and 3D DBT mode acquisitions. This improves image quality for DBT and allows the operator to
improve workflow by rapidly acquiring either 2D contact mode or 3D DBT images without the
need for any equipment changes (i.e. no need change to a Bucky for 2D contact mode
acquisitions).
After breast positioning, the operator can chose to perform either a 2D contact mode exam or a
DBT 3D exam by pressing the 3D/2D motion switch button located at the top of the MTD.

In 3D DBT mode, the operator angulates the Tube Head to the 3D starting position and can
check patient positioning prior to initiation of exposure. In order to angulate the Tube Head to
the start position, one of the following methods can be used:
• press once the outer Arm angulation control buttons (1 and 3 indicated in Illustration 4-7)
and the Tube Head moves automatically until it reaches the start position
• continuously press the inner Arm angulation control buttons (4 indicated in Illustration 4-7)
until the Tube Head automatically stops at the start position
Illustration 4-7: Tube Head Keypads
In 3D DBT mode, the Arm rotation button 4 is used to angulate the Tube head with or without
compression. Pressing the Arm rotation button 4 starts an immediate movement of the Tube
head, which stops when the button is released.
In 3D DBT mode, the Arm rotation buttons 1, 2 and 3 function as Tube head angulation buttons.
These buttons are active/inactive depending on the compression detected by the system. When
the system detects a compression force >3daN, automatic movement of the Tube head to
preset positions is inhibited. Additionally, the Arm rotation buttons 1, 2 and 3 are activated or
deactivated according to the position of the Tube Head (see Table 4-5).
Table 4-5: Active Arm control buttons in 3D mode
Tube Head Position Button Status / Action
-11° to -90° 1 Status : Deactivated
2 Status : Activated only when angulation is not at Home (0°) position

Action : Moves the Tube Head to the Home (0°) position
3 Status : Activated
Action : Moves the Tube Head to the left
Action : Moves the Tube Head to the left or right, depending on which part of the
button is pressed.
+11° to +90° 1 Status : Activated

Action : Moves the Tube Head to the right


3 Status : Deactivated
button is pressed.
-10° to +10° 1 Status : Activated

Action : Moves the Tube Head to the right

Action : Moves the Tube Head to the left
button is pressed.
The exposure functions on the X-Ray console are similar to those on the Senographe Essential
except that the DBT pedal must be pressed along with the prep and exposure buttons on the X-
ray Console during the entire 3D DBT acquisition sequence.
During 3D DBT acquisition, a series of low-dose breast 2D DBT projection views is acquired
sequentially, while the source automatically moves to various positions, to obtain multiple views
of the breast.
Once the system has terminated a DBT acquisition sequence, it is ready to proceed to the next
view, either 2D or 3D.
When the X-ray acquisition ends, FFDM images and/or DBT projection views are
simultaneously available in the image viewer for quality control purposes.
The DBT projection views are automatically transferred to the Reconstruction Computer, which
then computes the volume data. The volume data is pushed to a DBT-compatible review
WorkStation for review by a radiologist.
2.1.2 System Function Aspects of the MTD
Internally, the MTD contains the following MTD related parts (see Illustration 4-8 and Illustration
4-9):
• MTD CPU Board — controls compression motion and grid motion (connected to a
Piezoelectric actuating motors which control the grid over a movement amplitude of 400
microns). The grid lines are perpendicular to a conventional Bucky grid. The grid motion in
the MTD moves in an opposite direction compared to the grid motion in the Bucky. In the
MTD the grid motion is forward and backward, whereas in the Bucky the grid motion is left
and right.
• MTD Compression Motor
• MTD Compression Potentiometer
• MTD Hot Swap Board — contains a fuse, which provides over current protection to the MTD
CPU Board from potentially high currents from the Gantry
• MTD Compression Paddle Holder Board

When the MTD is inserted the normal (non-MTD) Compression Board, Compression Motor,
Compression Potentiometer, and Compression Paddle Holder Board located in the Gantry are
effectively deactivated, and their functions bypassed to the MTD related parts instead.
Illustration 4-8: Schematic of MTD — Left Hand Side

Illustration 4-9: Schematic of MTD — Right Hand Side
As a result of this functional bypassing to the MTD, the error management associated to those
functions are now taken over by the MTD. The error codes for the equivalent functions (i.e.
compression, etc.) on the MTD are the same as those on the Gantry.
The MTD force and thickness calibrations are stored on the MTD. If for troubleshooting reasons
you reload the HC12 firmware on the MTD, the force and thickness calibrations are removed
and the MTD will need re-calibrating.
The MTD is more sensitive to noise than the Bucky. As a result, the MTD may not boot up, and
you may need to change Breast Support Locking Mechanism (BSLM) Board in the Gantry for a
new BSLM Board to resolve the boot up issue.
Schematics of the MTD in terms of how it resides within a system are shown in Acquisition
System Entry Block Diagram and in Compression Arm Block Diagram

When the MTD is inserted, some of the Service Desktop pages related to calibrations are
different and specific to configuring the MTD. Other Service Desktop pages are different in order
to support the MTD or other aspects of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option. For more
information, see Differences to the Service Desktop.
Many physical and mechanical properties of the components that make an MTD are unique to
each MTD. Therefore, each MTD has a unique ID (UID) so that the MTD related calibrations are
tied to a particular MTD. As a result, only one MTD can be used on the system (i.e. a system
only accepts one MTD, although the same MTD can be used on different systems). If you
change the MTD, the UID of the new MTD must be declared on the system so that it can be
used with the system. Once the UID of the MTD is declared, the other parts of the system
(Gantry, ADS and IDC) accept the MTD, the calibrations of the old MTD are removed by the
system, and the new MTD can then be calibrated. The main purposes for having a UID for an
MTD is as follows:
• to “protect” the image quality of the system, by ensuring that the customer uses the MTD on
the system(s) it was assigned to
• remote service tracking – you see the MTD UID directly on the log, and you can see when a
new MTD was installed
2.1.3 Main characteristics of the MTD
2.1.3.1 MTD grid
• Linear type
• Grid ratio: R = 5:1
• Focalizing distance: F0 = 650 mm
• Grid line frequency (Upper specification limit): 260 lines per inch (10.236 lines per mm)
• Grid line frequency (Lower specification limit): 258 lines per inch (10.157 lines per mm)
2.1.3.2 MTD breast plate
• Composition: Composite carbon fiber epoxy resin
• Thickness: 1.4 mm ±0.1 mm
• Attenuation equivalence: see Chapter 3, Section 1.10.3.6, Attenuation equivalence

2.1.3.3 MTD Dimensions and mass
Table 4-6: MTD Dimensions and mass
Dimensions in mm (inches) Mass in kg (lbs)

±0.5 (0.02) ±0.5 (0.02)
(With the Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD insterted)
Depth Width Height
396 (15.59) 460 (18.11) 473 (18.62) 12.30 (27.12)

2.2 MTD Compatible Detector Rails

The MTD requires either the more robust metal or plastic Detector Rails. The resin Detector
Rails are not compatible with the MTD since they are less robust and wear out quickly due to
the additional mass of the MTD. If the existing system contains resin Detector Rails, they must
be changed with the plastic Detector Rails supplied with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit.
2.3 Precise 50N Rotation Clutch
The anglulation required by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option requires a more precise 50N
Rotation Clutch with less play in the clutch movement. The precise 50N Rotation Clutch
(5481350) supplied with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit provides the necessary precision in
the clutch movement to ensure that the system cannot get stuck in either angulation or rotation
mode when switching between modes.
NOTE: At the time of writing all systems in the install base do not have the precise 50N
Rotation Clutch (5481350), and you must use the precise 50N Rotation Clutch
(5481350) supplied with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit. Future install base
systems may have the precise 50N Rotation Clutch (5481350). A new Rotation Clutch
Adjustment Tool is included with each clutch.
NOTE: If the MTD is removed when the Arm is not at 0° (clutch pin not able to be pushed into
the detector plate for rotation mode) and the MTD is removed, the new firmware
delivered with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option permits angulation to correct the
issue without installing the MTD.
2.4 Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable
The application of the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable improves the reliability of the
Generator for sites having a large throughput of exams where the Generator can reboot by
itself. After application of the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable, the Generator will no longer
reboot by itself. The application of the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable is mandatory on
systems using the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option. The Generator Stator Current Filter
Assembly Cable must be installed on the TP18, TP20, and TP22 connectors of the Generator
Supply Command.
2.5 Reconstruction Computer
2.5.1 Application Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer
The Reconstruction Computer manages the generation of 3D DICOM objects.
The Reconstruction Computer reconstructs DBT images (planes and slabs) from the acquired
nine projection views. It reads nine projection views from the ADS Computer and processes
them to generate DBT images parallel to the detector plane. Two distinct data sets are
reconstructed:
• 0.5 mm (default) or 1 mm tomographic Planes, depending on the system configuration,
which are encoded into a single DICOM Breast Tomosynthesis object.
• 10 mm Slabs using a maximum intensity projection (MIP), which are encoded into a
separate DICOM Breast Tomosynthesis object.

Upon termination of the reconstruction, the tomosynthesis planes and pre-computed slabs can
be automatically transferred to a review workstation compatible with display of DBT volumes.
The transfer is performed over an Ethernet connection through the DICOM protocol.
2.5.2 System Function Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer
2.5.2.1 Reconstruction Computer Hardware
The Reconstruction Computer is an industrial standard PC with the following specifications:
• 32 Gbytes RAM — this large amount of memory is used so that the entire processing of a
3D volume is done in memory without needing to use swap space on the hard disk drive
• 1 TB Hard Disk Space — this large amount of disk space is used so that the Reconstruction
Computer can store a reasonable number of 3D volumes before the need to delete them
• 2 CPU Processors (Intel E5645 2.4 Ghz 6C, 1333) — these two highly performing
processors are used so that the Reconstruction Computer can process a 3D volume in a
timely manner
Illustration 4-10: Reconstruction Computer
Schematics of the Reconstruction Computer in terms of how it resides within a system are
shown in Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram and in Reconstruction Station Block Diagram.
2.5.2.2 Power Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer
The Reconstruction Computer is powered by the existing Senographe Essential system power
via the multiplug in the Control Station. For more information, see Section 2.8.
When the system is shut down, the Reconstruction Computer is in hibernation mode waiting for
a Wake-up On LAN signal from the ADS Computer. When the operator powers on the system
from the X-ray Console, the components within the Control Station (including the ADS
Computer) boot up. Early on during the ADS Computer boot time, the ADS Computer sends a
Wake-up On LAN signal to the Reconstruction Computer, which powers on the Reconstruction
Computer. By the time the operator logs into the ADS Computer and the ADS Browser appears,
the Reconstruction Computer has fully booted up and communicates with the ADS Computer. In

order for the Wake-up On LAN function to work, and all other networking functions between the
ADS Computer and Reconstruction Computer to work, an RSA key needs to be created on the
ADS Computer. The creation of the RSA key allows a secure shell (ssh) connection to be
established between the ADS Computer and Reconstruction Computer without the need for the
ADS Computer to specify a password to access the Reconstruction Computer.
NOTE: The Reconstruction Computer is not protected by the UPS in the Control Station. If
the AC power to the Reconstruction Computer is cut, the next time it boots up it will
perform a file system check (fsck) of its hard disk taking approximately 30 minutes.
Therefore, after a power failure, the ADS Computer will not see the Reconstruction
Computer for approximately 25 minutes after logging in, and you must wait for the
Reconstruction Computer to finish its automated fsck and boot up before using the
system as usual.
2.5.2.3 Networking Aspects of the Reconstruction Computer
The Reconstruction Computer has two Gigabit Ethernet network interface cards eth0 and eth1,
which are connected to the ADS Computer and hospital network, respectively. Since the
Reconstruction Station now acts as the physical connection to the hospital network, various
networking aspects are now different compared to the Core Senographe Essential System
where the ADS was physically connected to the hospital network. For more information on
differing network aspects, refer to Networking Differences.
Various aspects of the Reconstruction Computer are managed via new dedicated pages in the
Service Desktop. For more information, refer to Chapter 6, Job Card CFG A001 -
Reconstruction Computer configuration.
2.5.2.4 Unique ID (MAC address) of the Reconstruction Computer
The Reconstruction Computer is uniquely identified by the system from the media access
control (MAC) address of its main network card. The UID (MAC address) of the Reconstruction
Computer is displayed on the Service Desktop and present in the error log files. Its main
purpose is mainly using for knowing/tracking replacement Reconstruction Computers for any
given system.
2.6 3D Foot Pedal
2.6.1 Application Aspects of the 3D Foot Pedal
A specific pedal, called the “3D foot pedal” has been designed for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
option. This pedal is installed close to the Control Station; it is pressed by the operator to enable
tube motion during a DBT X-ray exposure. Whenever the operator releases the pedal, the
movement stops and the exposure is aborted. When creating a 3D exposure sequence, you
must keep your foot on the 3D Foot Pedal while pressing the Prep and Exposure buttons on the
X-ray Console.

Illustration 4-11: 3D Foot Pedal
2.6.2 System Function Aspects of the 3D Foot Pedal

The 3D foot pedal is connected to the J18 connector of the Lift Board in the Gantry.
An additional schematic of the 3D foot pedal in terms of how it resides within the system is
shown in Column Block Diagram.
2.7 DBT Compatible Lift Board
A new DBT Compatible Lift Board with an additional J18 connector is required in order to
support the 3D foot pedal. Illustration 4-12 shows a schematic of the DBT Compatible Lift Board
highlighting the new J18 connector that supports the connectivity of the 3D foot pedal.

Illustration 4-12: DBT Compatible Lift Board with J18 Connector
An additional schematic of the DBT Compatible Lift Board in terms of how it resides within the
system is shown in Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram and Column Block Diagram.
2.8 Multiplug and UPS Supply Cable
A Multiplug and UPS supply cable is required in order to share the power source from the
Gantry between the components (IDC, ADS, Monitor and Switch) powered by the UPS in the
Control Station, and the Reconstruction Computer in the Reconstruction Station.
Illustration 4-13: Multiplug
Illustration 4-14 below shows how the power source from the Gantry is shared between the UPS
in the Control Station and the Reconstruction Computer in the Reconstruction Station.
The Control Station components (IDC, ADS, Monitor and Switch) are powered as usual by the
UPS, whereas the Reconstruction Computer is powered from the Gantry power source (i.e. not
by the UPS) via the Multiplug.

Illustration 4-14: AC Power supply from Gantry before and after the use of UPS power supply
cable and multiplug from the upgrade kit
Additional schematics of the Multiplug in terms of how it resides within a system are shown in
Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram and Control Station Block Diagram.
2.9 Gigabit Ethernet Switch
A Gigabit Ethernet switch must be used in the Control Station for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
option, and replaces the original 100 Mbit/s switch that exists in the Core Senographe Essential
Control Station. The Gigabit Ethernet switch allows transferring the data from the IDC Computer
to ADS Computer in timely manner, such that the 2D projections from a 3D sequence are
displayed before the tomo sweep finishes.

Illustration 4-15: Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Schematics of the Gigabit Ethernet switch in terms of how it resides within a system are shown
in Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram and Control Station Block Diagram.
2.10 Software and Firmware Versions
The components in the Senographe system must have a certain version of firmware or software
in order to work correctly at a particular system level. Table 4-7 defines the compatibility matrix
between the software/firmware version required for each of the system components for the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option (Pollux column) and the last known manufactured system
(Vitality). The point to Table 4-7 is not to give a complete compatibility matrix for the entire
product history, as this can be found in the Core SIP. The point to Table 4-7 is to focus on
component software/firmware versions for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, indicating the
differences (highlighted in bold) introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
Table 4-7: Software and Firmware versions for different components
System Component Vitality Aurora Vitality Pollux
Reconstruction Software Kit Not Applicable 01.10.3 01.10.4
ADS Software Kit (see Note) 55.40 56.20 56.21
IDC Software Kit (see Note) 12.12–1 13.11–1 13.11–1.1
Generator CPU Board (DMR) (see Note) 5.30 6.70 6.70
Gantry CPU Board (Poseidon) NSC.1.2.15 TOMO.11.0.0 TOMO.11.1.1
Rotation Board CPLD 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2
DSP 5.13.5 6.100.5 6.101.5
HC12 5.12.4 6.100.4 6.101.4
Lift Board CPLD 10.0.1 11.2.1 11.2.1
DSP 5.6.3 5.6.3 6.101.3
HC12 5.16.2 6.100.2 6.101.2
Compression Board CPLD 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4
HC12 5.12.1 6.100.1 6.100.1
Tilt Board CPLD 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5
HC12 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0
BSLM Board CPLD 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10
HC12 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10
PDU Board HC12 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7

System Component Vitality Aurora Vitality Pollux
Bucky Board CPLD 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3
HC12 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6
MTD HC12 Not Applicable 2.0.11 2.0.11
Gantry CD-ROM to use to get required system 5174994-11 5174994-14 5174994-15

level
MTD CD-ROM to use to get required system level Not Applicable 5431220 5431220
Note: The IDC, ADS and Generator software versions for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option (Pollux) are backward compatible
with CESM. If you have a CESM system, you must use the IDC, ADS and Generator software versions delivered with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis upgrade kit.
The bold version numbers in the Aurora Vitality and Pollux columns in Table 4-7 highlight the
software/firmware differences introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option. These
differences are summarized below:
• Reconstruction Software Kit — software required for the new Reconstruction Computer
introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• ADS Software Kit — ADS software required to support all the new ADS features introduced
by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, including the following:
○ updated Service Desktop to support the Reconstruction Computer

○ updated Service Desktop to support calibrating the MTD
○ updated networking to support integration of the Reconstruction Computer
○ updated scripts to support integration with the Reconstruction Computer
○ MedApp updates and Browser updates to support the MTD and Reconstruction
Computer
• IDC Software Kit — IDC software required to support the MTD detector calibrations
introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
• Generator CPU Board (DMR) — Generator software required to support the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis. It includes acquisition sequence error management, new calibrations
specific for a tomo sequence and 2D MTD, and improvements of the backup-restore
mechanism.
• Gantry CPU Board (Poseidon) — Gantry CPU software required to support the new Gantry
related features introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, including the following:
○ Support for the MTD related error messages and communication with the Gantry
○ Support for diverting compression related functionality and paddle holder related
functionality away from the boards in the Gantry when the MTD is inserted on the
Gantry.
○ Support for the MTD grid motion which is controlled in a different manner to the Bucky
grid.
○ Support for registering the MTD UID with the system

○ Support for driving the Tomosynthesis sweep motion

• Rotation Board DSP and HC12 — Rotation software required to support the new Rotation
related features introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, including the following:
○ MTD angulation modes

○ Enhanced rotation clutch control
○ DBT motion control
• Lift Board CPLD and HC12 — Lift software required to support the new Lift related features
introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, including the following:
○ 3D foot pedal control

○ Updated Gantry LCD output with DBT screens
NOTE: The CPLD cannot be programmed on the Lift Board and an additional J18
connector is required on the Lift Board for the 3D foot pedal. The CPLD version
11.2.1 already exists on the DBT compatible Lift Board supplied in the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis upgrade kit.
• Compression Board HC12 — Compression software required to support the following MTD
compression functionality introduced by the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, as follows:
○ diverting compression related functionality away from the Compression board in the
Gantry when the MTD is inserted on the Gantry
○ managing the compression related functionality (compression control and compression

calibrations) of the MTD

3 Product History
This section describes the evolution of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
3.1 Software Evolution
Table 4-8—1 provides the evolution of the software and firmware versions for the different
system components for each of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis releases.
Table 4-8: Software and Firmware versions for different components
System Component Version 1 Version 2 Version 3 Version 4 Version 5 Version 6 Version 7 Version 8
Aurora Aurora Aurora Aurora Aurora Aurora Vi‐ Image Po‐ Pollux
M3 M3A M3A Japan M3B M4 tality sition fix (5434135–5
(5434135 (5434135 (5434135–2 (5434135–2 (5434135–2 (5434135–5 (5434135–5 rev 4)
rev 2) rev 3) rev 1) rev 2) rev 4) rev 1) rev 3)
Reconstruction Soft‐ 01.10 01.10.1 01.10.1 01.10.2 01.10.3 01.10.3 01.10.4 01.10.4
ware Kit
ADS Software Kit 56.10 56.10 56.10 56.11 56.12 56.20 56.20 56.21
IDC Software Kit 13.10–1 13.10–1 13.10–1 13.10–1 13.10–1 13.11–1 13.11–1 13.11–1.1
Generator CPU Board 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.70 6.70 6.70 6.70
(DMR)
Gantry CPU Board TOMO. TOMO. TOMO. TOMO. TOMO. TOMO. TOMO. TOMO.
(Poseidon) 10.0.0 10.0.0 10.0.0 10.1.0 11.0.0 11.0.0 11.0.0 11.1.1
Rotation Board CPL 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2
D
DSP 6.100.5 6.100.5 6.100.5 6.100.5 6.100.5 6.100.5 6.100.5 6.101.5
HC12 6.100.4 6.100.4 6.100.4 6.100.4 6.100.4 6.100.4 6.100.4 6.101.4
Lift Board CPL 11.2.1 11.2.1 11.2.1 11.2.1 11.2.1 11.2.1 11.2.1 11.2.1
D
DSP 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 6.101.3
HC12 6.100.2 6.100.2 6.100.2 6.100.2 6.100.2 6.100.2 6.100.2 6.101.2
Compression CPL 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4
Board D
HC12 6.100.1 6.100.1 6.100.1 6.100.1 6.100.1 6.100.1 6.100.1 6.100.1
Tilt Board CPL 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5
D
HC12 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0 5.4.0
BSLM Board CPL 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10 3.2.10
D
HC12 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10 3.9.10
PDU Board HC12 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7 5.0.7
Bucky Board CPL 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3 5.0.3
D
HC12 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6 13.16.6
MTD HC12 2.0.11 2.0.11 2.0.11 2.0.11 2.0.11 2.0.11 2.0.11 2.0.11
146 3 Product History

System Component Version 1 Version 2 Version 3 Version 4 Version 5 Version 6 Version 7 Version 8
Aurora Aurora Aurora Aurora Aurora Aurora Vi‐ Image Po‐ Pollux
M3 M3A M3A Japan M3B M4 tality sition fix (5434135–5
(5434135 (5434135 (5434135–2 (5434135–2 (5434135–2 (5434135–5 (5434135–5 rev 4)
rev 2) rev 3) rev 1) rev 2) rev 4) rev 1) rev 3)
Gantry CD-ROM to 5174994-12 5174994-12 5174994-12 5174994-13 5174994-14 5174994-1 5174994-1 5174994-15
use to get required 4 4
system level
MTD CD-ROM to use 5431220 5431220 5431220 5431220 5431220 5431220 5431220 5431220
to get required system
level
3.2 Hardware Evolution

3.2.1 Version 4
At Version 4 a Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable was released, which is a mandatory
hardware upgrade to the Generator for systems running the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
The application of the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable improves the reliability of the
Generator for sites having a large throughput of exams where the Generator can reboot by
itself. After application of the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable, the Generator will no longer
reboot by itself.
3.2.2 Aurora M4
At Version 5 (Aurora M4) a Rotation Motor Brake Kit was released, which was a hardware
upgrade for the Gantry for IB systems running the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.

4 Exposure Sequence Description

The description of the exposure sequence using the MTD in 2D and 3D modes are described in
the following sections.
4.1 2D Exposure Sequence Description
Illustration 4-16 shows a high-level summary of the exposure sequence using the MTD in 2D
mode with AOP (not manual exposure settings).
Illustration 4-16: 2D Exposure Sequence with the MTD
The following steps are taken for a 2D exposure on the MTD.

1. The MTD is inserted on the Gantry, set to 2D mode, and following appropriate exam
parameters are selected:
○ sets the arm rotation angle to the appropriate position (the detector plane of the MTD
moves with the arm as it is in 2D mode)
○ compression paddle position and FOV

○ laterality chosen in the exam
The sample (phantom or breast) is compressed.
2. The user chooses the exposure parameters on the X-ray Console, and then presses both
the prep button and exposure button on the X-ray Console to launch the 2D exposure.
3. The Generator takes approximately 2.5 seconds to prepare the appropriate AOP
parameters based on the exposure parameters selected on the X-ray Console.
4. A pre-exposure at 4 mAs, lasting no more than 0.5 seconds occurs.
5. A 2D exposure is taken over approximately 4.5 seconds, during which time the noise of the
exposures can clearly be heard.
148 4 Exposure Sequence Description

○ After approximately 11–12 seconds the 2D exposure has started, the Raw image is
displayed on the ADS monitor.
○ After approximately 14 seconds the 2D exposure has started, the processed image is
displayed on the ADS monitor.
4.2 3D Exposure Sequence Description
Illustration 4-17shows a high-level summary of the exposure sequence using the MTD in 3D
mode with AOP (not manual exposure settings).
Illustration 4-17: 3D Exposure Sequence with the MTD
The following steps are taken for a 3D exposure sequence on the MTD.
1. The MTD is inserted on the Gantry, set to 3D mode, and following appropriate exam
parameters are selected:
○ starting angulation position

○ compression paddle position and FOV
○ laterality chosen in the exam
The sample (phantom or breast) is compressed.
2. The detector offsets are acquired during the period (approximately 3.5 seconds) that the
user (Operator or Field Engineer) to return to the Control Station and starts the acquisition.

3. The user chooses the exposure parameters on the X-ray Console, and then presses both
the prep button and exposure button on the X-ray Console to launch the 3D exposure
sequence.
4. The Generator takes approximately 2.5 seconds to prepare the appropriate AOP
parameters based on the exposure parameters selected on the X-ray Console.
5. A pre-exposure at 4 mAs, lasting no more than 0.5 seconds occurs.
6. A 3D exposure sequence then takes place, with 9 exposures taken at different positions for
each of the 2D projection images. The 3D exposure sequence acquisition time lasts
approximately 10 seconds, during which time the arm sweeps and a noise of each of the 9
exposures can clearly be heard.
○ The positions of the 9 exposures vary according to the starting angulation starting
position, FOV being used, compression paddle position and the laterality chosen in the
exam. For more information, see Section 1.5, The 3D X-ray Exposure 3D Sequence.
○ The 9 2D projection images acquired during the 3D exposure sequence are sent to ADS
and processed. The first processed 2D projection image is displayed on the ADS
monitor while the sweep is still in progress, after approximately 7 seconds the 3D
exposure sequence has started. The remaining 2D projection images continue to be
displayed on the ADS monitor, with the 9th 2D projection image arriving on the ADS
monitor approximately 10 seconds after the 3D exposure sequence had started.
○ Once the 3D exposure sequence has completed, the behavior of the system varies
according to whether auto-decompression is enabled or disabled, as follows:
■ If auto-decompression is enabled, the MTD automatically decompresses over a

period of approximately 7 seconds. The MTD keeps the compression arm angle at its
current positions, and the user must move the arm angulation position.
■ If auto-decompression is disabled, the MTD keeps the compression paddle and arm
angle in their current positions, and the user must manually decompress and move
the arm angulation position.
150 4 Exposure Sequence Description

5 System Differences
5.1 Differences to the ADS Browser
In addition to the standard ADS Browser, GE Breast Tomosynthesis provides the following
additional functions within the ADS Browser:
• Available disk space for reconstruction as a percentage (see Section 5.1.1).
• Status information about the reconstruction queue (see Section 5.1.3).
• Manual reconstruction launch (Section 5.1.2).
Illustration 4-18: Differences in the ADS Browser
For a complete description of the ADS Browser, refer to the Browser chapter in the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis Operator Manual.
5.1.1 Available Reconstruction Disk Space
The available free disk space as a percentage of the total disk space on the Reconstruction
Computer is visible on the ADS Browser.
Since the total Reconstruction Computer disk space is 1 TB and a 3D reconstruction volume is
up to 4 GB in size, reconstruction of a series of DBT 2D projections will usually fail around 0.5%
free disk space.
If there is not sufficient space on the Reconstruction Computer for volume reconstruction,
existing 3D reconstruction volumes must be sent to the storage commitment devices and review

workstations on the hospital network (i.e. PACs, IDI, etc.) and then deleted from the
Reconstruction Computer in order to free up available disk space.
NOTE: So that the Reconstruction Computer does not run out of disk space, an auto-delete
feature exists, which can be configured so that the system automatically deletes 3D
reconstruction volumes once they have been pushed to the storage commitment
devices (i.e. PACs, IDI, etc.) on the hospital network.
5.1.2 Launching Volume Reconstruction Manually
By default, Volume reconstruction starts automatically at the end of the image acquisition
sequence, however if reconstruction fails, or is interrupted by the user, it must be restarted
manually.
Only 3D acquisition projection series can be selected to launch manual reconstruction. To select
multiple projections, press the <Control> key when selecting additional series.
NOTE: Following a reconstruction failure, any partially reconstructed volumes are
automatically deleted by the system.
NOTE: The Reconstruction on demand button is a browser preference that can be enabled or
disabled from the Tools menu.
To launch reconstruction:
1. From the Browser, select the patient, then the exam (study), and then click on the required
series.
2. Each selected item is highlighted by inverting the light and dark parts of the image.
To select additional series, hold down the <Control> key on the keyboard while selecting
them in the list.
3.
Click the Reconstruction on demand button.
Each 3D volume will take approximately 2.5 minutes to be build on the Reconstruction
Computer. While the 3D volumes are being reconstructed in the background on the
Reconstruction Computer, the system can carry on being used as normal.
NOTE: The Reconstruction on demand button is disabled when the image set is
incomplete, for example due to an aborted image acquisition sequence.
5.1.3 Reconstruction Queue
The reconstruction queue displays the list and status of DBT 2D projections awaiting
reconstruction to 3D volumes. The reconstruction queue is divided into 2 main sections, High
Priority Queue and Low Priority Queue. For each queue, the window displays the Series
identification number, the Job Status (Active or Pending) and the estimated duration in seconds
for each item in the queue.
To view the reconstruction queue, click the Reconstruction queue status

button.
152 5 System Differences

5.2 Differences to the Service Desktop

The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option introduces modifications of the Service Desktop interface
along with new features.
For the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, the following Service Desktop pages are different
from the Core system:
• Home Page - SITE INFORMATION
• Error log
• Image Quality
• Calibration
• Configuration
5.2.1 Launching the Service Desktop

To access the Service Desktop, use one of the following two methods:
• In the Browser, click the Tools menu button then click Service Desktop in the drop-
down menu.
• Use the right mouse button to click in the background of the Browser screen, then select
Service Tools→ Service Desktop from the menu.
5.2.2 Home Page
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option adds the following information to the Service Desktop
Home page:

5.2.3 Calibrations
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option adds the following information to the Calibration Home
page:
• MTD Compression force
• MTD breast thickness
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option also adds several calibrations to the Detector (Section
5.2.3.1) and the Positioner (Section 5.2.3.2) menus.
5.2.3.1 Detector calibrations
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option adds the following information to the Detector Gain
calibrations page only when the MTD is plugged into the Gantry:
• MTD 2D, Grid, Large Focus, Track: Mo, Filter: Mo 26 kVp
• MTD 2D, Grid, Large Focus, Track: Mo, Filter: Rh 28 kVp
• MTD 2D, Grid, Large Focus, Track: Rh, Filter: Rh 30 kVp
• MTD 3D, Grid, Large Focus, Track: Mo, Filter: Mo 27 kVp
• MTD 3D, Grid, Large Focus, Track: Mo, Filter: Rh 29 kVp
• MTD 3D, Grid, Large Focus, Track: Rh, Filter: Rh 31 kVp

When the MTD is not plugged into the Gantry, the normal Detector Gain calibration techniques
are displayed.
5.2.3.2 Calibration: Positioner Summary
The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option adds the following to the left part of the Calibration:
Positioner Summary page:
• an [MTD Comp. Force] button for facilitating the MTD Compression force calibration
• an [MTD Breast Thickness] button for facilitating the MTD breast thickness calibration
• an [Accept UID] button for accepting the UID of an MTD with the system. For more
information, see Section 2.1.2, System Function Aspects of the MTD and Chapter 5, Job
Card IST A015 – MTD Unique ID Declaration.

Both of the calibration interfaces are similar to the Compression calibrations of the Core system,
except for the Instructions displayed on screen.
5.2.4 IQ Checks
The IQ tab home page is similar to the Core System one. The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option
modifies the IQ test page reached after clicking on New acquisition.
There are two sub-sections:
the 2D section, which contains the legacy IQ tests common with the Core System:

MTD section, which contains the new IQ tests introduced by the option, specific to the MTD and
3D application:

5.2.5 Reconstruction Computer Configuration

The configuration interface of the Reconstruction Computer parameters is located in the
Configuration tab of the Service Desktop. To access it click on the Configuration→
Reconstruction in the left part of the page.

For more information about the configuration of the Reconstruction Computer parameters, refer
to Chapter 6, Job Card CFG A001 - Reconstruction Computer Configuration.

5.3 Networking Differences

5.3.1 System Networking and Internal Communication
Before a system is upgraded, two networks existed such that there is only one internal network
(INT1) and one external network (EXT) as shown below in Illustration 4-19. In the pre-upgrade
situation, the ADS computer has one network interface card (NIC) on the internal network
(INT1) and the other network card on the external network connected to the hospital.
Illustration 4-19: System Pre-Upgrade Default Network Configuration
After the system is upgraded to support the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, three networks
exist such that there are now two internal networks (INT1 and INT2) and one external network
(EXT) as shown below in Illustration 4-20.

Illustration 4-20: System Post-Upgrade Default Network Configuration
The switch within the Control Station is changed and now supports connection speeds of 1000
Mbit/s opposed to the original speed of 100 Mbit/s. The original internal network (INT1) remains
the same, and is for the internal communications between the ADS Computer, IDC, and Gantry
CPU Board, however the link speed of the connection between the ADS Computer and IDC
Computer is now faster at 1000 Mbit/s. The second and new internal network (INT2) is for the
internal communications between the ADS Computer and the Reconstruction Computer, and
runs at a link speed of 1000 Mbit/s via a CAT6 Ethernet cable.
In the post-upgrade situation, the ADS computer has one network interface card on the original
internal network (INT1) like before, and the other network card on the new second internal
network (INT2) connected directly to the Reconstruction Computer. In the post-upgrade
situation, the Reconstruction Computer has one network interface card on the new internal
network (INT2) connected directly to the ADS Computer, and the other network card on the
external network (EXT) connected to the hospital network.

NOTE: The hospital network connection from the Reconstruction Computer eth1 network
interface card is connected via a CAT6 Ethernet junction located in the base of the
Control Station. A gigabit Ethernet cable in the short/long harness connects the
Reconstruction Computer to the rear end of the CAT6 Ethernet junction. The hospital
network is connected to the front end of the CAT6 Ethernet junction with a customer
supplied gigabit Ethernet cable. The CAT6 Ethernet junction is a passive device and
has no IP Address or Netmask.
Before the system was upgraded, the ADS Computer handled the routing information, permitted
hosts, and the physical connection to the hospital. These networking paramaters are now
configured on the Reconstruction Computer instead, as summarized below:
• External Network (EXT1) connection configuration (IP address and netmask) – was
previously achieved via the ADS SW installation or running the sys-unconfig command,
and is now achieved by the Service Desktop Networking – IP Address and Netmask part for
the Reconstruction Computer.
• Routing information (hospital default gateway) – was previously achieved via an S93Route
file on the ADS computer, and is now achieved via a Service Desktop Networking –
Gateway part for the Reconstruction Computer.
• Permitted hosts (that can access the system via the Firewall) – is now achieved by the
Reconstruction Computer, however, the same scripts are still used on the ADS Computer,
which in turn update the appropriate files on the Reconstruction Computer. For more
information, see Section 5.3.2.
• Physical connection to the hospital network – was previously achieved on the ADS
Computer. Previously, if the default NIC speed needed modifying on the ADS computer, it
would have been re-configured adding additional lines in an S93Route file on the ADS
Computer. The S93Route file is no longer used on the ADS Computer. Physical connection
to the hospital network is now achieved on the Reconstruction Computer, and if necessary a
new startup file is created to change the default NIC speed of the Reconstruction Computer
eth1 NIC.
The ADS Computer communicates with the hospital network through the Reconstruction
Computer via port forwarding. For more information, see Section 5.3.2.
5.3.2 Firewall and Port Forwarding
Since it is now the Reconstruction Computer that is connected to the hospital network, the
firewall has moved from the ADS Computer to the Reconstruction Computer. The IPfilter related
scripts have been modified and port forwarding exists, such that the way to add network hosts
and update the IP filters on the firewall remains the same. Illustration 4-21 illustrates how the
firewall, port forwarding, and the IPfilter related scripts now work on the system running the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option.

Illustration 4-21: Firewall, permitted hosts, and port forwarding
• Only permitted hosts defined on the Reconstruction Station can traverse the firewall and
communicate with the ADS Computer.
• A host on the network is added on the ADS Computer as usual (including the IP address
and port number used by that host).
• The IPFreload.sh script is run as usual on the ADS Computer, which configures the
Reconstruction Station firewall, such that:
○ The IP addresses of any hosts declared on the ADS Computer are added to the
permitted hosts list on the Reconstruction Computer.
○ The port numbers of any hosts declared on the ADS Computer are forwarded from the
Reconstruction Computer to the ADS Computer.
The implementation of port forwarding ensures that the functionality of the declared network
hosts works as before on the ADS Computer. Even though the Reconstruction Computer is
“physically” present between the hospital network and the ADS Computer, due to port
forwarding, “logically” from a networking perspective the ADS Computer is still considered
directly connected to the hospital network. The port forwarding has the effect of tunneling the
ports of the declared hosts from the Reconstruction Computer to the ADS Computer. Therefore,
the ADS Computer still sends and receives 2D DICOM objects (2D images and 2D projections
from a 3D sequence) to storage commitment devices, CAD devices, and DICOM printers as
usual.

NOTE: If the external IP address of the Reconstruction Computer is changed or additional

network hosts are added on the ADS Computer, the IPFreload.sh script must be
executed again in order to update the firewall rules.
Contrary to the standard 2D images and the 2D projections which are located on the ADS
Computer, the 3D reconstructed volumes are located on the Reconstruction Computer. The
Browser on the ADS Computer lists the 3D reconstructed volumes, and is used to manage the
database, and instruct the Reconstruction Computer to push 3D reconstructed volumes to
storage commitment devices and DBT compatible review workstations (e.g. IDI) on the hospital
network. When the Browser on the ADS Computer requests that a 3D reconstructed volume is
sent to a host on the network, the Reconstruction Computer receives that request and sends the
specified 3D reconstructed volume to the selected network host.
Illustration 4-22: Comparison of how object types are managed and stored within the network
and Senographe System
Illustration 4-22 and Table 4-9 highlight the difference between the management of 2D images/
projections and 3D volumes. In summary, the following applies:
• Normal 2D images and 2D projections from a DBT sequence are located on the ADS
Computer. The ADS Browser is used to send and receive Normal 2D images and 2D
projections to and from the hosts on the hospital network. The port forwarding described
above ensures that the sending and receiving from the ADS Computer is achieved as
normal.
• 3D reconstructed volumes are located on the Reconstruction Computer. The ADS Browser
is used to send 3D reconstructed volumes to the hosts on the hospital network. The

Reconstruction Computer treats the request from the ADS Computer, and sends the
specified 3D reconstructed volume to the selected network host.
NOTE: 3D reconstructed volumes cannot be received by the ADS Computer from hosts
on the network. If a 3D reconstructed volume no longer exists on the
Reconstruction Computer, its associated nine 2D projections from a given 3D
sequence need to be reconstructed via the manual reconstruction button on the
ADS Browser.
Table 4-9: Comparison of how object types are managed and stored within the network and
Senographe System
Object Type Where Located How it is managed Allowed network

transfer functions
Standard 2D images ADS Computer On the ADS Browser. Send

ADS Computer has logically direct interac‐ Receive
DBT 2D Projections from a 3D sequence tion with hospital network hosts via port
forwarding.
3D Reconstructed Volume from a 3D se‐ Reconstruction On the ADS Browser. Send

quence Computer Reconstruction Computer treats the re‐
quest from the ADS Computer, and inter‐
acts with hospital network host.
NOTE: 3D reconstructed volumes are large in file size, and can take time and network
bandwidth to transfer to remote hosts over the hospital network. The number of
remote hosts that are added to the auto-push feature, will therefore impact the time
and network bandwidth needed to the 3D reconstructed volumes over the hospital
network.
Table 4-10 summarizes the different DICOM connectivity features that are possible on the ADS
Computer and the IDI Workstation for 2D images, 2D projections, and 3D volumes.
Table 4-10: Connectivity Features Summary
DICOM connectivity feature 2D Image 2D Projection 3D Volume
ADS IDI ADS IDI ADS IDI
Display Y Y Y Y N Y
Storage Y Y Y Y Y Y
Commitment Y Y Y Y Y Y
Query/Retrieve Y Y Y Y N Y
Modality Performed Proce‐ Y Y Y Y Y Y

dure Setup
Print Y Y N Y N Y
Export CD Y Y N Y N Y
5.3.3 Network File System and Changes to the Database

5.3.3.1 Network File System and Database
Before a system is upgraded, only one local hard disk exists on the ADS Computer. In this case,
the database on the ADS Computer locally references all of the standard 2D images on the hard
disk on the ADS Computer.

After the system is upgraded, system configuration is modified as follows (see Illustration 4-23):
• A local hard disk exists on the Reconstruction Computer, which contains the 3D
reconstruction volumes.
• A local hard disk exists on the ADS Computer, which contains the standard 2D images and
the DBT 2D projections.
• Two network file system (NFS) mount points exist between the ADS Computer and the
Reconstruction Computer, as follows:
○ NFS Mount point 1 : The /export/home1/sdc_volume_pool directory on the ADS

Computer is mounted to the Reconstruction Computer /recon-data/volumes NFS
shared directory. The function of this mount point is for the ADS Computer to index the
3D constructed volumes in the Browser, and trigger requests on the Reconstruction
Computer to manage (i.e. push and delete, but not view) the 3D reconstructed volumes
located on the Reconstruction Computer.
○ NFS Mount point 2 : The /recon-data/images directory on the Reconstruction

Computer is mounted to the ADS Computer /export/home1/sdc_image_pool NFS
shared directory. The function of this mount point is for the Reconstruction Computer to
get the nine DBT 2D projections from the ADS Computer after a 3D DBT exposure
sequence has finished.
NOTE: In order for the NFS mount points to function correctly, the RSA key must have
been generated on the ADS Computer so that it can securely connect to the
Reconstruction Computer via a secure shell (ssh) connection.
• The database remains on the ADS Computer, however in addition to referencing the
standard 2D images and the DBT 2D projections that are local on the ADS Computer, it also
references the 3D projections that are on the Reconstruction Computer remotely via NFS
mount point 1.

Illustration 4-23: NFS mounting and database interaction
The ADS Browser relies on the database in order to display the DICOM objects (i.e. standard
2D images, DBT 2D projections, and 3D volumes) so they can be managed (i.e. sent and
received) with network hosts in the hospital network. For the ADS Browser to be able to manage
the DICOM objects, the NFS mount point 1 needs to be fully functional. The NFS mount point 1
will stop working in the following situations:
• the network physical network connection between the Reconstruction Computer and the
ADS Computer is broken
• ssh connection (which requires the RSA key created on ADS Computer) has stopped
working (this occurs when re-installing the ADS Computer Software or Reconstruction
Computer Software)
In the following situations, the database on the ADS Computer needs restoring:
• When the Reconstruction Software is (re)loaded or the Reconstruction Computer changed
As the database is on the ADS Computer, the images of the reconstruction volumes that
were previously on the Reconstruction Computer will still appear on the database, however
they are physically no longer present. Therefore, it is necessary to perform a recover
database, so that the database entries on the ADS Computer are updated so that the
images of the reconstruction volumes that no longer exist are removed from the database.

The Reconstruction Computer will no longer have the constructed 3D volumes for each of
the patient exams. The 3D volumes will need to be reconstructed if they were never pushed
to the IDI (or an external PACs that supports the 3D volumes).
• When the ADS Software is (re)loaded or the ADS Computer changed

As the database is on the ADS Computer, it needs to be restored if the ADS Computer was
changed or ADS Software.
Once the database is rebuilt, if there were any 3D volumes on the Reconstruction Station
they will now be visible on the ADS Computer, however the standard 2D images and the
DBT 2D projections of a Tomo sequence that formed each of the 3D volumes are no longer
on the ADS Computer. If the standard 2D images and the DBT 2D projections of a Tomo
sequence are required again on the ADS Computer, they can be retrieved using the ADS
Browser as usual from the remote PACS, IDI, or from archives burnt to CD-R.

5.4 Other Differences To The System

5.4.1 Fine View and eContrast
After exposure for 2D acquisitions, the image(s) acquired by the Digital Detector are
automatically transferred to the WorkStation, added to the exam and displayed on the Viewer
screen as a raw image with low contrast. For 3D projections, only the processed image is
displayed on the screen. During the transfer of the raw image to the Acquisition WorkStation
(AWS), all Operator interface functions are disabled.
5.4.1.1 Image processing
• For 2D acquisitions, after acquisition, a number of calculations are applied to the image to
create the processed image, which then replaces the 2D raw image on the screen of the
AWS.
• For 3D acquisitions, Fine View is applied only during Volume reconstruction and has no
effect on the displayed projections, it is not applied to the Raw images. However, in order to
display 3D projections, eContrast is applied before displaying the image on the Viewer
screen.
5.4.1.2 Processed image
• After application of the selected algorithm(s), the 2D processed image is added to the exam
and replaces the raw image on the AWS screen.
• For 2D acquisitions, processed images are saved in the DICOM MG “for presentation”
format, ready for review.
• For 3D acquisitions, image processing is applied to the image displayed on screen. The raw
images are archived with no processing applied.
5.4.2 Mechanical motion
5.4.2.1 Source starting position
The technologist prepares to perform the DBT acquisition sequence by bringing the source from
the central position to the starting position at the extremity of the source trajectory. This can be
done either prior to or after breast compression. If under compression, the motion is controlled
by the technologist with continuous activation of the angulation command.
5.4.2.2 Source trajectory
After the tomosynthesis acquisition is started, the source is automatically moved over a 25° arc.
The center of the arc is located approximately 20 mm above the breast support, with a radius of
640 mm. Over this arc, the source will be stopped at 9 evenly-spaced positions (including the
starting position) to perform projection view exposures.
The X-ray tube trajectory is centered over the imaging area. For larger breasts using the full
detector area for imaging, the trajectory is symmetric about the center line of the detector. For
smaller breasts imaged on a reduced field-of-view, the center of the source trajectory is shifted
toward the active imaging area. This solution retains the 25° source trajectory while avoiding
projection of the walls of the smaller paddle on breast tissue.

5.4.2.3 Apparent focal spot size and handling of vibrations

Since there is mechanical motion between discrete view acquisitions in the DBT sequence,
vibrations can occur that have the potential to degrade image quality, because vibrations will
increase the apparent focal spot size and can induce patient motion. To preserve image quality
by avoiding motion blur during acquisition, the complete tomosynthesis sequence needs to be
acquired in a few seconds. Step-and-shoot source motion requires accelerating and stopping
the source in sub-second times.
A properly designed speed profile avoids triggering vibrations by generating only non-resonant
frequencies in the column. The column design of the Senographe Essential minimizes mid-
frequency resonances while the DBT speed profile is smoothed to eliminate high-frequency
resonances. A partial-sine angular position profile was designed for acceleration and
deceleration to minimize vibration.
Each time the source is stopped, a preset damping time is allocated before the exposure starts,
in order to damp residual vibration and ensure that the apparent focal spot size is not degraded.
5.4.3 X-ray tube
5.4.3.1 Introduction
The X-ray tube used for the option is identical to the one used by the core system. Refer to the
Senographe - Theory of Operation of the Core SIP for more information.
5.4.3.2 Focal spot
Only the Large optical focal spot is used with the MTD. Refer to the Senographe - Theory of
Operation of the Core SIP for more information.
5.4.3.2.1 Possible values for direct focal distance
Source-to-Image Distance is Fixed: 660mm.
5.4.3.2.2 Position of the intersection of the reference axis with the image reception area for a specified
direct focal distance
According to standard mammography practice, the radiation reference axis is directed at the
chest wall edge of the digital detector; radiation is shielded so that there is no radiation directed
beyond the chest wall. Reference axis intersects the digital detector in the middle at the chest
wall side of the detector.
NOTE: For off-centered small fields of view acquisitions, the whole area of the digital detector
is not displayed. The Reference axis remains fixed relative to the detector and
therefore does not intersect the effective imaging area in the middle of the chest wall
edge.
5.4.3.2.3 Angle of the reference axis to the plane of the image reception area.
The reference axis is perpendicular to the imaging area.

6 System Diagrams
6.1 Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram

6.2 Column Block Diagram
172 6 System Diagrams

6.3 Compression Arm Block Diagram

NOTE: Since the MTD is never opened to perform any service operations, the low level
connectivity information within the MTD is beyond the scope of this Service Manual.

6.4 Control Station Block Diagram

Illustration 4-24: V4 Control Station Data Distribution Diagram

Illustration 4-25: V5 Control Station Data Distribution Diagram — eDione2/Kontron R2

configuration

Illustration 4-26: V5 Control Station Data Distribution Diagram — eDione3/Kontron R2

configuration

Illustration 4-27: V4 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram

Illustration 4-28: V5 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram

6.5 Reconstruction Station Block Diagram

Illustration 4-29: Reconstruction Station Data Distribution Diagram

Chapter 5 Installation
1 About this chapter
This chapter contains the installation Job Cards necessary to install the option kit.
Chapter 5 Installation 181

2 Scenario IST A001 - Installation

2.1 Context
This Scenario provides information for the installation of the option on the customer site.
2.2 Steering Guide
Refer to the following Steering Guide for an outline of the recommended sequence of
installation. Installation Steering Guide - Preparation, Core System hardware upgrades, Core
System software upgrades, Reconstruction Station installation, Calibrations and Checks,
Completion.
Job Card names in italics refer to procedure described in the Core SIP.
The sequence of steps you must perform varies according to one of the following scenarios:
Table 5-1: System Level Scenarios
Scenario System Level (Model Number)
Scenario A Senographe Essential - LFOV2 - V4 Control Station (5144816-9)

Senographe Essential - Sunburst - V4 Control Station (5144816-10)
Senographe Essential - eIFU – V4 Control Station (5144816-11)
Senographe Essential - SFDA – V4 Control Station (5144816-12)
Senographe Essential - CE removal – V4 Control Station (5144816-13) (system already installed)
Senographe Essential - Vitality – V5 Control Station (5144816-14) (system already installed)
Scenario B Senographe Essential - Penduick - V3 Control Station (5144816-8)
Scenario C Senographe Essential - Pre-Penduick - V1 Control Station (5144816) and Senographe Essential -
Pre-Penduick - V2 Control Station (5144816, 5144816-1-1)
Scenario D Senographe Essential - Pre-Penduick - V3 Control Station (5144816-2-1, 5144816-3, 5144816-4,

5144816-5, 5144816-6, 5144816-7)
Scenario E Senographe Essential - LFOV2 - V3 Control Station (5144816-2-1, 5144816-3, 5144816-4,

5144816-5, 5144816-6, 5144816-7, 5144816-8) – systems that have been upgraded using the Nau‐
tilus Kit.
Scenario F Senographe Essential - CE removal – V4 Control Station (5144816-13) (system never installed)
Senographe Essential Systems - V5 Control Station (5144816-14) (system never installed)
Table 5-2: Installation Steering Guide
Step Action Job Card A B C, F Done

D,
E
Preparation
1 AOP Configuration Checks Job Card IST A000 - AOP Configuration Check Y Y Y N
2 Check overall system behavior. Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A012 - Overall system Y Y Y N
behavior check
3 Acquisition System Backup Job Card IST A010 - Acquisition System Backup Y Y Y N
If Stereotaxy option is present, manually
back up Stereo needles.
If CAD option is present, manually back up
the CAD configuration.
4 If the system IP addresses are not the de‐ Job Card IST A001 - Default Internal IP Address Y Y Y N
fault ones. Checks
Restore default IP addresses of the sys‐
tem.
182 2 Scenario IST A001 - Installation


D,
E
5 Install Essential Hardware Upgrade kit for See Essential Hardware Upgrade kit for Tomo In‐ N Y Y N
SenoClaire (5144816-8 and older system stallation Manual.
only).
6 Install Accelera (V1/ V2/V3 Control Station Job Card IST A004 - Install Accelera Option (sys‐ N Y Y N
systems only). tems with V1/V2/V3 Control Station only)
7 If not already done, unpack and check the Chapter 3, Job Card PRE A005 - Unpacking the Y Y Y Y
kit for damage. kit
Core System hardware and software upgrades
8 Change Lift board. Job Card IST A002 - Lift board Y Y Y Y
9 Install Tomo footswitch. Job Card IST A003 - Tomo Footswitch Y Y Y Y
10 Gantry Software upgrade. Job Card IST A011 - Gantry Components Soft‐ Y Y Y Y
ware Update
11 Upgrade Generator ePROMs. Job Card IST A007 - Generator ePROMS Y N N Y

Note: For systems that have V3 Control
Stations or lower, and are upgraded via the
Accelera option, this step is performed dur‐
ing the Accelera upgrade. See Job Card
IST A004 - Install Accelera Option (systems
with V1/V2/V3 Control Station only) for
more information.
12 Install Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable Job Card IST A027 - Stator Current Filter Assem‐ Y Y Y Y
on the TP18, TP20 and TP22 connectors of bly Cable
the Generator Supply Command Board
13 Upgrade IDC software. Job Card IST A012 - IDC Software Upgrade Y N N Y
more information.
14 Restore IDC configuration. Job Card IST A012a - IDC Calibration Restore Y N N N
15 Configure Detector Job Card IST A012c - Configure Detector Y Y Y Y
16 Upgrade ADS RAM (FOR Z400 COMPUT‐ Job Card IST A006 - ADS RAM Y Y Y Y
ER ONLY)
17 Upgrade ADS software. Job Card IST A013 - AWS Software Installation Y N N Y
more information.
18 Install Collimator Check script on ADS Job Card IST A013a – Collimator Check Script In‐ Y Y Y Y
Computer and check that the Collimator is stallation
compatible Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A020 – Collimator
Compatibility Check
19 Upgrade Gantry with Rotation Motor Brake See the upgrade steering guide and upgrade Y N N Y
Upgrade kit if required. (UPG) Job Cards described in the Rotation Motor
Brake Upgrade Kit Installation Manual


D,
E
20 Upgrade Rotation Clutch for a Precise 50N Job Card IST A024 - Precise 50N Rotation Clutch Y Y Y N
Rotation Clutch
21 Check existing detector rails, and if neces‐ Job Card IST A023 - Detector Rails Y Y Y N
sary change the existing detector rails
Note: To save time, this step can be under‐
taken while upgrading the ADS software.
22 Check if the Breast Support Locking Mech‐ Job Card IST A025 – BSLM Board Compatibility Y Y Y Y
anism board is compatible, and change if Check
necessary .
Note: To save time, this step can be under‐
Replace Ethernet switch Job Card IST A005 - Ethernet switch Y Y Y Y

23 Note: To save time, this step can be under‐
24 Lift calibration. Job Card CAL A031 - Lift Calibration in the Core Y Y Y Y
SIP
25 Check and update detector grounding con‐ Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A001 - Angulation Y Y Y N
nection. Check
26 Install MTD Table Stand Job Card IST A021 - MTD table stand Y Y Y Y
27 Install MTD Deflectors Job Card IST A009 - MTD Deflectors Y Y Y Y
28 Install Reconstruction housing and Recon‐ Job Card IST A008 - Reconstruction station Y Y Y Y
struction Station.
29 Ground Continuity and Leakage Current Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A011 - Ground Con‐ Y Y Y Y
Tests tinuity and Leakage Current Tests
30 Create RSA Key and Update ADS Host‐ Job Card IST A014 - Create RSA Key and Update Y Y Y Y
name ADS Hostname
31 Restore ADS parameters, including restor‐ Job Card IST A014a - AWS Configuration Re‐ Y Y Y N
ing routing and networking configuration on store
the Reconstruction Station. Job Card ELE A021 — Network Configuration
Configure ADS parameters, and configure Job Card IST A014b - AWS Configuration N N N Y
network. Job Card ELE A021 — Network Configuration
32 If 3MP 21” Monitor exists, configure the Job Card ELE A008 - Configuring the 21-inch Y Y Y Y
3MP monitor 3MP Monitor in the Core SIP
33 Calibrate Detector Job Card IST A012b - Detector Calibration (for N Y Y Y
new systems and those just field upgraded to Ac‐
celera)
34 Perform Reconstruction Station configura‐ Chapter 6, Job Card CFG A001 - Reconstruction Y Y Y Y
tion. Station configuration
35 Declare MTD UID with the system. Job Card IST – A015 MTD Unique ID Declaration Y Y Y Y
Calibrations and Checks
36 Perform Breast support tests on MTD. Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A029 - Breast Support Y Y Y Y
Tests MTD
37 If you changed the detector rails, perform Job Card ELE A029 – Breast Support Tests in the Y Y Y Y
Breast support tests on all Breast Supports Core SIP
used with the system.
38 Perform Compression Paddle Chest wall Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A002 - Compression Y Y Y Y
test. Paddle Chest Wall Test


D,
E
39 Perform MTD compression force calibration Section Chapter 6, Section 3., Compression Y Y Y Y
check. Force Sensor Calibration Check in
Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A048 - Calibration of
Compression Force Sensor MTD
40 Perform MTD compression thickness cali‐ Section Chapter 6, Section 5., Compression Y Y Y Y
bration check. Thickness Calibration Check in
Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A050 - Compression
Thickness Calibration MTD
41 Perform kVp settings check. Job Card CHK A011 - Check kVp settings in the Y Y Y Y
Core SIP
42 Perform mA and mAs settings check. Job Card CHK A013 - Check mA and mAs set‐ Y Y Y Y
tings in the Core SIP
43 Perform 2D gain calibration for the MTD. Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A043 - Detector Gain Y Y Y Y
Calibration 2D MTD
44 Perform 3D gain calibration. Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A001 - Detector Gain Y Y Y Y
Calibration 3D
45 Perform Conversion Factor Measurement. Job Card CAL A045 - Conversion Factor Meas‐ Y Y Y Y
urement in the Core SIP
46 Perform mAs Non-linearity Calibration. Job Card CAL A053 - mAs Non-linearity Calibra‐ Y Y Y Y
tion in the Core SIP
47 Perform AOP Calibration for the MTD. Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration Y Y Y Y
MTD
48 Perform IQ Tools Flat Field Test. Job Card ELE A032 - IQ Tools Flat Field Test in N Y Y Y
the Core SIP or CESM SIP
49 If the Mag Stand option is present Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. N Y Y Y
Perform IQ Tools Mag Resolution Test. Mandatory if installation done by GE service per‐
sonnel.
50 Perform IQ Tools Line Artifacts Test. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. N Y Y Y
Mandatory if installation done by GE service per‐
sonnel.
51 Perform IQ Tools Composite Test. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. Y Y Y Y
sonnel.
52 Perform IQ Tools Noise Test. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. N Y Y Y
sonnel.
53 Perform Image Acquisition and ACR Score. Job Card ELE A037 - Image Acquisition and ACR N Y Y Y
Score in the Core SIP
54 Perform AOP Mode and SNR Check. Job Card ELE A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check N Y Y Y
in the Core SIP
55 Perform IQ Tools Flat Field Test 2D with Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. Y Y Y Y
MTD. Mandatory if installation done by GE service per‐
sonnel.
56 Perform Image Acquisition and ACR Score Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A037 - Image Acquisi‐ Y Y Y Y
MTD 2D. tion and ACR Score MTD 2D
57 Perform AOP Mode and SNR Check MTD Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A038 - AOP Mode and Y Y Y Y
2D. SNR Check MTD 2D
58 Perform CNR and MTF Measurement with Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A033 — CNR and MTF Y Y Y Y
MTD Measurement with MTD


D,
E
59 Perform Flat Field 3D test. Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A003 - Flat Field 3D Y Y Y Y
60 Perform Image Acquisition and ACR Score Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A004 - Image Acquisi‐ Y Y Y Y
3D. tion and ACR Score 3D
61 Perform AOP Check 3D. Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A005 - AOP Check 3D Y Y Y Y
Perform Volume Coverage test. Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A006 - Volume Cover‐ Y Y Y Y
62
age
Perform DQE in Tomo Mode test. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. Y Y Y Y
63 Mandatory if installation done by GE service per‐
sonnel.
Perform MTF & MTF-NU test. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. Y Y Y Y
sonnel.
Perform Moiré Acceptance test. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. Y Y Y Y
sonnel.
66 Perform Grid texture test. Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A010 - Grid texture Y Y Y Y
67 Perform Breast Tomosynthesis Object Con‐ Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A050 - Breast Tomo‐ Y Y Y Y
struction Checks synthesis Object Construction Checks
68 Perform PACS Compatibility Tests With Chapter 7, Job Card CHK A051 - PACS Compati‐ Y Y Y Y
Breast Tomosynthesis Objects bility Tests With Breast Tomosynthesis Objects
Completion
69 Provide documentation. Job Card IST A016 - Provide Documentation Y Y Y Y
70 Send Localization Cards. Job Card IST A017 - Send Localization Cards Y Y Y Y
71 Image Processing Related Configuration. Job Card IST A018 - Image Processing Configu‐ Y Y Y Y
ration
72 Physicist Tests Not Applicable Y Y Y Y

The Hospital Physicist will perform tests accord‐
ing to local requirements
73 If the Stereotaxy option exists, perform Job Card IST A019 - Stereotaxy Configuration Y Y Y Y
Stereotaxy configuration.
Note: Must only be performed by the GE
Healthcare FE just before the Medial Appli‐
cations specialist performs the QC tests.
74 Perform system checkout. Not applicable for NON GE service personnel. Y Y Y Y

sonnel.
75 Back up the system configuration. Job Card ELE A052 - Back Up/Restore Y Y Y Y

3 Job Card IST A000 - AOP Configuration Check

Personnel
Requirements
1 Not Applicable 5 mins Not Applicable
3.2 Overview
Use the steps in the Procedure to check the AOP Configuration that is set for each AOP mode
on the Generator and the AOP mode on the ADS Computer.
NOTE: The purpose of this check is to be able to restore the correct AOP table after
performing the upgrade.
3.3 Procedure
3.3.1 For all systems
3.3.1.1 Generator AOP Mode Configuration Check
Perform the following steps to check the AOP configuration on the Generator for each of the
three (DOSE, STD, CNT) modes:
1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/TYPE on the X-ray Console.
2. From the SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/TYPE menu, select the mode that
you want to check (DOSE , STD, CNT).
3. Note down the value displayed to the right of the selected mode (TAB_A or TAB_B) in
Chapter 8, Section 3.11, Table 8-3: AOP Mode Configuration on Generator within Chapter
8, LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual record sheets.
• If this value is TAB_A, the selected mode is configured with the Classic table.
• If this value is TAB_B, the selected mode is configured with Profile table.
4. Keep pressing the SETUP button until you exit the configuration menu on the X-ray
Console.
3.3.1.2 ADS Computer AOP Mode Configuration Check
Use the following steps to query and note down the AOP configuration set on the AWS
Computer.
1. From behind the Browser, right click the background, and from the Root Menu that appears,
select Service Tools > Command Window to launch a command window.
A command window appears with an ADS prompt.
2. Change to the ~sdc/senovision/scripts directory, by entering:
cd ~sdc/senovision/scripts
3. Run the setaop.sh script to query the current AOP configuration, by entering:
setaop.sh

The setaop.sh script displays the current configuration (either AOP STD TAB_A or
AOP STD TAB_B).
4. Note down the current AOP configuration in Chapter 8, Section 3.11, Table 8-2: AOP Mode
Configuration on ADS Computer within Chapter 8, LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure -
AWS parameters manual record sheets.
5. Close the command window, by entering:
exit
3.3.2 For Penduick and above systems with Stereotaxy
It you are upgrading a Penduick or above system, which has the Stereotaxy option, additionally
perform the following steps to check the Stereotaxy AOP configuration:
1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/TYPE on the X-ray Console.
2. From the SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/TYPE menu, select the STEREO
mode.
3. Note down the value displayed to the right of the selected mode (TAB_A or TAB_B) in
Chapter 8, Section 3.11, Table 8-4: Stereotaxy AOP Mode Configuration on Generator
within Chapter 8, LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual record
sheets.
• If this value is TAB_A, the stereo mode is configured with the Classic table.
• If this value is TAB_B, the stereo mode is configured with Profile table.
4. Keep pressing the SETUP button until you exit the configuration menu on the X-ray
Console.
3.4 Finalization
188 3 Job Card IST A000 - AOP Configuration Check

4 Job Card IST A001 - Default Internal IP Address Checks

Personnel
Requirements
1 Not Applicable 5 minutes to perform Not Applicable
check, and if
necessary 60 minutes
4.2 Overview
Before updating the software during the upgrade, it is important that the Internal IP Address
scheme of the Senographe system is set to its default values shown below.
Component IP address
ADS Computer 192.168.1.10
IDC 192.168.1.20
Gantry CPU (Poseidon) 192.168.1.40
4.3 Procedure
1. Use the right mouse button to click in the background of the Browser screen, then select
Service Tools/Service Desktop from the pop-up menu.
2. From the Service Desktop that appears, observe the value of the IDC IP Address that is
displayed towards the bottom left of the Service Desktop.
3. Determine your next step:
• If the IDC IP Address displayed is 192.168.1.20, the Senographe system is already
on its default Internal IP Address scheme and no further action is required.
• If the IDC IP Address displayed is not 192.168.1.20, the Senographe system is not
already on its default Internal IP Address scheme. In this case, do the following:
1. Open a command window, and display the /etc/hosts file, by entering:
more /etc/hosts
2. Within the IP address for local additional interfaces section of
the file, note down the IP addresses for the IDC, ADS and Gantry CPU (pos).
exit
4. Disconnect the Control Station of the Senographe System from the hospital
network and perform Job Card ELE A050 - Changing Senographe Internal IP
Addresses in the SIP to change the Internal IP Addresses back their default
values.

4.4 Finalization
190 4 Job Card IST A001 - Default Internal IP Address

Checks
5 Job Card IST A002 - Lift board

Personnel
Requirements

5.2.1 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
THE SENOGRAPHE SYSTEM MUST BE POWERED OFF AND LOTO
APPLIED. SWITCH OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY FROM THE
MAINS DISTRIBUTION COVER IN THE ROOM. APPLY AN APPROPRIATE
LOTO PADLOCK AND LABEL. IF CHANGING A PART WITHIN THE
GENERATOR, WAIT 10 MINUTES FOR THE COMPONENTS WITHIN THE
GENERATOR TO DISCHARGE.
REFER TO CHAPTER 1, JOB CARD LOTO A001 - LOCK-OUT / TAG-OUT
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
NOTICE
When handling electronic components, take all usual precautions against
damage by ESD (Electro-Static-Discharge). Use for example an anti-static mat
and an ESD strap.
5.3 Procedure
5.3.1 Disassembly of Lift Board
1. Remove the Gantry bottom cover for easy access to the lower screws of the lift board.
Refer to Job Card PHY A044 - Remove/Reinstall Gantry Covers in the Core SIP.

Illustration 5-1: Lift board location
NOTICE
Disconnect the cables with caution to avoid damage to the connectors.
NOTICE
and an ESD strap.
2. Carefully disconnect all the cables from the Lift Board.
Pay attention to the cables routing around the sides of the Lift Board.
NOTICE
Use a cross-head screwdriver to remove the screws.
3. Release the six screws (see Illustration 5-2) securing the Lift Board.
192 5 Job Card IST A002 - Lift board

Illustration 5-2: Lift board screws
4. Put the old Lift board into an anti-static bag.

5.3.2 Installation of the Lift Board
The new Lift Board has three connectors for footswitches instead of two. Therefore the
connection is different.
NOTICE
and an ESD strap.
1. Put the new Lift Board in place. Be careful not to pinch any of the cables behind the board.

Illustration 5-3: Lift Board Connections
2. Use the six screws to secure the new Lift Board to the side of the Gantry.
Use a cross-head screwdriver.
NOTICE
When reconnecting all the cables to the Lift Board, ensure that you route them so
they do not pass over Lift Board as illustrated in the diagram above. This
precaution avoids potential interference caused by component electronic noise.
3. Carefully reconnect all of the cables to the new Lift Board as summarized in Illustration 5-3
and Table 5-3 below.
Table 5-3: Lift Board cable connections
Connector Label Description of cable (usually identified by Cable color

code on a yellow label)
J1 J1/PL201-W210 Gray
J3 J3/PL201-W208 Grey

Connector Label Description of cable (usually identified by Cable color

code on a yellow label)
J6 Either none or a black cable if Gantry None, black or pink
uses a Type 2 Lift Screw Assembly with
top brake, or pink cable with J6/PL201–
W510 if Gantry uses a Type 3 Lift Screw
Assembly (with built in motor brake)
J9 J9/PL201 or PL202 - W205 Black
J10 J10/PL201 or PL202 - W206 Blue/Red
J11 J11/PL201-W203 Gray
J12 J12/PL201-W211 Gray
J13 J13/PL201-W208 Gray
J14 J14/PL201-W213 Gray
J15 Gray ribbon cable to the Gantry digital Gray
display
J16 Footwsitch cable With 9 pin D-sub con‐ N/A
nector
J17 Footwsitch cable With 9 pin D-sub con‐ N/A
nector
J18 3D foot pedal cable With 9 pin D-sub con‐ N/A
nector
J22 No cable attached N/A
J23 No cable attached N/A
5.3.3 Firmware Check

Check whether the new Lift Board firmware needs to be updated, as follows:
1. Remove LOTO from the system.
2. Reboot the Senographe system.
3. Go to the Service Desktop home page (see Chapter 4, Section 5.2.1, Launching the Service
Desktop).
4. Check whether the firmware versions for the new Lift Board corresponds to the required
firmware version using consult Table 5-4:
Table 5-4: Firmware versions
Component Version
CPLD V11.2.1

Component Version
DSP V6.101.3
HC12 V6.101.2
• If the current firmware versions match the required versions quoted in Table 5-4, no
additional steps are required.
• If the current firmware versions does not match the versions in Table 5-4, you must
perform a firmware update of the mismatched firmware. To update the new Lift
Board firmware follow the instructions described in Section 38.1.2, Gantry node
firmware in Job Card ELE A030 - Software and firmware reload or update.
5.3.4 Check Gantry Readout Cable Position
To ensure that there is no EMC interference between the Lift Board and the Gantry Readout
ribbon cable, ensure that the Gantry Readout ribbon cable is correctly positioned. Refer to
Check Gantry Readout Cable Position in Job Card D/R A212 - Gantry Readout. in the Core SIP.
5.3.5 Functional checks
1. Check that compression and lift footswitches are working properly.
2. Check that the readability of Gantry Readout text is acceptable. If needed, adjust the Gantry
Readout Potentiometer on the Lift board until the text brightness/contrast is acceptable. For
adjustment use a very small flat screwdriver (max. 1 mm wide).
5.4 Finalization
Connect the 3D foot pedal using the steps described in Job Card IST A003 - 3D foot pedal.

6 Job Card IST A003 - 3D foot pedal

Personnel
Requirements

6.2.1 Replacement Parts
3D foot pedal 1 - 5408997 -
6.2.2 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
THE PROCEDURE REQUIRES AN ANGULATION OF THE POSITIONER ARM.
CHECK THAT NO ONE STANDS NEXT TO THE POSITIONER BEFORE
STARTING THE ANGULATION.
CAUTION
Risks of falling.
Avoid presence of cables in appropriate walkways.
Run cable harnesses and cables through floor or wall ducting as appropriate.
The Tomo compatible Lift board - -
(2373567-20) is installed on the system.
The Gantry covers are removed (refer to - -
Job Card PHY A044 - Remove/Reinstall
Gantry Covers in the Core SIP).
6.3 Procedure
1. Position the 3D foot pedal next to the Control Station.
CAUTION
Risks of falling.
2. Run the 3D foot pedal cable from the Control Station to the Lift board.
3. Connect the 3D foot pedal cable to the J18 connector (see Illustration 5-4).

Illustration 5-4: Lift board connectors
6.4 Finalization
198 6 Job Card IST A003 - 3D foot pedal

7 Job Card IST A004 - Install Accelera Option (systems with V1/V2/V3 Control
Station only)
Personnel
Requirements
2 Field Engineers Not Applicable 480 mins Not Applicable
7.2 Overview
This Job Card is only to be performed for systems that have the V1, V2, or V3 Control Station.
Accelera 2 Kit 1 - S30331YW -
7.3.2 Safety
WARNING
MAINS DISTRIBUTION PANEL IN THE ROOM. APPLY AN APPROPRIATE
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
Backup the Acquisition Workstation Job Card IST A010 - -
Acquisition System Backup
7.4 Procedure
1. Follow the instructions described in the Accelera Installation Manual to change the Control
Station. Do not perform all the upgrade Job Cards in the Accelera Installation Manual . Only
perform the following steps described in the following table:
Step Action Job Card in the Accelera Installation Manual Time Done
(mins)
1 Remove Radshield Job Card UPG A005- Remove Radshield 30

2 Disconnect Control Station Job Card UPG A006 - Disconnect and Tidy Away Gantry Harness and 50
Network Connections
Job Card UPG A007 -Disconnect and Remove Bar Code Scanner
Job Card UPG A008 - Disconnect, Remove and Ship Old IDC
Job Card UPG A009 - Disconnect, Remove and Ship Old ADS
(SB-150)
3 Un-install Control Station Job Card UPG A010 - Remove LCD Monitor 40
4 Unpack New Control Sta‐ Job Card UPG A011 - Unpack New Control Station 60
tion
5 Remove Old Control Station Job Card UPG A012- Remove Old Control Station 60
6 Install new Control Station Job Card UPG A013 - Remove Control Station Covers 225
physically Job Card UPG M014 - Control Station Installation
Note: Only GE FEs can perform the selection feature.
Job Card UPG A015 - Radiation Screen Installation
Job Card UPG A016 - Opposite Site Rotative Arm Installation (Option‐
al)
Job Card UPG M017 - Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station
Job Card UPG A018 - Connect Gantry to Control Station
Job Card UPG A019 - IDC Air Filter Cleaning
7 Change password and Re‐ Job Card UPG A021 - Change password and Remove Calibration Data 10
move calibration data
8 Apply Upgrade Label and Job Card UPG A030 - Upgrade Labeling, Send Localization Card 5
post Localization Label
NOTE: While installing the new Control Station physically (step 6 in the table above),
you can also upgrade the ADS RAM at the same time before connecting the
Gantry to the Control Station. For more information, refer to Job Card IST
A006 - ADS RAM upgrade.
2. Perform the following steps to upgrade the software components in the system:
1. Upgrade the IDC Software according to Job Card IST A012 - IDC Software Upgrade.
2. Upgrade the ADS Software according to Job Card IST A013 - AWS Software
Installation.
3. Perform a system backup from the Service Desktop to backup the generator
parameters, change the Generator ePROMs and restore the Generator backup. For
more information, refer to Job Card IST A007 - Generator ePROMS.
3. Continue with the rest of the installation procedure as described in the rest of the Scenario
IST A001 - Installation for the following steps.
7.5 Finalization
200 7 Job Card IST A004 - Install Accelera Option (systems

with V1/V2/V3 Control Station only)
8 Job Card IST A005 - Ethernet switch

Personnel
Requirements

8.2.2 Consumables
Cable ties 4 - - -

Ethernet switch 1 - 5434179 -
8.3 Procedure
8.3.1 Accessing the Ethernet switch
Follow the steps below to access the switch.
1. Remove the Control Station top cover. Refer to the procedure described in Job Card PHY
A040 - Remove/Reinstall Control Station Covers in the Core SIP.
2. Remove the Control Station omega cover. Refer to the procedure described in Job Card
PHY A040 - Remove/Reinstall Control Station Covers in the Core SIP.
The Ethernet switch is located as shown on the illustration below:

Illustration 5-5: Ethernet switch location in the Control Station
8.3.2 Removing the Ethernet switch

1. Unplug the power cable on the left-hand side of the Ethernet switch (A).
2. Unplug the Ethernet cables on the right-hand side of the Ethernet switch (B).
3. Cut the two cable ties (C).
4. Remove the Ethernet switch.
8.3.3 Installing the new Ethernet switch
The new Ethernet switch is shorter than the previous one. If one cable tie is not enough to go
around the switch, tie two together.
1. Insert two cable ties in the metal plate.
To avoid blocking the power socket and the 4 top Ethernet ports:
• Use the holes closer to the edge of the metal plate (see Illustration 5-6).
202 8 Job Card IST A005 - Ethernet switch

• Use the first holes starting from the bottom of the metal plate for the top cable tie
(see Illustration 5-6).
• Use the third holes starting from the top of the metal plate for the bottom cable tie
Illustration 5-6: Holes on the metal plate
2. Position the Ethernet switch with the power socket in the top left corner (see Illustration 5-7).
3. Secure the switch.
4. Make sure the Ethernet switch is secured and not moving.
5. Cut the excess length of the cable ties.
6. Plug the Ethernet cables in the Ethernet ports 1, 2 3 and 4, as shown in Illustration 5-7.
NOTE: Position the cables so you do not twist or cross them. The order in which the
cables are plugged has no impact.

Illustration 5-7: Plugging the cables
7. Plug the power cable in the power socket as shown in Illustration 5-7.
8. Make sure the push button is in Off position (out) as shown in Illustration 5-8.
NOTE: If the push button is in On position (in) the LEDs will not be enabled.
204 8 Job Card IST A005 - Ethernet switch

Illustration 5-8: Push button and power LEDs.
9. Check that the LEDs corresponding to the ports where you plugged the Ethernet cables are
on (see Illustration 5-8), indicating that the used Ethernet ports are powered.
8.4 Finalization

9 Job Card IST A006 - ADS RAM upgrade

Personnel
Requirements
9.2 Overview
This procedure is only applicable for Z400 computers.
9.3.2 Consumables
RAM modules 1 For Z400 5434169 -
9.3.4 Safety
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
WARNING
THE ADS COMPUTER IS APPROXIMATELY 13.5 KG.
BE CAREFUL AND ALWAYS USE BOTH HANDS TO MANIPULATE THE ADS
COMPUTER.
NOTICE
When handling electronic parts, take precautions against damage by ESD
(electro-static discharge).
use for example an anti-static mat and an ESD strap.
206 9 Job Card IST A006 - ADS RAM upgrade

9.4 Procedure
9.4.1 Remove the Z400 from the Control Station
WARNING
THE ADS COMPUTER IS APPROXIMATELY 13.5 KG.
BE CAREFUL AND ALWAYS USE BOTH HANDS TO MANIPULATE THE ADS
COMPUTER.
1. Remove the Z400 unit from the Control Station following the procedure described in the
Disassembly/Reassembly of AWS Unit on V4 Control Stations section of Job Card D/R
A311 - AWS Unit in the Core SIP.
9.4.2 Accessing the motherboard
1. Gently lay the system horizontally on a stable, nonslip surface.
2. To open the AWS unit, proceed as described below:
a. Pull out and hold the access panel release latch (see A in Illustration 5-9).
Illustration 5-9: Opening the ADS computer
b. Slide the access panel back about 3 centimeters (see Illustration 5-9) and lift the
panel away from the chassis (see Illustration 5-9).
The motherboard is hidden by the airflow guide, outlined in Illustration 5-10.

Illustration 5-10: Z400 open with airflow guide
NOTICE
The airflow guide can be difficult to remove. Be careful not to disconnect anything
when you pull on it.
3. Press the airflow guide release latches as shown in the following illustration, and guide the
airflow guide out of the chassis.
4. Locate the RAM sockets on the motherboard

9.4.3 Installing the new RAM

Illustration 5-11: RAM sockets
1. Remove the RAM present in the socket 1 (see Illustration 5-11), following the steps below:
a. Place your forefingers on the top of the RAM module.
b. Remove the module by pressing down gently on the ejector bars at both ends of the
socket as illustrated in

Illustration 5-12: Removing a RAM module
2. Insert the two new RAM modules in the sockets 1 and 3 (see Illustration 5-11), following the
steps below:
NOTE: The sockets in which the new RAM modules are inserted are both black.
a. Push gently outward on the socket levers.
Illustration 5-13: Inserting a RAM module
NOTICE
RAM modules and their sockets are keyed for proper installation. To prevent
socket or module damage, align these guides.
b. Align the RAM module with the socket and seat it in firmly.
The levers snap back into position and lock the module into place.
NOTE: The module must be inserted evenly, straight down along the
socket until they are locked into place.
9.4.4 Reassemble the AWS unit
1. Reinsert the airflow guide.
Press the airflow guide down on it until you hear the latches set in their socket.
2. Close the AWS unit side panel.
3. Reinstall the AWS unit in the Control Station following the steps described in Job Card D/R
4. Reinstall the Control Station Covers following the procedure described in Job Card PHY
A040 - Remove/Reinstall Control Station Covers in the Core SIP.

9.4.5 Reconfiguring the System Memory

1. Place the Z400 unit in the Control Station following the procedure described in the
Disassembly/Reassembly of AWS Unit on V4 Control Stations section of Job Card D/R
2. Power on the system and press repeatedly the <F10> key.
The BIOS Setup is displayed.
Illustration 5-14: Z400 BIOS Home page
3. Press the <Return> key.

The System Information page is displayed.

Illustration 5-15: Z400 BIOS System Information page
4. Check that the value displayed next to Memory Size (Total) is 4096 MB DDR3/1066MHz
(4096 MB).
• If the displayed value is not 4096 MB DDR3/1066MHz (4096 MB) check the
positioning and seating of the new RAM modules, and if necessary, reinstall them
according to Section 9.4.3. Then continue with Section 9.4.4 and the steps in this
section.
• If the displayed value is 4096 MB DDR3/1066MHz (4096 MB) proceed with Step
5.
5. Press any key.
The BIOS Home page is displayed.
6. Navigate to File→ Save Changes and Exit, press the <Return> key and confirm.
The BIOS is closed and the system continues booting.
9.5 Finalization

10 Job Card IST A007 - Generator ePROMs Upgrade

Personnel
Requirements

PLCC chip extraction tool 1 - 91729294 -
Mag Stand Simulator 1 - 5376101 -
IDC Application Software - - -
CD-ROM corresponding to
the current software version
of IDC installed on the
system

Generator EPROM B43 1 - 5431223–2 -
Generator Board Label 1 - 96160479 -
10.2.3 Safety
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.

NOTICE
damage by ESD (Electro-Static-Discharge).
NOTICE
New ePROMs may have pins set too far apart. Tighten them smoothly, as shown
below.

For ease of use, switch the Generator - -
Menu into English.
10.3 Procedure
10.3.1 Back up Generator Parameters
1. Check that the system is working normally.
2. Perform a full system backup through the Service Desktop, do not insert any CD-ROM, and
call the backup file gene. Refer to Job Card ELE A052 - Back-up/Restore Procedure in the
Core SIP. This backup is required later in this Job Card when restoring the generator.
10.3.2 ePROMs upgrade
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
214 10 Job Card IST A007 - Generator ePROMs Upgrade

1. Open the circuit breaker at the bottom part of the generator.

NOTE: You can remove the CPU board to make the ePROMs change easier.
2. With the PLCC chip extraction tool, taking care not to damage the components around,
remove slowly from the CPU board the four ePROMs B43, B44, B48 and B49.
3. Remove the X2 jumper for 10 seconds and plug it back into the X2 pins again in horizontal
position.
This action erases the NV RAM content.
NOTICE
If an EPROM is inserted upside down, it will burn out and be permanently
damaged.
NOTICE
Check for damaged pins and correct orientation of the ePROMs, do not refer to
label reading.
NOTICE
The pins of the EPROMS are fragile, handle them carefully.
4. Carefully insert the four following replacement ePROMs in the corresponding sockets
according to the table below.
Socket Part number
B43 5431223–2
B44 5431224–2
B48 5431225–2
B49 5431226–2
Be careful not to insert the ePROMs upside down. Ensure that the small notch of the
EPROM is above the small notch on the Generator CPU Board. Do not trust label
orientation on the EPROM, as the label could have been stuck upside down.

Each EPROM can be easily inserted by positioning first the lower part of pins and then
press smoothly to get pins into the upper part.
5. When the 4 ePROMs are inserted, stick the Generator label (96160479) on the Generator
CPU Board.
10.3.3 Generator Parameters restore
NOTICE
Verify that you have put back the X2 jumper you removed in Section 10.3.2, Step
3
1. Close the circuit breaker.

2. Turn on the system from the X-ray console.
3. If the error E12 Check Sum ERROR appears on the X-ray Console, ignore it as this is
normal.
4. Restore only the Generator parameters as follows:
a. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop. See Launching the Service Desktop
in Chapter 3 System Description of the Core SIP.
b.
From the Service Desktop, click the [Utilities] button .
c. Select System Tools→Restore, and look in the box at the bottom of the screen.
d. Select in left column DMR only.
e. Select in right column the Generator backup called gene and click the [START]
button.
5. Perform a complete shutdown (from AWS) of the system and then power on the system
from the X-ray Console.
6. Check that there is no error message on the X-ray Console.
7. Check that the Generator software version is now V6.70 CMN on the X-ray Console, by
going into SETUP/GENE.
216 10 Job Card IST A007 - Generator ePROMs Upgrade

10.4 Finalization
1. Put back the Generator cabinet front side and top covers (see Job Card PHY A042 -
Remove/Reinstall Generator Covers in the Core SIP).
2. Re-configure the preferred language setting for the Generator according to section 4-2, Set
Language in Job Card ELE A009 - Generator Configuration in the Core SIP.
3. Perform automatic calibration of X-ray tube heater current in large and small focus. Refer to
Job Card CAL A012 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current in the Core SIP. The small focus heater
calibration requires a Mag Stand simulator.
4. Turn on the system from the X-ray Console.
NOTE: At this stage, you normally cannot take X-ray exposures. X-ray exposures are
only possible after you have upgraded the IDC.

11 Job Card IST A008 - Reconstruction Station

Personnel
Requirements
1 Field Engineer Not Applicable 2 hours Not Applicable
11.2 Overview
The Reconstruction Station installation is complex. If you have never installed it; please read the
whole procedure before starting.
Refer to Table 5-5 for an overview of the various steps.
Table 5-5: Reconstruction Station steering guide
Action Job Card or Step references
Apply LOTO to the system. Chapter 1, Job Card LOTO A001 - Lock-Out / Tag-Out (LOTO)
Procedures
Remove Control Station covers Job Card PHY A040 - Remove/Reinstall Control Station Covers
in the Core SIP in the Core SIP
Install the multiplug in the Control Station. Section 11.4.1
Connect the multiplug to the Generator AC supply. Section 11.4.2
Position of the Reconstruction housing Section 11.4.3
Open the Reconstruction housing Section 11.4.4
Route the Reconstruction Station cable harness Section 11.4.5
Insert the Reconstruction computer into housing Section 11.4.6
Connect the Reconstruction computer Section 11.4.7
Ground the Reconstruction Station Section 11.4.8
Reassemble Control Station covers. Job Card PHY A040 - Remove/Reinstall Control Station Covers
in the Core SIP in the Core SIP
The following illustrations summarize the cable connections that need to be made in the
Reconstruction Station and Control Station
• Illustration 5-16 shows the power and data connections made inside the Reconstruction
Station
• Illustration 5-17 shows the data connections made inside the Control Station
• Illustration 5-20 shows the power connections made inside the Control Station
218 11 Job Card IST A008 - Reconstruction Station

Illustration 5-16: Power and Data Connections Inside the Reconstruction Station

Illustration 5-17: Data Connections Inside the V4 Control Station

Illustration 5-18: Data Connections Inside the V5 Control Station — eDione2/ Kontron R2
Configuration

Illustration 5-19: Data Connections Inside the V5 Control Station — eDione3/ Kontron R2
Configuration

Illustration 5-20: Power Connections Inside the V4 Control Station

Illustration 5-21: Power Connections Inside the V5 Control Station


Standard Toolbox 1 - - -
11.3.2 Consumables
Tie wraps 4 - - -

Reconstruction Computer 1 - 5434172 -
Cat 6 Ethernet junction 1 - 5158907 -
Reconstruction Station 1 - 5434171 -
housing
Composed of :
Reconstruction Station 1 - - -
housing
Pin M10x85 4 - - -
Plain washer 4 - - -
Screw CHC M10x80 4 - - -
Square fixation 1 - - -
ADS to Reconstruction 1 When the 5434182 -
Station - Internal network - room layout
short Ethernet cable (W801) allows the
Reconstruction
Station to be
placed behind
the Control
Station.
Composed of :
W801 - Internal network 1 - - -
short cable
W802 - Hospital network 1 - - -
short cable
W805 short ground 1 - - -
cable


Power supply short 1 - - -
cable
Short harness tube 1 - - -
Reconstruction Station long 1 Only in FRU, 5434153 -
cable harness needs to be
ordered, when
the room
layout does
not allow the
Reconstruction
Station to be
placed behind
the Control
Station.
Composed of :
W803 - Internal network 1 - - -
long cable
W804 - Hospital network 1 - - -
long cable
W806 long ground cable 1 - - -
Power supply cable 1 - - -
Harness tube 1 - - -
UPS power supply cable 1 - 5434178 -
Multiplug assembly 1 - 5450032 -
Composed of :
Multiplug 1 - - -
Velcro 25x32 2 - - -
11.3.4 Safety
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.

WARNING
COMPUTER ARE HEAVY.
CAUTION
Risks of pinching fingers in the Reconstruction housing covers.
When closing the housing, keep your hands clear from the covers and edges of
the housing.
CAUTION
Risks of falling.
LOTO is applied on the whole system. - -
11.4 Procedure
11.4.1 Installing the multiplug
In order to power the Reconstruction Station, a multiplug is added to the Control Station.
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
1. Remove the Control Station top cover and omega cover of the Control Station. Refer to the
procedure described in Job Card PHY A040 - Remove/Reinstall Control Station Covers in
the Core SIP.
2. Clean the top of the metal bar located on the side of the ADS (front side of the Control
Station) as shown in Illustration 5-22.

Illustration 5-22: Metal bar on side of Control Station
3. Prepare 2 Velcro gripping bands by putting the Velcro hook bands and the Velcro loop
bands together.
NOTE: The Velcro hook band is the rough part of Velcro gripping bands. The Velcro loop
band is the soft part.
4. Peel the protective sheet off the Velcro loop bands sticking side; stick them on the multiplug
strip as shown in Illustration 5-23.
Illustration 5-23: Velcro gripping bands on multiplug strip
5. Peel the protective sheet off the Velcro hook bands sticking side.
6. Position the multiplug on the metal bar as shown in Illustration 5-24.
Illustration 5-24: Multiplug on metal bar

7. Press the multiplug firmly for 15 seconds.

8. Remove carefully the multiplug to check if the hook side and the loop side separate.
9. Rub each Velcro band so that it is uniformly attached to the metal bar and put the multiplug
back in place.
11.4.2 Connecting the multiplug to the Generator AC supply
The multiplug is powered using the UPS power supply cable, while the UPS is plugged on the
multiplug.
1. Connect the multiplug ground cable to the Control Station ground bar.
Route the multiplug ground cable inside the Control Station so it does not prevent
reassembling the covers.
The ground bar is located at the top of the Control Station on the right-hand side.
2. Unplug the UPS AC input supply cable from the UPS (see Illustration 5-25).
Illustration 5-25: UPS rear panel
3. Plug the UPS AC input supply cable in the multiplug input socket.
NOTE: Remove the multiplug to facilitate the manipulation.
If the UPS AC input supply cable is too long route the excess cable length
under the Control Station lower shelf.
4. Using the supplied UPS power supply cable (5434178), connect a multiplug output to the
UPS input.

Illustration 5-26: UPS Connectivity before and after the use of UPS power supply cable and
multiplug from the upgrade kit
5. Secure the UPS power supply cable to the Control Station with a tie-wrap.
11.4.3 Positioning of the Reconstruction housing
Reference to the orientation of the Reconstruction housing follows these rules:

11.4.3.1 The reconstruction can be placed behind the Control Station

The reconstruction is placed behind the Control Station.
1. Position the Reconstruction housing so the rear cover faces the Control Station.

2. Make sure the Reconstruction housing does not prevent the disassembly-reassembly of the
Control Station Omega cover.
3. Use the Short Harness when connecting the Reconstruction Station to the Control Station.
11.4.3.2 If the reconstruction cannot be placed behind the Control Station
The reconstruction is placed next to the side of the Generator cabinet opposite to the wall.
1. Position the Reconstruction housing so the rear cover faces the Generator.
2. Make sure the Reconstruction Station cable harness can be routed from the Control Station
to the Reconstruction housing location.
3. Use the Long Harness when connecting the Reconstruction Station to the Control Station.
11.4.3.3 Anchoring the Reconstruction housing
There is a template used to mark the location of the anchoring holes. It is stuck in the
Reconstruction housing in the transparent plastic bag, see for guidance on how to open the
Reconstruction housing.
1. Refer to the Chapter 3, Room Layout Planning to position the anchoring inserts in the room.

WARNING
CHECK THAT THERE ARE NO WATER OR ELECTRICAL DUCTS WHERE
YOU DRILL.
REFER TO THE UNDER-FLOOR PLAN LOCALIZING THE WATER AND
ELECTRICAL DUCTS WHICH HAS BEEN DONE DURING THE PRE-
INSTALLATION.
2. Drill the anchoring holes in the floor using the template following the indications given in
Chapter 3, Section 1.6.3, Anchoring to the Floor.
a. Check that the four anchoring hole centers have been correctly marked.
b. Drill the anchoring holes. Drill-bit sizes and hole depths vary according to the bolts
used, see Anchoring to the Floor in the Core SIP - Pre-Installation System
Requirements chapter.
c. Place an insert into each of the anchoring holes.
d. Position the Reconstruction housing.
e. Fix the housing using M10 screws.
11.4.4 Opening the Reconstruction housing
The two side covers of the Reconstruction housing are secured by a screw. The front cover is
secured by a shank inside the Reconstruction housing.
WARNING
EACH REMOVABLE COVER IS INDIVIDUALLY CONNECTED TO THE
GROUND.
DO NOT REMOVE THE ATTACHED GROUND CABLES WHEN REMOVING
THE COVERS.
IF YOU NEED TO REMOVE THE GROUND CABLES, CONNECT THEM BACK.
CAUTION
When closing the housing, keep your hands clear from the covers and the edges
of the housing.
1. To open the side covers use a 2.5 Allen key to remove the screw.
2. To open the front cover follow these steps:
a. Open the right-hand cover.
b. Pull the shank that holds the front cover
The shank is at the top of the housing close to the front cover.

Illustration 5-27: Releasing the front cover.
c. Open the front cover.

11.4.5 Routing the Reconstruction Station cable harness
This section addresses the following problems:
• The system cable harness can enter the Control station by the right-hand side or the left-
hand side.
• The Reconstruction Station cable harness cannot enter by the same side as the main
Control Station harness.
Therefore, depending on which side the system cable harness enters the Control Station, the
steps necessary to route the Reconstruction Station cable harness are different.
CAUTION
Risks of falling.
Run cable harnesses and cables through floor or wall ducting.
1. Run the cable harness from the Reconstruction Station to the Control Station.
2. Check on which side the system cable harness enters the Control Station.
• If the system cable harness enters the Control Station by the left-hand side:
Refer to Section 11.4.5.1
• If the system cable harness enters the Control Station by the right-hand side.:
Refer to Section 11.4.5.2
11.4.5.1 The system cable harness enters the Control Station by the left-hand side
Illustration 5-28 gives you a view from above of the cable harnesses routes from above.

Illustration 5-28: Cable harness routes
1. The cables included in the Reconstruction cable harness are not all routed to the same
location:
a. Route the Reconstruction power supply cable to the multiplug.
Illustration 5-29: Reconstruction power supply cable routed to multiplug
b. Route the 2 Ethernet cables and the ground cable under the ADS shelf so they
emerge on the left-hand side of the Control Station, i.e., on the side of the ADS rear
cover.

Illustration 5-30: Cables routed under ADS shelf
2. Connect the Ground cable included in the Reconstruction Station harness to the Control
Station ground bar.
3. In the Control Station, use the clamp to secure the harness (see Illustration 5-31).
The clamp is too wide to hold the Reconstruction Station harness, use 2 tie-wraps to
secure the harness, see Illustration 5-31

Illustration 5-31: Reconstruction harness in Control Station clamp
4. Inside the Reconstruction housing, route the Reconstructioncable harness as shown in

Illustration 5-32:
a. Cut the tie-wrap that secures the ground cable and secure all the cables with a new
tie-wrap (A in Illustration 5-32).
b. Use the clamp to secure the harness (B in Illustration 5-32).

Illustration 5-32: Cable routing inside the Reconstruction housing on the right-hand
side
11.4.5.2 The system cable harness enters the Control Station by the right-hand side
Illustration 5-33 gives you a view from above of the cable harnesses routes from above.
Illustration 5-33: Cable harness routes
1. In the Reconstruction housing, remove the clamp on the right-hand side (hex socket).
NOTE: Use a socket wrench.

2. Screw it on the other side using the left fixation (hex socket).
3. Route the cable harness inside the Reconstruction housing as shown in Illustration 5-34:
a. Cut the tie-wrap that secures the ground cable and secure all the cables with a new
tie-wrap (A in Illustration 5-34).
b. Use the clamp to secure the harness (B in Illustration 5-34).
NOTE: Excess cable must be stored under the ADS Computer in the
Control Station.

Illustration 5-34: Cable routing inside the Reconstruction housing on the left-hand side
4. The cables included in the Reconstructioncable harness are not all routed to the same
location:
a. Route the Reconstruction power supply cable to the multiplug.
Illustration 5-35: Reconstruction power supply cable routed to multiplug
NOTE: Once the power supply cable is plugged in the multiplug, it is

locked into place. A plugged power supply cable can only be
removed by pressing the red button next to the appropriate socket
in the multiplug.
b. Route the 2 Ethernet cables to the ADS rear cover.
c. Route the ground cable to the Control Station ground bar.
5. Connect the ground cable to the Control Station ground bar.
6. In the control station, use the clamp to secure the harness (see Illustration 5-36).
The clamp is too wide to hold the Reconstruction Station harness, use 2 tie-wraps to
secure the harness, see Illustration 5-36

Illustration 5-36: Control Station clamp
11.4.6 Insert the Reconstruction computer into the housing
CAUTION
When closing the housing, keep your hands clear from the covers and the edges
of the housing.
1. Remove the front and side covers of the housing.
2. Tilt the Reconstruction Station 10-15° toward you.
3. Position the bottom of the Reconstruction computer on the edge of the housing
4. Push the Reconstruction computer in the housing location.
Position the station as shown in Illustration 5-37.
The fan on the Reconstruction computer must be oriented in the same direction as the
fans on the ADS and IDC computers in the Control Station. This ensures they exhaust in
the same direction to avoid feeding heat into their intakes.

When using the long cable harness, put the rear side of the Reconstruction Computer at
the opposite end to where the cable harness enters.
Illustration 5-37: Reconstruction Station in housing
11.4.7 Connecting the Reconstruction computer

Table 5-6 gives you an overview of the Reconstruction station connections, refer to the steps
after the table for detailed instructions:

Table 5-6: Reconstruction computer rear panel connectors
A AC Input
B Power switch
C Ground terminal
D External Ethernet link to Hospital network (Network 1) (W802/
W804)
E Internal Ethernet link to ADS computer (Network 0) (W801/W803)
1. Table 5-7 gives you an overview of the Reconstruction station connections.

Table 5-7: Reconstruction Station connections
Reconstruction comput‐
Reconstruction comput‐
Cable part number Cable name er port Identification in Connected to
er port name
Table 5-6
(For short cable har‐

ness configuration) part N/A
of 5434182 Reconstruction housing
Connected to the Re‐ Control Station ground
to Control Station N/A
(For long cable harness ground cable. construction housing bar.
configuration) part of ground bar.
5434153

ness configuration)
ness configuration) part
Power supply short ca‐
of 5434182
ble A AC Input Multiplug
(For long cable harness (For long cable harness
configuration) part of configuration) Power
5434153 supply long cable

(For short cable har‐ ness configuration)
ness configuration) part ADS to Reconstruction
of 5434182 Station - short Ethernet
cable (W801) Internal Ethernet link to
E ADS Ethernet port
(For long cable harness ADS computer
(For long cable harness configuration) ADS to
configuration) part of Reconstruction Station
5434153 - short Ethernet cable
(W803)

ness configuration) Re‐
construction Station to
Hospital Network -
of 5434182
short Ethernet cable
(W802) External Ethernet link to
D Cat 6 Ethernet junction
(For long cable harness Hospital network
configuration) Recon‐
(For long cable harness
struction Station to
configuration) part of
Hospital Network -
5434153
short Ethernet cable
(W804)

of 5434182 Reconstruction comput‐ Reconstruction housing
C Ground terminal
(For long cable harness er ground cable. ground bar
configuration) part of
5434153
2. Connect the power supply cable included in the Reconstruction Station harness to:
• the Reconstruction Station power supply (A),
• the multiplug.
3. On the Control Station side, secure the Reconstruction power supply cable with a tie wrap.
4. Turn the power switch at the back of the Reconstruction computer (B) to the ON position (I).
5. Connect the W801 (short) or W803 (long) Gigabit Ethernet cable to:

a. the lower Ethernet port of the Reconstruction Station (E in Table 5-6),

b. lower ADS Ethernet port as indicated in Illustration 5-38and Illustration 5-39.
Illustration 5-38: Ethernet port on a Z400 ADS computer

Illustration 5-39: Ethernet port on a Kontron R2 ADS computer
6. Connect the W802 (short) or W804 (long) Gigabit Ethernet cable to:
a. the upper Ethernet port of the Reconstruction Station (D in Table 5-6),
NOTICE
Use the inline Cat 6 Ethernet coupler provided with the option even if there is
already an Ethernet junction present on the system.
The new inline Cat 6 Ethernet coupler supports the Gigabit Ethernet standard
and is required for the option.
b. the inline Cat 6 Ethernet coupler (5158907).
11.4.8 Grounding the Reconstruction Station
The Reconstruction Station and each removable cover of the Reconstruction housing are
connected to the Reconstruction housing Ground bar. The Reconstruction housing is connected
to the Control Station ground bar.
Table 5-8: Reconstruction housing ground bar configuration
Terminal Cable Connected Item

G1 Ground cable in Reconstruc‐ Control Station ground bar
tion Station cable harness.
G2 Already connected to Recon‐ Reconstruction computer
struction housing ground bar.

Terminal Cable Connected Item

G3 Already connected to Recon‐ Left-hand cover
G4 Already connected to Recon‐ Right-hand cover
G5 Already connected to Recon‐ Front cover
1. Connect the ground cable of the cable harness on G1.

2. Connect the ground cable attached to G2 to the ground terminal on the rear cover of the
Reconstruction computer.
3. Connect the cable attached to G3 on the left-hand cover.
4. Connect the cable attached to G4 on the right-hand cover.
5. Connect the cable attached to G5 on the right-hand cover.
11.5 Finalization
If you need to leave the system unattended:
1. Close the front cover.
NOTICE
Do not forget to block the front cover using the shank.
2. Close the side cover

3. Remove LOTO and start the system.
If you can continue working on the system:

1. Leave the Reconstruction housing covers open to facilitate Leakage current and Ground
continuity tests.
2. Do not remove LOTO.

12 Job Card IST A009 - MTD Deflectors

Personnel
Requirements

MTD Table Stand 1 - 5434170 -

Lateral Deflector Set 1 - 5434165 -
Composed of :
Left-hand Deflector 1 - N/A -
Right-hand Deflector 1 - N/A -
Screws 4 - N/A -
12.2.3 Safety
WARNING
OF THE MTD.
CAUTION
Risks of pinching fingers during the insertion of the Motorized Tomosynthesis
Device (MTD).
Slide the MTD onto the rails and push it in place by pressing on its front side until
the locking motor starts. During the automatic locking phase, keep hands away
from the MTD and Image Detector cover.
NOTICE
Use the table stand delivered with option to hold the MTD when performing this
procedure.
Set the table stand on a stable non-slip surface.

12.3 Procedure
1. Set the MTD on the table stand.
2. Slide the deflector in the corresponding slot located at the back of the MTD, see Illustration
5-40
Illustration 5-40: Inserting a MTD deflector
3. Use an allen key to secure the deflector with two of the screws provided in the lateral
deflector set. See illustration below for the screws position.
4. Repeat the operation with the other deflector.

12.4 Finalization
250 12 Job Card IST A009 - MTD Deflectors

13 Job Card IST A010 - Acquisition System Backup

Personnel
Requirements

ADS V56.21 application 1 - 5423076–5 -
software DVD (contained in
ADS V56.21 Software
Backup kit, 5423075–5)
13.2.2 Consumables
None 1 - - -
13.3 Procedure
13.3.1 Update IDC files on the AWS
Do the following to prepare the system for the IDC backup:
• Refer to the Senographe Essential - 13.11–1.1 IDC Software Booklet - 5415906-3-1EN to
update the IDC files.
• NOTICE : In order for the backup of the IDC backup to work, you must use the previous IDC
Application software CD-ROM corresponding to the IDC Software version previously
installed on in the system rather than the 13.11–1.1 version provided in the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis kit.
13.3.2 ADS Backup

Never use the Service Desktop Backup function because it is does not work in upgrade
scenarios where the ADS version changes (as is the case with this upgrade). The Service
Desktop Backup function only works when backing up and restoring on the same ADS version.
1. Manually backup the entire customer configuration using the following Job Cards:
• Chapter 8, Form LBK A001 - System configuration form
• Chapter 8, Form LBK A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual

record sheets
2. Record the Network Interface Card (NIC) settings according to Section 13.3.2.1

3. If the Stereotaxy option exists, back up the needle data. See section Needle Setup in
Chapter 8, Form LBK A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual record
sheets.
13.3.2.1 Query and record the settings of the Network Interface Card (NIC)
The following steps describe how to determine what NIC speed configuration is used to be
compatible hospital network. These steps are undertaken on the ADS computer. However, after
the upgrade, the Reconstruction Station will be connected to the hospital network instead of the
ADS computer. It is still important to perform the steps below, because the Reconstruction
Station external NIC speed configuration will need to match the NIC speed configuration that
was originally used by the ADS computer.
2. Log in as root as follows:
a. At the ADS prompt enter:
su -
b. When requested to specify the root password, enter:
operator (or the customer-specified root password)
3. Get the current auto negotiation mode settings, as follows:
For V2 Control Stations (SB150), enter:
ndd -get /dev/eri adv_autoneg_cap
For V3 Control Stations (U20), enter:

ndd -get /dev/nge0 adv_autoneg_cap
For V4/V5 Control Stations (Z400/R2), enter:

ndd -get /dev/e1000g0 adv_autoneg_cap
If the system is running in auto negotiation mode the command line responds with the
value 1.
NOTE: If autoneg is enabled (value = 1), then go to Step 6.
If the system is not running in auto negotiation mode the command line responds with
the value 0.
4. If auto negotiation mode is disabled (value = 0), additionally get the current link mode
settings, as follows:
ndd -get /dev/eri link_duplex

ndd -get /dev/nge0 link_duplex
For V4/V5 Control Stations (Z400/R2), enter:
252 13 Job Card IST A010 - Acquisition System Backup

ndd -get /dev/e1000g0 link_duplex

If the system is running in full duplex mode the command line responds with the value 2.
If the system is running in half duplex mode the command line responds with the value
1.
5. If auto negotiation mode is disabled, additionally get the current link speed settings, by
entering:
ndd -get /dev/eri link_speed

ndd -get /dev/nge0 link_speed
For V4 Control Stations (Z400), enter:

ndd -get /dev/e1000g0 link_speed
If the system is running at 1000 mbit/s the command line responds with the value 1000.
NOTE: If auto negotiate is disabled you will need to restore these network speed and
mode settings on the Reconstruction Computer because the Reconstruction
Computer is the new interface to the hospital network.
6. Record the speed settings of the NIC in the following table.
NIC Parameter Value
Auto-negotiation enabled (1) or disabled (0)
If auto-negotiation is disabled :
Full Duplex (2) or Half Duplex (1)
If auto-negotiation is disabled :
Maximum Speed (1000 Mbit/s (1000), 100 Mbit/s
(100) or 10 Mbit/s (10))
7. Exit as root user, by entering:
exit
exit
13.3.2.2 Manually Backup System Options
1. From the Service Desktop Homepage, check whether the CESM option is enabled, and
update Chapter 8, Section 2.2, CESM Option in Chapter 8, LBK-A001 - System
configuration form accordingly.

2. Check and note down the current PV/PVi setting. For more information, see the section
“Image Process” in Chapter 8, LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters
manual record sheets.
13.3.3 IDC Backup
Since the IDC backup remains on the ADS Computer, the IDC backup is only possible if you are
upgrading a system that already has a V4 or V5 Control Station with the Kontron R2 ADS
Computer. If you are upgrading a system from a V1/V2/V3 to a V5 Control Station then the IDC
backup can be ignored and you will need to perform a complete detector calibration. If you
already have a V4 or V5 Control Station then perform the backup using the Service Desktop.
1. Perform a full system backup (but do not put any CD-ROM) through the Service Desktop,
and call the backup tomo. Refer to Job Card ELE A052 - Back Up/Restore.
NOTE: This backup is required later on when restoring IDC parameters only on system
upgrades where the V4 Control Station with the Z400 ADS Computer or V5 Control
Station with the Kontron R2 ADS Computer already existed.
2. If the backup does not work, verify that IDC is fully calibrated, as a partial backup is not
possible.
13.4 Finalization
254 13 Job Card IST A010 - Acquisition System Backup

14 Job Card IST A011 - Gantry Components Software Update

Personnel
Requirements

Gantry Software CD-ROM 1 - 5174994-15 -
14.2.2 Safety
NOTE: Before upgrading Rotation board software, place the system at 0° and high enough to
perform a rotation to 185°.
Update the HC12 software. Reboot the system, it can reboot itself several times.
Do not rotate or lift the system at this step.
Update the DSP software. Reboot the system, it can reboot itself several times.
Enter in calibration mode.
NOTE: Before upgrading Lift board software, ensure that the system is at the lower lift
position.
Update the HC12 software. Reboot the system, it can reboot itself several times.
Do not rotate/lift the system at this step.
Update the DSP software. Reboot the system, it can reboot itself several times.
Enter in calibration mode.
14.3 Procedure
1. Compare the software versions of the Gantry boards from the Service Desktop and from
Table 1 of the Senographe Essential — Updating Gantry Software & Firmware, 5415905-
X-1EN.
2. As required, use the Senographe Essential — Updating Gantry Software & Firmware,
5415905-X-1EN to upgrade the Gantry boards so that their versions match those quoted in
Table 1 of the Senographe Essential — Updating Gantry Software & Firmware, 5415905-
X-1EN.
14.4 Finalization

15 Job Card IST A012 - IDC Software Upgrade

Personnel
Requirements

IDC v13.11–1.1 Software 1 - 5423031–3 -
backup kit - Senographe
Essential, containing IDC
v13.11–1.1 Application
Software CD-ROM
(5423036–3), IDC CTT
Linux 4.5.6-1 Operating
System (5445571), IDC
Helios 6.3.1 Operating
System (5506896), and
Senographe Essential -
13.11–1.1 IDC Software
Booklet (5415906-3-1EN)
15.2.2 Safety
NOTICE
Ensure you use the IDC Software provided with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit
as indicated above and NOT the IDC Software that is currently supplied with the
Core System.
Obtain current detector ID. - -
Ensure that an update of the IDC files on - -
the AWS has been performed.
Remove the Control Station covers for Job Card PHY A040 - Remove/ -
access to the IDC. Reinstall Control Station
Covers in the SIP
256 15 Job Card IST A012 - IDC Software Upgrade

15.3 Procedure
15.3.1 Install the Operating System and IDC application software (35 minutes)
Refer to the Senographe Essential - 13.11–1.1 IDC Software Booklet - 5415906-3-1EN to Install
the IDC Operating System and IDC Application Software. The IDC OS depends on the type of
eDione, seeTable 5-9
Table 5-9: eDione Types, OS and Application Software Versions
eDione Type OS Version and CD P/N Application Software Version and CD P/N
eDione 1 CTT 4.5.6-1 (5445571) 13.11–1.1 (5423036-3)
eDione 2 Helios 6.3.1 (5506896)

eDione 3
15.3.2 Update IDC Files

Do the following:
• NOTICE :For the restore of the IDC backup to work, you must use the previous IDC
Application software CD-ROM corresponding to the IDC Software version previously
installed on in the system rather than the 13.11–1.1 version provided in the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis kit.
15.3.3 Restore IDC Configuration

15.3.3.1 For upgraded systems that had the V1/V2, or V3 Control Station (with SB150 or U20
computer)
For systems that had the V1/V2, or V3 Control Station (with SB150 or U20 computer) before the
upgrade, you cannot restore the IDC configuration from a system backup because the ADS
Computer (which hosts the system backup) has changed. You must re-calibrate the detector
after the ADS Computer is upgraded. To re-calibrate the detector, see Job Card IST A012b -
Detector Calibration (for new systems and those just field upgraded to Accelera).
15.3.3.2 For upgraded systems that already had the V4 Control Station (with Z400 computer) or
V5 Control Station (with Kontron R2 computer)
For systems that already had the V4 Control Station (with Z400 computer) or V5 Control Station
(with Kontron R2 computer) before the upgrade, you can restore the IDC configuration from the
system backup made during the backup phase before updating the ADS Computer. To do
restore the IDC calibrations, see Job Card IST A012a - IDC Calibration Restore
15.4 Finalization

16 Job Card IST A012a - IDC Calibration Restore

Personnel
Requirements
16.2 Overview
This Job Card is only applicable for Scenario A (i.e. IB systems that already had the V4 or V5
Control Station).
IDC v13.11–1.1 Software has been loaded Job Card IST A012 - IDC -
on the IDC Computer Software Upgrade
16.4 Procedure
from the Xray Console.
NOTE: Ignore any error messages on the X-ray Console at this stage (e.g. S62 Image
Detection Problem) as they are normal. These error messages will not appear after
the IDC configuration has been restored.
2. Restore only the IDC calibration as follows:
a. From the browser, click the Tools Menu button and then click Service Desktop to
launch the Service Desktop.
b. From the Service Desktop, click the Utilities button.
c. Select System Tools > Restore, and look in the box at the bottom left of the screen.
d. Select in left column: IDC only.
e. Select in right column the IDC backup called tomo and click the START button.
from the X-ray Console.
Leave the Control Station covers off at this stage as you will also need access to the
ADS Computer later on during the upgrade.
16.5 Finalization
258 16 Job Card IST A012a - IDC Calibration Restore

17 Job Card IST A012b - Detector Calibration (for new systems and those just
field upgraded to Accelera)
Personnel
Requirements

IDC v13.11–1.1 Software has been loaded Job Card IST A012 - IDC -
on the IDC Computer Software Upgrade
ADS V56.21 Software has been loaded on Job Card IST A013 - AWS -
the ADS Computer Software Installation
ADS Computer Configuration has been Job Card IST A014a - AWS -
restored or configured Configuration Restore
- - -
17.3 Procedure
1. For systems that had the V1/V2, or V3 Control Station (with SB150 or U20 computer) before
the upgrade, you cannot not restore the IDC configuration from a system backup because
the ADS Computer (which hosts the system backup) has changed. Also, for new non-IB
systems that are being installed at the same time as the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option,
there is no previous IDC backup. Use the steps defined Table 5-10 to manually re-configure
the IDC configuration.
Table 5-10: Steps required to re-configure the IDC configuration
Calibrations - Checks Job Card
If Collimation Check not OK, repeat Collimator Calibration.
Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 - Bad Pixel Calibration in the Core SIP
Gain Calibration Job Card CAL A043 - Detector Gain Calibration
Flat Field Tests Job Card ELE A032 – IQ Tools Flat Field Test in the Core SIP
If IQ Tests not OK, repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel.
Conversion Factor Job Card CAL A045 - Conversion Factor Measurement in the Core SIP
AOP: Automatic Optimization of Parameters
mAs non linearity Job Card CAL A053 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration in the Core SIP
AOP Calibration Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration in the Core SIP
AOP/SNR Check Job Card ELE A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check in the Core SIP
If AOP/SNR Test not OK, repeat all calibrations from AOP Calibration.

17.4 Finalization
260 17 Job Card IST A012b - Detector Calibration (for new

systems and those just field upgraded to Accelera)
18 Job Card IST A012c - Configure Detector

Personnel
Requirements

IDC v13.11–1.1 Software 1 - 5423031–3 -
Software CD-ROM
(5423036-3), IDC CTT Linux
4.5.6-1 Operating System
(5445571), IDC Helios 6.3.1
Operating System
(5506896), and Senographe
Essential - 13.11–1.1 IDC
Software Booklet
(5415906-3-1EN)
LFOV Mammo Detector 1 - - -
Manufacturing Data CD-
ROM

The IDC software has been upgraded to - -
13.11–1.1 and in the scenarios concerning
IB systems that did not have an Accelera
upgrade the IDC configuration was also
restored.
18.3 Procedure
18.3.1 Update IDC Files
Do the following:

• NOTICE : In order for the load detector parameters to work, you must ensure you use the
IDC v13.11–1.1 Application Software CD-ROM (5423036-3) from the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis Kit.
18.3.2 Load Detector Parameters

Refer to the Senographe Essential - 13.11–1.1 IDC Software Booklet - 5415906-3-1EN to load
the detector parameters.
18.3.3 Load Detector Firmware (pre-LFOV2 systems only)
• The following procedure to load the Detector firmware onto the Detector is only necessary
for pre-LFOV2 systems with the LFOV Detector.
Systems that have an LFOV2 detector, can be identified by the earth bar on the BSLM Plate
as indicated below.
• The GE Breast Tomosynthesis version of Essential IDC software has a new Detector
firmware version that was introduced for LFOV2 Detectors. For the system to operate, the
IDC and Detector must both have the same Detector firmware version. The IDC checks the
Detector firmware, and if the Detector firmware on the Detector is not the same as the
Detector firmware on the IDC, the IDC requests the Detector Power Supply (DPS) to cut the
power to the Detector, and a Detector Firmware Mismatch error is raised. Detectors on the
pre-LFOV2 systems will have a different (older) version of the Detector firmware that is
supplied with the Essential IDC software in the Tomo Kit. Therefore, on pre-LFOV2 systems,
you must perform the following steps to load the Detector firmware on the LFOV detector.
1. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop.

2. From the Service Desktop, click the Utilities button.
3. On the Utilities page, under Workstation Tools, click Detector FW Install.
4. Select the Loader Firmware radio button and click the START button.
5. Once a message appears suggesting the Loader Firmware process is complete reboot the
Senographe system by pressing OFF/ON on the X-ray Console.
6. Once the system reboots, re-launch the Service Desktop.
262 18 Job Card IST A012c - Configure Detector

8. On the Utilities page, under Workstation Tools, click Detector FW Install.

9. Select the Application FW radio button and click the START button.
10. Once a message appears suggesting the Loader Firmware process is complete reboot the
Senographe system by pressing OFF/ON on the X-ray Console.
18.4 Finalization

19 Job Card IST A013 - AWS Software Installation

Personnel
Requirements

ADS V56.21 Software 1 - 5423075–5 -
Backup Kit, containing ADS
V56.21 Application Software
DVD (5423076–5), ADS
Solaris 10 Operating
System V6.12.3 DVD
(5538884), and AWS S/W
Installation Guide Booklet
(5415904-5-1EN)
IDC v13.11–1.1 Software 1 - 5423031–3 -
Software CD-ROM
(5423036–3), IDC CTT
Linux 4.5.6-1 Operating
System (5445571), IDC
Helios 6.3.1 Operating
System (5506896), and
Senographe Essential -
13.11–1.1 IDC Software
Booklet (5415906-3-1EN)
19.2.2 Safety
CAUTION
Installing from scratch will ERASE all data on the system. Before starting, ensure
all images have been safely backed-up or archived.
Manually backup all the AWS parameters by noting down all of the AWS
parameters as indicated in Chapter 8, Form LBK A001 - System configuration
form, Chapter 8, LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters
manual record sheets and Job Card IST A010 - Acquisition System Backup.
264 19 Job Card IST A013 - AWS Software Installation

NOTICE
The software from the Accelera Kit can be discarded. If you had to use the
Accelera Upgrade Kit during the upgrade, do not use the ADS Software delivered
in the Accelera Upgrade Kit.
NOTICE
Ensure you use the ADS Software provided with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis
kit as indicated above and NOT the ADS Software that is currently supplied with
the Core System.
NOTE: In case of typo error, you can use arrow keys to correct any typing mistakes.
The AWS customer parameters (including Chapter 8, Form LBK A001 - -
network information) have been saved System Configuration Form
according to the instructions provided in
Chapter 8, Form LBK A001 - System
configuration form, Chapter 8, LBK-A003 -
Back-up/restore procedure - AWS
parameters manual record sheets and Job
Card IST A010 - Acquisition System
Backup.
- - -
- - -
All images present on the workstation are - -
archived in a safe place.
The IDC software has been upgraded to - -
13.11–1.1 and in the scenarios concerning
IB systems that did not have an Accelera
upgrade the IDC configuration was also
restored.
19.3 Procedure
19.3.1 ADS Installation From Scratch
• Perform an ADS installation from scratch according to the instructions described in the
section INSTALL FROM SCRATCH of the AWS S/W Installation Guide Booklet
(5415904-5-1EN), which is delivered with the ADS V56.21 application software DVD
provided in the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Software kit.
• NOTE : when updating IDC files as instructed in the AWS S/W Installation Guide Booklet
(5415904-5-1EN), ensure you use the IDC v13.11–1.1 Application Software CD-ROM
(5423036-3) from the GE Breast Tomosynthesis Kit.

19.3.2 Verifying ADS installation Success

Verify the ADS installation was successful according to the instructions described in the section
VERIFY INSTALLATION of the AWS S/W Installation Guide Booklet (5415904-5-1EN), which is
delivered with the ADS V56.21 application software DVD provided in the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis Software kit.
19.4 Finalization
266 19 Job Card IST A013 - AWS Software Installation

20 Job Card IST A013a – Collimator Check Script Installation

Personnel
Requirements
20.2 Overview
The CollimatorDBTCheck.sh file is delivered on a CD-ROM. It is a self installing script file
(i.e. running from the CD-ROM will install it on the ADS Computer), that once installed on the
ADS Computer can be used to check whether the Collimator is compatible with the GE Breast
Gantry Software CD-ROM 1 - 5174994-15 -

ADS Software has been upgraded on the Job Card IST A013 - AWS -
system. Software Installation
20.4 Procedure
1. Insert the Gantry Software CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive of the ADS Computer.
2. Right mouse click the Browser background, and from the Root menu that appears, select
Service Tools→ Command window.
3. Mount the DVD-ROM drive, by entering:
cdromMount
su –
5. Change to ADSscripts directory of the Gantry Software CD-ROM, by entering:
cd /cdrom/cdrom0/adsscripts
6. Execute the CollimatorDBTCheck.sh file by entering:
./CollimatorDBTCheck.sh

7. The CollimatorDBTCheck.sh file will automatically install itself in the /export/

home/sdc/senovision/scripts/ directory on the ADS Computer. Once it has finished
installing itself, the following message appears:
Collimator Check Script file successfully copied to /export/
home/sdc/senovision/scripts.
Continue execution.
8. Go to the root folder to free the DVD-ROM drive, by entering:
cd /
9. Logout as root user, by entering:
exit
10. Unmount the DVD-ROM drive, by entering:
cdromEject
11. Remove the Gantry Software CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive of the ADS Computer.
exit
13. Reboot the system.
20.5 Finalization
268 20 Job Card IST A013a - Collimator Check Script

Installation
21 Job Card IST A014 - Create RSA Key and Update ADS Hostname
Personnel
Requirements

The ADS Software has been upgraded. - -
The Reconstruction Station has been - -
installed.
The ADS Computer and Reconstruction - -
Computer are connected and the system
powered on.
21.3 Procedure
21.3.1 Ensure that the Reconstruction Computer is Powered ON
1. If necessary, power on the system as usual using the X-ray Console.
2. Ensure that the power button on the rear panel of the Reconstruction Computer is in the ON
(I) position.
3. Power on manually the Reconstruction Computer by pressing the power button on the front
panel of the Reconstruction Computer.
Once the Reconstruction Computer is powered on the PWR LED on the Reconstruction
Computer front panel illuminates green.
NOTE: Other LEDs on the Reconstruction Computer front panel can be on when the
Reconstruction Computer is powered off. Therefore, to be sure the
Reconstruction Computer is powered on, ensure that the PWR LED on the
Reconstruction Computer front panel illuminates green.
21.3.2 Create RSA Key and Update ADS Hostname
1. From behind the Browser, right click on the background, and from the Root menu, select
Service Tools > Command window.
2. Login as root user by entering:
su –
At the password: prompt, enter:
3. Change to the /export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts/ directory, by entering:
cd /export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts/

4. Create an RSA key on the ADS Computer so that it can securely communicate with the
Reconstruction Computer, by entering:
./createadsrsakey.sh
5. At the password: prompt, enter:
M0n!AgneU
6. Execute the SetNewHostname.sh script, by entering:
./SetNewHostname.sh –u <ADS hostname>
Where <ADS hostname> is the current ADS Hostname (given in the ADS Command
Line prompt).
7. Once the script completes, logout as root user, by entering:
exit
exit
21.4 Finalization
270 21 Job Card IST A014 - Create RSA Key and Update
ADS Hostname
22 Job Card IST A014a - AWS Configuration Restore

Personnel
Requirements
1 Not Applicable 60 minutes (or more) Not Applicable
for Core Essential
System (For options:
varies, depending on
number of system
options to connect to
the Senographe
Essential.)
22.2 Overview
Manually restore the AWS configuration as described in the Procedure below.
ADS V56.21 application 1 - 5423076–5 -
software DVD (contained in
ADS V56.21 Software
Backup kit, 5423075–5)
22.4 Procedure
22.4.1 Restore ADS configuration parameters
• Reload the customer's configuration by performing the Job Cards summarized in the
steering guide below. When performing these Job Cards, refer to the customer's parameters
and preferences that you previously noted down in the forms below:
○ Chapter 8, LBK-A001 - System Configuration Form

○ Chapter 8, Form LBK A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual
record sheets
Table 5-11: ADS manual restore steering guide
Step Action Job Card Done
1 AWS configuration Job Card ELE A013 - AWS Configuration

in the Core SIP
2 Network connection and configuration Job Card ELE A021 — External Network Configuration
in this Service Manual

3 Optionally change the internal IP ad‐ If the original pre-upgrade system had a different inter‐
dress of the Senographe system nal IP address scheme due to a conflict with the hospi‐
tal network, restore the upgraded systems internal IP
address scheme on the first internal network (INT1),
then perform Job Card ELE A055a - Changing Internal
IP Addressing (INT1) in this Service Manual.
If the original pre-upgrade system did not have differ‐
ent internal IP address scheme because there was no
conflict with the hospital network, but the upgraded
systems second internal IP address scheme (INT2)
now conflicts with the hospital network, change the IP
address scheme on the second internal network
(INT2), then perform Job Card ELE A055b - Changing
Internal IP Addressing (INT2) in this Service Manual.
4 Declare Network Hosts Job Card ELE A022 - Declare Network Hosts
in the Core SIP
5 Declare Worklist Hosts Job Card ELE A023 - Declare Worklist Hosts
in the Core SIP
NOTE: From ADS 56.10 delivered with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option, the AE ti‐
tle used for worklist no longer includes
WL_ and keeps letter case. Therefore,
you must either contact the hospital net‐
work administrator in order to update the
DICOM configuration of the Senographe
System or modify the AE title used for
the worklist on the Senographe System.
For more information, see Job Card ELE
A022 – Worklist AE Title Configuration.
6 Declare Performed Procedure Step Job Card ELEA024 - Declare Performed Procedure
Hosts Step Hosts
in the Core SIP
7 Declare Printers Job Card ELE A020 - Declare and Set Printers
in the Core SIP
8 Change the AOP Configuration Job Card ELE A031 - AOP Configuration
in the Core SIP
22.4.2 Post-restore tasks

1. Reconnect the Control Station of the Senographe System to the hospital network.
2. Reinstall system options
System options to be connected to the Senographe can include: Review workstation,
CAD, Mass archiving system, Laser Camera, Networking. Refer to the corresponding
Service Manual to re-install each option.
3. Optional Repeat and Reject analysis configuration
If required by the customer, use Job Card ELE A067 - Repeat and Reject Analysis
Configuration in the Core SIP to install to configure Repeat and Rejection analysis.
4. Option Bar Code scanner configuration
If the customer has the Bar Code Scanner option, use Job Card ELE A042 - Bar Code
Scanner (Option) in the Core SIP to configure the Bar Code Scanner.
5. If the CESM option exists, re-activate the CESM option by performing Job Card UPG A011 -
Activating the CESM Feature in Contrast Enhanced Spectral Mammography SIP.
272 22 Job Card IST A014a - AWS Configuration Restore

6. Restart system
Shutdown completely the system using the button at the right bottom side of the browser
(a Restart Browser is not sufficient). Start the system again from the X-ray Console.
22.5 Finalization

23 Job Card IST A014b - AWS Configuration

Personnel
Requirements
1 Not Applicable 3 hours Not Applicable
23.2 Procedure
23.2.1 Restore Tasks
1. Manually configure the AWS configuration as described in Table 5-12.
Table 5-12: ADS manual restore steering guide
1 AWS configuration Job Card ELE A013 - AWS Configuration

in the Core SIP
2 Network connection and configura‐ Job Card ELE A021 – External Network Configura‐
tion tion in this Service Manual
3 Optionally change the internal IP ad‐ If the original pre-upgrade system had a different in‐
dress of the Senographe system ternal IP address scheme due to a conflict with the
hospital network, restore the upgraded systems in‐
ternal IP address scheme on the first internal net‐
work (INT1), then perform Job Card ELE A055a -
Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT1) in this Serv‐
ice Manual.
If the original pre-upgrade system did not have differ‐
ent internal IP address scheme because there was
no conflict with the hospital network, but the upgrad‐
ed systems second internal IP address scheme
(INT2) now conflicts with the hospital network,
change the IP address scheme on the second inter‐
nal network (INT2), then perform Job Card ELE
A055b - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT2) in
this Service Manual.
4 Declare Network Hosts Job Card ELE A022 - Declare Network Hosts
in the Core SIP
5 Declare Worklist Hosts Job Card ELE A023 - Declare Worklist Hosts in the
Core SIP
NOTE: From ADS 56.10 delivered with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option, the AE
title used for worklist no longer in‐
cludes WL_ and keeps letter case.
Therefore, you must either contact the
hospital network administrator in order
to update the DICOM configuration of
the Senographe System or modify the
AE title used for the worklist on the Se‐
nographe System. For more informa‐
tion, see Job Card ELE A022 – Work‐
list AE Title Configuration.
6 Declare Performed Procedure Step Job Card ELEA024 - Declare Performed Procedure
Hosts Step Hosts
in the Core SIP
274 23 Job Card IST A014b - AWS Configuration

7 Declare Printers Job Card ELE A020 - Declare and Set Printers
in the Core SIP
8 Change the AOP Configuration Job Card ELE A031 - AOP Configuration
in the Core SIP
23.2.2 Post-restore Tasks

1. Reconnect the Control Station of the Senographe System to the hospital network.
2. Reinstall system options
System options to be connected to the Senographe can include: Review workstation,
CAD, Mass archiving system, Laser Camera, Networking. Refer to the corresponding
Service Manual to re-install each option.
3. Optional Repeat and Reject analysis configuration
If required by the customer, use Job Card ELE A067 - Repeat and Reject Analysis
Configuration in the Core SIP to install to configure Repeat and Rejection analysis.
4. Option Bar Code scanner configuration
If the customer has the Bar Code Scanner option, use Job Card ELE A042 - Bar Code
Scanner (Option) in the Core SIP to configure the Bar Code Scanner.
5. If the CESM option exists, re-activate the CESM option by performing Job Card UPG A011 -
Activating the CESM Feature in Contrast Enhanced Spectral Mammography SIP.
6. Restart system
Shutdown completely the system using the button at the right bottom side of the browser
(a Restart Browser is not sufficient). Start the system again from the X-ray Console.
23.3 Finalization

24 Job Card IST A015 – MTD Unique ID Declaration

Personnel
Requirements
24.2 Overview
Many physical and mechanical properties of the components that make an MTD are unique to
each MTD. Therefore, each MTD has a unique ID (UID) so that the MTD related calibrations are
tied to a particular MTD. The UID of the MTD must be declared on the system so that it can be
used with the system. Once the UID of the MTD is declared, the other parts of the system
(Gantry, ADS and IDC) accept the MTD and it can then be calibrated.
Accepting a UID erases all existing MTD gain calibrations.
MTD supplied with the GE 1 - - -
Breast Tomosynthesis Kit

The Gantry and Control Station have been - -
upgraded to support the GE Breast
24.4 Procedure
1. Insert the MTD on the detector.
2. Launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, Section 5.2.1, Launching the Service Desktop).
3. From the Service Desktop, click the [Calibration] button.
4. From the Calibration page that appears, click the [Positioner] button.
5. From the Positioner page that appears, click the [Accept Uid] button.
6. From the right hand side Positioner page that updates, do the following:
a. Click the [START] button.
b. Click the [Accept Uid] button.
c. Click the [OK] button.
7. Reboot the system for the changes to take effect.
276 24 Job Card IST A015 - MTD Unique ID Declaration

NOTE: A system reboot is required in order to update the IDC with the MTD UID, and
thus properly link the gain calibrations stored on the IDC with the correct MTD
UID.
24.5 Finalization

25 Job Card IST A016 - Provide Documentation

Personnel
Requirements

User Publication CD-ROM 1 - 5415908-X-299 -
for GE Breast
Tomosynthesis (contained
in Set of Technical
Publications for GE Breast
Tomosynthesis)
Service Publication CD- 1 - 5415909-X-2EN -
ROM for GE Breast
Tomosynthesis (contained
in Set of Technical
Publications for GE Breast
Tomosynthesis)
25.3 Procedure
25.3.1 User and Service Technical Publications
1. Because the ADS software was updated, use Job Card ELE A044 - Install User Publications
in the Core SIP to install the Core System embedded publications from the Core System
User Publication CD-ROM (non-GE Breast Tomosynthesis), onto the ADS Computer. Use
the Core System User Publication CD-ROM (non-GE Breast Tomosynthesis) (5308756-
X-299).
NOTE: If during the GE Breast Tomosynthesis upgrade you also performed an
Accelera upgrade to change the Control Station, ensure that you use the Core
System User Publication CD-ROM documentation supplied with the Accelera
kit.
2. Use Job Card ELE A044 - Install User Publications in the Core SIP to install the embedded
publications from the User Publication CD-ROM for GE Breast Tomosynthesis (5415908-
X-299) onto the ADS Computer.
3. If the system also has the CESM option, use Job Card ELE A044 - Install User Publications
in the SIP to install the embedded publications from the User Publication CD-ROM for
CESM (5391282-X-299) (where X = 3 or greater) onto the ADS Computer.
4. Restart the Browser.
278 25 Job Card IST A016 - Provide Documentation

5. Take time now or plan time later to describe to the customer that the GE Breast
Tomosynthesis related User Publications are accessible on the Senographe System, and
also from the User Publication CD-ROM for GE Breast Tomosynthesis (5415908-X-299)
(where X = 5 or greater) itself.
6. If the system also has the CESM option, inform the customer that the Addendum to the
CESM Quality Manual is intended for the Radiologic Technologists (5589611–X-1EN).
7. Also, leave the Service Publication CD-ROM for GE Breast Tomosynthesis (5415909-
X-2EN) (where X = 4 or greater) on site along with all the other GE Breast Tomosynthesis
Technical Publications.
NOTE: The GE Breast Tomosynthesis kit also includes the Senographe Essential and
Senographe DS: software release connectivity supplement. For pre-Sunburst
systems that have not received FMI12166, make the customer aware of the
Senographe Essential and Senographe DS: software release connectivity
supplement, and explain to them that the ADS version supplied with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis kit also fully supports the IHE Mammography Image
profile as described in the Senographe Essential and Senographe DS:
software release connectivity supplement.
25.3.2 Other Technical Publications
1. If during the GE Breast Tomosynthesis upgrade you also performed an Accelera upgrade to
change the Control Station, ensure that you leave the documentation supplied with the
Accelera upgrade on-site, and scrap the old documentation that was replaced by the new
documentation in the Accelera kit.
2. If during the GE Breast Tomosynthesis upgrade you also performed an Essential Hardware
upgrade for SenoClaire to improve gantry reliability, ensure that you leave the
documentation supplied with the Essential Hardware upgrade for SenoClaire on-site.
3. If the customer previously did not have embedded technical publications, inform them that
the User Manuals are embedded on the Control Station and also available on the User
Publications CD-ROM.
25.4 Finalization

26 Job Card IST A017 - Send Localization Card and Send Completion Report
Personnel
Requirements

Product Locator Card for 1 - 5434135–XTRA -
Digital Breast
TomoSynthesis Option
Product Locator for the MTD 1 - 5461187TRA -
26.3 Procedure
1. Send Localization Card for the Digital Breast TomoSynthesis Option.
Complete the Product Locator Card (5434135–XTRA) and update the Global Install
Base (GIB) database accordingly.
NOTE: The labels for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option are already on the
Reconstruction Station, so no additional labels need to be stuck elsewhere on
the Senographe system.
2. Send Localization Card for the MTD.
Complete the Product Locator Card (5461187TRA) and update the Global Install Base
(GIB) database accordingly.
NOTE: If you are upgrading a system using the Accelera Kit, make sure you also
perform Job Card UPG A030 - Upgrade Labeling and Send Localization Card
from the Accelera Kit IM.
NOTE: If you are upgrading a system using the Essential Hardware Upgrade kit for
SenoClaire, make sure you also perform Job Card UPG A032 - Upgrade
Labeling and Send Product Locator Card from the Essential Hardware
Upgrade kit for Tomo Installation Manual.
26.4 Finalization
280 26 Job Card IST A017 - Send Localization Card and

Send Completion Report
27 Job Card IST A018 - Image Processing Configuration

Personnel
Requirements
27.2 Overview
The image processing feature delivered with the system is now eContrast, and replaces the
previous Premium View imaging processing.
27.3 Procedure
1. Choose the parameter that was set before the installation or its equivalence, according to
Table 5-13: Equivalence between Premium View and eContrast
Premium View eContrast
PV/Disable (TE/Enable) eContrast 1
PV/Low eContrast 2
PV/Medium eContrast 3
PV/High eContrast 4
None eContrast 5
PVi eContrast 6
2. Explain the following to the customer:

• eContrast is not applied on reconstructed 3D volumes. eContrast is an algorithm for
2D images only that does not apply to reconstructed 3D volumes. The reconstruction
process contains all what is needed to produce reconstructed 3D volumes ready to
be reviewed, without requiring additional post processing such as eContrast.
• eContrast is however temporarily applied in a non-distructive way on the fly when

viewing any of the 9 RAW projections on the ADS Computer.
• eContrast is still applied to 2D images as normal.
27.4 Finalization

28 Job Card IST A019 - Stereotaxy Configuration

Personnel
Requirements

Senographe Essential 1 - 5304972-4-1EN -
Stereotaxy SM - Penduick
SIP-A located on the 1 - 5308755-X-200 -
Service CD-ROM Core
Essential system
28.2.2 Safety
WARNING
THIS JOB CARD MUST ONLY BE PERFORMED BY THE GE HEALTHCARE
FIELD ENGINEER.
BEFORE THE OPERATOR (CUSTOMER) CAN USE STEREOTAXY AFTER

THE PENDUICK UPGRADE:
• THE FIELD ENGINEER MUST PERFORM THE STEPS IN THIS JOB CARD
TO ENABLE THE STEREOTAXY FUNCTIONALITY
• THE OPERATOR (CUSTOMER) MUST HAVE PERFORMED TRAINING

WITH THE MEDICAL APPLICATION SPECIALIST
TO AVOID ANY RISK OF USE, THIS JOB CARD TO ENABLE THE
STEREOTAXY FUNCTIONALITY MUST ONLY BE DONE JUST BEFORE
TRAINING WITH THE MEDICAL APPLICATION SPECIALIST.
28.3 Procedure
1. Perform the Job Cards in the Stereotaxy SM as summarized in the table below.
2. Table describing actions to perform.
Time
(mins)
Job Card IST A003 - AOP Configuration in
1 AOP Configuration 2
the Stereotaxy SM
JC-CAL-A051, section Calibration with Ster‐
2 AOP Calibration eo Configuration in the SIP-A (available on 5
the Service Publications CD-ROM).
282 28 Job Card IST A019 - Stereotaxy Configuration

Job Card IST A005 - Calibration Needle

3 Calibration Needle Setup
Setup in the Stereotaxy SM
Image plane to carbon cov‐ Job Card CAL A002 - Image Plane to Car‐
4 30
er distance calibration bon Cover Distance the Stereotaxy SM
Job Card CHK A001 - Vertical and Lateral
localization accuracy verification - QC Test
5 Vertical approach tests 30
2 - Localization Accuracy - Vertical Ap‐
proach, in the Stereotaxy SM
Job Card CHK A001 - Vertical and Lateral
localization accuracy verification - QC Test
6 Lateral approach tests 15
5 - Localization Accuracy - Lateral Ap‐
proach, in the Stereotaxy SM
The following Job Cards in the SIP-A (avail‐
able on the Service Publications CD-ROM):
7 Functional checks 20
JC-ELE-A015 - Gantry Functional Checks
JC-ELE-A017 - Manual Compression Check
28.4 Finalization

29 Job Card IST A021 - MTD table stand

Personnel
Requirements
29.2 Overview
The MTD table stand is delivered with the following parts:
• 1. Base
• 2. Back support
• 3. Fixation plate
• 4. Four pairs of plastic screws and metal nuts

Standard tool box 1 - - -

MTD table stand 1 - 5434170 -
284 29 Job Card IST A021 - MTD table stand

29.4 Procedure
1. Put the base of the MTD Stand upside down on a table, so that its back edge containing the
four fixation holes are at the edge of the table.
2. Put the fixation plate (1) in place inside the base of the MTD Stand.
3. Put the back support of the MTD Stand (2) against the outside rear edge of the MTD base,
so that the top right holes are aligned.
4. Use one of the supplied plastic screws (3) and nuts (4) to secure the top right fixation hole.
At this stage, only hand tighten the nut.
5. Use the remaining screws (5) and nuts (6) to secure the remaining three fixation holes.

6. Use an 8 mm open ended wrench to tighten each of the nuts so that each of the screws are
secure. Ensure that you only apply enough tension as not to strip the plastic screws.
29.5 Finalization
286 29 Job Card IST A021 - MTD table stand

30 Job Card IST A022 - Upgrade Rotation Board and Rotation Gas Spring
Personnel
Requirements
1 Field Engineer Not Applicable Up to 150 mins (90 for Not Applicable
Rotation Board, 60 for
Rotation Gas Spring)
30.2 Overview
In order for the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option to work, the Gantry needs to contain the
following Rotation-related Gantry parts at the level as specified below.
• Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488–12 or above)
• Precise 50N Rotation Clutch (5481350)
The table below summarizes the forward production systems that were already manufactured
with these parts, and which do not need to be upgraded with that particular part.
Table 5-14: Forward production systems manufactured with GE Breast Tomosynthesis
compatible Rotation-related Gantry parts
Minimum Rotation-related Gantry part required for GE Breast Forward Production System (Model Number)
Tomosynthesis
Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector (2375488– IS4–3 (5144816–3)

12)
3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) Litchi (5144816-6)
50N V2 Rotation Clutch (5481350) CE removal (5144816-13)
NOTE: Systems upgraded with the Stereotaxy Kit will contain the necessary 3000N Rotation
Gas Spring (5154719) and Rotation Board with V2 Rotation Clutch Connector
(2375488–12), but will contain the non-50N V2 Rotation Clutch (2345968–3), which
will need upgrading with the 50N V2 Rotation Clutch (5481350).
If you have a Penduick level or above system (5155816–8 or above), no action is required as
the Rotation Board and Rotation Gas Spring in the Gantry is already at the necessary level.
If you have a pre-Penduick level or below system (5155816–7 or below), follow this Table 5-15
and the appropriate sections in this Job Card to determine whether the Rotation Board and/or
Rotation Gas Spring upgrading.
Table 5-15: Rotation-related Gantry Parts that need changing as a function of Model Number
Forward Production System Model Num‐ Rotation-related Gantry Parts to change Checks and potential upgrade actions to
ber (assuming they have never been changed take
during the system lifetime)

5144816 • Rotation Board with V2 Rotation • Check and if necessary upgrade the
5144816-1-1 Clutch Connector (2375488–13) Rotation Board according to Section
5144816-2-1 30.4.1.
• 3000N Rotation Gas Spring
(5154719) • Check and if necessary upgrade the
Rotation Gas Spring according to
Section 30.4.2.
5144816-3 3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719) Check and if necessary upgrade the Rota‐
5144816-4 tion Gas Spring according to Section
5144816-5 30.4.2.
5144816-6
5144816-6-LE
5144816-7
5144816-7-LE
5144816-8
5144816-8-LE
5144816-9 Nothing – Gantry already at the correct
5144816-9-LE Rotation-related hardware level
5144816-10
5144816-10-LE
5144816-11
5144816-11-LE
5144816-12
5144816-12-LE

Channel Lock Pliers 1 - - -

Rotation Board 1 - 2375488-13 -
GAS SPRING 160 MM 3000 1 - 5154719 -
NEWTON
30.3.3 Safety
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
288 30 Job Card IST A022 - Upgrade Rotation Board and

Rotation Gas Spring

The Gantry is powered off. - -
30.4 Procedure
30.4.1 Check and if necessary, upgrade Rotation Board
To be compatible with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, the Rotation Board must be part
number 2375488-12 or above.
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
1. Use the steps described in the Job Card D/R A221 - Rotation Board in the Core system SIP
to access the part.
NOTE: Only remove the Rotation Board protection plate. Do not remove the Rotation
Board.
• If the Rotation Board version is 2375488-12 or above, no further action is necessary.
At the end of the upgrade, return the unused 2375488-13 Rotation Board that you
ordered.
• If the Rotation Board version is under 2375488-12, proceed to use the 2375488-13
Rotation Board that you ordered, and do the following:
○ Disassemble the existing Rotation Board following the steps described in the Job
Card D/R A221 - Rotation Board in the Core SIP.
○ Assemble the Rotation Board (2375488-13) following the steps described in the
Job Card D/R A221 - Rotation Board in the Core SIP.
○ Perform the Arm Rotation Calibration according to Job Card CAL A021 - Arm
Rotation Calibration in the Core SIP.
30.4.2 Check and if necessary, upgrade Rotation Gas Spring
In order to be compatible with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, the Gantry must be
equipped with a 3000N Rotation Gas Spring (5154719).

WARNING
RISK OF INJURY DUE TO UNEXPECTED MOTION OF THE ROTATION GAS
SPRING
THE ROTATION GAS SPRING HAS A LARGER MECHANICAL ENERGY
WHEN THE TUBE HEAD IS AT ANGLES OF GREATER THAN 0°. TO
MINIMIZE THE RISK OF RAPID GAS SPRING MOVEMENT DUE TO STORED
MECHANICAL ENERGY.
IF YOU NEED TO CHANGE THE ROTATION GAS SPRING, ENSURE THAT
THE TUBE HEAD IS SET TO 0° BEFORE YOU PROCEED.
WARNING
RISK OF INJURY DUE TO UNEXPECTED FALLING MOTION OF THE ARM
THE GANTRY ARM IS HEAVY AND MAY FALL IF THE ROTATION GAS
SPRING IS REMOVED.
IF YOU NEED TO CHANGE THE ROTATION GAS SPRING, ENSURE THAT
GANTRY LOTO TOOL HAS BEEN APPLIED TO KEEP THE LIFT IN PLACE.
1. Use the steps described in the Job Card D/R A230 - Rotation Gas Spring in the Core SIP to
access the part.
2. Once the rotation gas spring is accessible, check that the sticker corresponds to the picture
below:

• If the sticker mentions the 3000N value, no further action is necessary. At the end of
the upgrade, return the unused 5154719 Rotation Gas Spring that you ordered.
• If the sticker does not mention the 3000N value, the Rotation Gas Spring needs
replacing. Proceed to use the 5154719 Rotation Gas Spring that you ordered, and
do the following:
290 30 Job Card IST A022 - Upgrade Rotation Board and

Rotation Gas Spring
○ Disassemble the existing Rotation Gas Spring following the steps described in
the Job Card D/R A230 - Rotation Gas Spring in the Core SIP.
○ Assemble the Rotation Gas Spring 160 mm 3000 N (5154719) following the
steps described in the Job Card D/R A230 - Rotation Gas Spring in the Core SIP.
30.5 Finalization
Return any of the Rotation-related Gantry parts that you did not use to GPRS.

31 Job Card IST A023 - Detector Rails

Personnel
Requirements
31.2 Overview
The objective to this Job Card is to examine the existing Detector Rails that are installed on the
system, and if necessary change them with Detector Rails that are compatible with the MTD.
Table 5-16 summarizes the different Detector Rail types that exist in the install base, and
whether they are compatible with the MTD.
Table 5-16: Detector Rails Compatibility With MTD
Detector Rails Type Description / Introduction in IB Implemented on systems with Compatible With MTD
model numbers:
Metal Implemented on all systems using the • 5144816 Yes

original LFOV1 detector. Required for
the LFOV1 detector. • 5144816-1-1
• 5144816-2-1
• 5144816-3
• 5144816-4
• 5144816-5
• 5144816-6
• 5144816-7
5144816-7-LE
• 5144816-8
5144816-8-LE
Resin Implemented on the original systems us‐ 5144816-9 No

ing the LFOV2 detector up to around 5144816-9–LE
May 2012. These are superseded by the 5144816-10
plastic type detector rails. 5144816-10–LE
Plastic Implemented on the newer systems us‐ 5144816-10 (after May 2012) Yes
ing the LFOV2 detector after around 5144816-10–LE (after May
May 2012. These supersede the resin 2012)
type detector rails and can be used on 5144816-11
all systems using the LFOV2 detector. 5144816-11–LE
5144816-12
5144816-12–LE
and higher
292 31 Job Card IST A023 - Detector Rails


31.3.1 Consumables
Loctite 222
Detector Rails Kit 1 - 5476242 -
31.4 Procedure
31.4.1 Determine if the Existing Detector Rails Need Changing
1. Examine the system and use Table 5-16 to determine whether the existing Detector Rails
need changing.
• If the system contains metal Detector Rails or plastic Detector Rails, the existing
Detector Rails do not need changing.
• If the system contains resin Detector Rails, the existing Detector Rails need
changing.
NOTE: Do not purely rely on the model number of the system alone for determining
whether the Detector Rails need changing. A system that was manufactured
with resin Detector Rails (which are not compatible with the MTD) may have
had them changed with plastic Detector Rails (which are compatible with the
MTD).
2. Determine your next step as follows:
• If the existing Detector Rails need changing, follow Section 31.4.2 and Section
31.4.3.
• If the existing Detector Rails do not need changing, no further action is necessary.
31.4.2 Remove the Existing Detector Rails
For each of the existing Detector Rails on each side of the detector, do the following.
1. Disconnect the Allen screws (1) securing the existing Detector Rail in place (2.5 mm Allen
wrench).

2. Taking care not to loose the Allen screws, remove the existing Detector Rail from the
detector.
NOTICE
In order to avoid damaging the detector, do not place the Allen screws on the
surface of the detector.
3. Clean the surface where the Detector Rail was located to ensure that no dirt exists.
31.4.3 Install the Compatible Detector Rails
1. Position the Detector Rail with the indent on the left side edge of the detector, so that:
• the aligning lug (1) fits in the hole in the detector Carbon Cover
• the tapered end with the indent (2) of the Detector Rail is at the front of the detector
• the flat end (3) of the Detector Rail is at the back of the detector, butted up against
the raised metal part (4) of the detector

2. Apply a small amount of Loctite 222 to each Allen screw. Secure the Detector Rail with the
indent on the left side edge of the detector using the Allen screws (5) (2.5 mm Allen wrench)
with a torque of 1 Nm.

NOTE: You must use the Allen screws delivered with the Detector Rails as their size
is specifically designed for use with the plastic Detector Rails.
3. Position the Detector Rail without the indent Detector Rail on the right side edge of the
detector, so that:
• the flat end (6) of the Detector Rail is at the back of the detector, butted up against
the raised metal part (7) of the detector
• the slightly rounded end (8) of the Detector Rail is at the front of the detector
• the holes of the Detector Rail are aligned with the threaded holes in the detector
NOTICE
In order to avoid damaging the detector, do not place the Allen screws on the
surface of the detector.

4. Apply a small amount of Loctite 222 to each Allen screw. Secure the Detector Rail with the
indent on the right side edge of the detector using the Allen screws (9) (2.5 mm Allen
wrench) with a torque of 1 Nm.
NOTE: You must use the Allen screws delivered with the Detector Rails as their size
is specifically designed for use with the plastic Detector Rails.
31.5 Finalization

32 Job Card IST A024 - Upgrade Precise 50N Rotation Clutch

Personnel
Requirements

32.2.1 Consumables
Blue Loctite 243
Precise 50N Rotation Clutch 1 - 5481350 -
32.2.3 Safety
WARNING
THE GANTRY MUST BE POWERED OFF.
32.3 Procedure
32.3.1 Prerequisites
1. Switch off the Gantry power.
2. Remove the arm and the front covers (refer to Job Card PHY A044 - Remove/Reinstall
Gantry Covers in the Core SIP) for access to the Clutch (1).
298 32 Job Card IST A024 - Upgrade Precise 50N Rotation

Clutch
3. Check the clutch label to see if it needs changing (in most cases it will need changing).
Determine whether you need to change the clutch as follows:
• If the clutch label has 2345968-4 Rev 3 or higher, the Gantry already contains the
Precise 50N Rotation Clutch, and no further action is necessary.
• If the clutch label has 2345968-4 Rev 2 or lower, the Gantry does not already contain
the Precise 50N Rotation Clutch, and you must continue with the rest of this Job
Card to upgrade the Rotation Clutch in the Gantry.
4. Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain (refer to Job Card D/R A208 - Gantry Curtains in the
Core SIP) for access to the ̈Rotation Board.
32.3.2 Disassembly of the Clutch
1. Unplug the clutch cables W218 and W221 from the Rotation Board (connector J8 and J7).
2. Release and remove the two screws (2) securing the clutch (4 mm Allen wrench).
3. Remove the ring supporting the clutch (one screw - 5 mm Allen wrench).
32.3.3 Reassembly of the Clutch
1. Attach the supporting ring (1) to the new clutch (one screw - 5 mm Allen wrench). At this
stage do not fully tighten the Allen screw on the supporting ring as the position of the clutch
will be adjusted.

2. Apply blue Loctite 243 on the threads of the two screws that secure the supporting ring to
the clutch. Then tighten the two screws (2) to a torque of 8 Nm +/- 0.5 Nm to secure the
supporting ring to the Arm (4 mm Allen wrench).
3. Position the new clutch so that the gap between the side of the detector and the clutch is 3.8
mm (4 mm +0.1 mm, -0.3 mm).
a. Use the Rotation Clutch Positioning Tool provided with the clutch to ensure that the
gap between the side of the detector and the clutch is 3.8 mm (4 mm +0.1 mm, -0.3
mm).
Use the raised end of the Rotation Clutch Positioning Tool (for Senographe
Essential) such that the raised end is against the detector interface plate. The
Rotation Clutch Positioning Tool is marked with appropriate labelling so that
you know which side to put facing the Detector Interface Plate.

Clutch
b. Push the clutch against the Rotation Clutch Positioning Tool so that there is no
space either side of the Rotation Clutch Positioning Tool.
NOTE: If needed, you can use a tie wrap connect to the Breast Support
Locking Mechanism cogs to temporarily hold the Rotation Clutch
Positioning Tool in position.
c. Apply Loctite 243, and tighten the Allen screw (3) on the supporting ring to a torque
of 5.5 Nm +/- 0.3 Nm.
d. Gently remove the Rotation Clutch Positioning Tool.

4. Reconnect the clutch cables of the new clutch to the Rotation Board connectors, as follows:
• W218 cable to J8 connector
• W221 cable to J7 connector

32.3.4 Check Cable Positioning
1. Ensure that the clutch cables are correctly positioned, and secured to the spacer of Rotation
Board PL202 by a cable tie as shown below.
2. The cables from the clutch to the Rotation Board PL202 must be secured as shown below.

Clutch
32.4 Finalization
Return the old clutch to GPRS.

33 Job Card IST A025 – BSLM Board Compatibility Check

Personnel
Requirements
1 Not Applicable 5 mins to check, and if Not Applicable
necessary 30 mins to
change the BSLM
board
33.2 Overview
Some Breast Support Locking Mechanism (BSLM) boards in the install base are not compatible
with the MTD because they store excessive charge from the Gantry CAN bus, which the MTD is
sensitive to. When a BLSM board is not compatible with the MTD, there is a lapse of CAN
communication between the MTD and the Gantry, or the MTD will not boot up when plugged
into the Gantry. Perform the procedure in this Job Card to determine if the existing BSLM board
is compatible with the MTD, and if necessary change the BSLM board.
Breast Support Locking 1 - 5137301-3 -
Mechanism Board
33.4 Procedure
1. From the Service Desktop, look to see if any of the following heartbeat missing related
errors have occurred in the error log:
• 112/037 H13 Rotation communication Failure
• 161/037 H13 Rotation Communication Failure
• 132/029 X11 Tube head communication failure
• 162/006 H32 Tube head control failure
• 170/004 X02 Bucky communication Failure
• 162/007 X03 Bucky control failure
• 180/001 H15 Stereotactic Positioner comm. Failure
• 162/013 H15 Stereotactic Pos. comm. Failure
• 193/018 X52 Breast Support locking mechanism control failure
• 161/052 X50 Breast support locking mechanism communication

failure
304 33 Job Card IST A025 - BSLM Board Compatibility

Check
• 161/079 H44 MTD Communication Failure
• 212/000 H44 MTD Communication Failure
• 161/036 H06 Lift Communication Failure
• 102/028 H06 Lift communication failure
• 161/038 H02 Compression Comm. Failure
• 122/000 H02 Compression comm. Failure

2. Determine if the BSLM Board is compatible with the MTD based on the results the heartbeat
missing related errors in the Service Desktop error log, as follows:
• If none of the heartbeat missing related errors listed in step 1 are not in the error log,
the BSLM Board is compatible with the MTD and does not need changing.
• If one or more of the heartbeat missing related errors listed in step 1 are in the error
log, the BSLM Board is not compatible with the MTD and needs changing according
to Job Card D/R A196 - Breast Support Locking Mechanism Board in the Core SIP.
33.5 Finalization
If the pre-ordered Breast Support Locking Mechanism board was not needed, return it to GPRS.

34 Job Card IST A027 - Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable

Personnel
Requirements

Standard Tool Box
Stator Current Filter 1 - 5500321 -
Assembly Cable
34.2.3 Safety
WARNING
STEPS IN THIS JOB CARD TELL YOU WHEN TO TAKE APPROPRIATE
ACTION TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.
34.3 Procedure
1. Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room. Apply
an appropriate LOTO padlock and label. Wait 10 minutes for the components within the
Generator to discharge.
2. If necessary, remove the four Generator side panels (see Job Card PHY A042 - Remove/
Reinstall Generator Covers in the Core SIP) to reveal the Generator Supply Command
board 200-PL2.
3. Switch off the electrical power supply on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet (position
0).
4. Using a voltmeter (rating 1000 V DC), check that there is no residual voltage between
screws S1 and S2 before proceeding.
306 34 Job Card IST A027 - Stator Current Filter Assembly

Cable
WARNING
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE STORED IN THE RESONANT CAPACITORS CAN BE
DANGEROUS. ENSURE THAT THE RESONANT CAPACITORS ARE FULLY
DISCHARGED BEFORE YOU HANDLE THE GENERATOR SUPPLY
COMMAND BOARD.
5. The XJ6 and XJ7 connectors may still have a residual voltage of 35V DC from the C2
capacitor located behind the Generator Supply Command board. Using a voltmeter (rating
1000 V DC), check that there is no residual voltage (35V DC) between the XJ6 and XJ7
connectors.

6. The C1P and M1P connectors may still have a residual voltage of 250V DC from the C1
capacitor located behind the Generator Supply Command board. Using a voltmeter (rating
1000 V DC), check that there is no residual voltage (250V DC) between the C1P and M1P
connectors.

Cable
WARNING
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE STORED IN THE C1 AND C2 CAPACITORS (LOCATED
BEHIND THE GENERATOR COMMAND SUPPLY BOARD CAN BE
DANGEROUS. ENSURE THAT THE CAPACITORS ARE FULLY DISCHARGED
BEFORE YOU HANDLE THE GENERATOR SUPPLY COMMAND BOARD.
7. Connect the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable to the TP18, TP20, and TP22 connectors
of the Generator Supply Command board as shown below. In order to avoid electromagnetic
interference, ensure the Stator Current Filter Assembly Cable is routed as shown below.
8. Switch on the electrical power supply, both from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room
and on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet (position I).

9. Switch on the Senographe system electrical power (i.e. Generator, Gantry, and Control
Station).
10. Wait until the Gantry boot is complete, and check that no error has been reported. If the
Generator Supply Command board is operating correctly with the newly installed Stator
Current Filter Assembly Cable, the LED states on the Generator Supply Command board
are as follows:
• green DE1 LED is ON
• red DE2 LED is OFF
• red DE3 LED is OFF
• clear N1 LED is ON
11. Reinstall the Generator covers (see Job Card PHY A042 - Remove/Reinstall Generator
Covers in the Core SIP).
34.4 Finalization

Cable
35 Job Card ELE A021 – External Network Configuration

Personnel
Requirements
35.2 Overview
Before the system was upgraded, two networks existed such that there was one internal
network (INT1) and one external network (EXT) as shown below in Illustration 5-41 and
summarized in Table 5-17. In the pre-upgrade situation, the ADS computer had one network
interface card (NIC) on the internal network and the other network card on the external network
connected to the hospital.
Illustration 5-41: System Pre-Upgrade Default Network Configuration
Table 5-17: System Pre-Upgrade Default Network Configuration
Sub-system (host‐ Hostname / alias on NIC IP Address/Netmask

name)
ADS (station name) INT1 : ads IP address : 192.168.1.10

Netmask : 255.255.255.0


name)
EXT : displayed in Service Desktop (station name), IP address : set during ADS SW installation or run‐
and set ADS SW installation or running the sys- ning the sys-unconfig command
unconfig command Netmask : set during ADS SW installation or running
the sys-unconfig command
IDC (idc) INT1 : idc IP address : 192.168.1.20

Netmask : 255.255.255.0
Gantry CPU Board INT1 : pos IP address : 192.168.1.40

(pos) Netmask : 255.255.255.0
After the system is upgraded, three networks exist such that there are now two internal
networks (INT1 and INT2) and one external network (EXT) as shown below in Illustration 5-42
and summarized in Table 5-18. The switch within the Control Station is changed and can now
support connection speeds of 1000 Mbit/s opposed to the original speed of 100 Mbit/s. The
original internal network (INT1) remains the same, and is for the internal communications
between the ADS Computer, IDC, and Gantry CPU Board, however the link speed of the
connection between the ADS Computer and IDC Computer is now faster at 1000 Mbit/s. The
second and new internal network (INT2) is for the internal communications between the ADS
Computer and the Reconstruction Computer, and runs at a link speed of 1000 Mbit/s.
In the post-upgrade situation, the ADS computer has one network interface card on the original
internal network (INT1) like before, and the other network card on the new second internal
network (INT2) connected directly to the Reconstruction Computer. In the post-upgrade
situation, the Reconstruction Computer has one network interface card on the new internal
network (INT2) connected directly to the ADS Computer, and the other network card on the
external network (EXT) connected to the hospital network.
312 35 Job Card ELE A021 - External Network

Configuration
Illustration 5-42: System Post-Upgrade Default Network Configuration
NOTE: The hospital network connection from the Reconstruction Computer eth1 network
interface card is connected via a CAT6 Ethernet junction located in the base of the
Control Station. A gigabit Ethernet cable in the short/long harness connects the
Reconstruction Computer to the rear end of the CAT6 Ethernet junction. The hospital
network is connected to the front end of the CAT6 Ethernet junction with a customer
supplied gigabit Ethernet cable. The CAT6 Ethernet junction is a passive device and
has no IP Address or Netmask.
Table 5-18: System Post-Upgrade Default Network Configuration

name)
Reconstruction Sta‐ INT2 : reconbox IP address : 192.168.2.50

tion (reconbox) Netmask : 255.255.255.0


name)
EXT : reconbox IP address : this is the IP address that was previous‐

ly used by the ADS computer to connect to the hos‐
NOTE: Due to the special networking configu‐
pital network – defined in Service Desktop (see Sec‐
ration (i.e. routing configuration, fire‐
tion 35.3.2.1)
wall configuration and port forwarding
Netmask : this is the netmask that was previously
to the ADS Computer) the Reconstruc‐
used by the ADS computer to connect to the hospital
tion Station is never visible on the hos‐
network – defined in Service Desktop (see Section
pital network. Even if the Reconstruc‐
35.3.2.1)
tion Station is physically connected to
the hospital network, it appears trans‐
parent as if the ADS Computer is con‐
nected. Therefore, multiple Senogra‐
phe Essential systems with the GE
Breast Tomosynthesis option can be
connected to the hospital without any
issues as long as the station name of
the ADS Computer is unique on each
Senographe Essential system.
ADS (station name) INT1 : ads IP address : 192.168.1.10

Netmask : 255.255.255.0
INT2 : defined in Service Desktop (station name), IP address : 192.168.2.10 defined during ADS SW
and during ADS SW installation or running the sys- installation or running the sys-unconfig command
unconfig command Netmask : 255.255.255.0 defined during ADS SW in‐
stallation or running the sys-unconfig command
NOTE: Due to the special networking configu‐
ration (i.e. routing configuration, fire‐ NOTE: It is important during the ADS SW in‐
wall configuration and port forwarding stallation that the IP address is set to
to the ADS Computer) the Reconstruc‐ 192.168.2.10 and the netmask is set to
tion Station assigns the alias of ads- 255.255.255.0. These default values
ext to NIC2 of the ADS Computer. will allow the ADS Computer to com‐
municate with the Reconstruction Sta‐
tion.
IDC (idc) INT1 : idc IP address : 192.168.1.20

Netmask : 255.255.255.0
Gantry CPU Board INT1 : pos IP address : 192.168.1.40

(pos) Netmask : 255.255.255.0
Before the system was upgraded, the ADS Computer handled the following parts of the external
network (EXT):
• External Network (EXT1) connection configuration (IP address and netmask) – was
previously achieved via the ADS SW installation or running the sys-unconfig command,
and is now achieved by the Service Desktop Networking – IP Address and Netmask part for
the Reconstruction Station (see Section 35.3.2.1) .
• Routing information (hospital default gateway) – was previously achieved via an S93Route
file on the ADS computer, and is now achieved via a Service Desktop Networking –
Gateway part for the Reconstruction Station (see Section 35.3.2.1)
• Permitted hosts (that can access the system via the Firewall) – is now achieved by the
Reconstruction Computer, however, the same scripts are still used on the ADS Computer,
which in turn update the appropriate files on the Reconstruction Computer. For more
information, see Section 35.3.3 .
• Physical connection to the hospital network – was previously achieved on the ADS
Computer, and if the default NIC speed needed modifying via an S93Route file on the ADS

Configuration
computer. Now achieved on the Reconstruction Station, and if necessary a new startup file
is created to change the default NIC speed of the Reconstruction Station eth1 NIC. For
more information, see Section 35.3.4.
These items are now ported over to the Reconstruction Computer instead. As a result, the
routing information, permitted hosts, and the physical connection to the hospital will need to be
re-configured on the Reconstruction Computer instead of the ADS computer. The instructions in
this Job Card describe how to configure the Reconstruction Computer with the external
networking configuration that was previously on the ADS Computer.
35.3 Procedure
35.3.1 Obtain summary of previous external networking information from manual
backup
Obtain the following ADS Computer information, which you noted down in the manual backup
forms:
• previous external IP address
• previous external netmask
• routing configuration
• permitted hosts
35.3.2 Re-configure external network IP address, external network netmask and default
gateway on the Reconstruction Computer
Use the following steps to configure the external network IP address, external network netmask,
and default gateway that was previously on the ADS Computer on the Reconstruction
Computer.
35.3.2.1 Configure the External Network IP Address; Netmask, and Routing (Gateway)
Information on the Reconstruction Computer
1. Launch the Service Desktop.
2. From the Service Desktop, click the [Configuration] button.
3. Click the Reconstruction node.
4. On the Reconstruction page that appears, click the Networking link.
5. On the Networking page that appears, do the following:
• In the External IP: fields, enter the external IP address of the Reconstruction Station
that is connected to the hospital network. This was the external IP address that was
previously used for the ADS Computer before the system was upgraded.
• In the Netmask: fields, enter the external netmask of the Reconstruction Station that
is connected to the hospital network. This was the external netmask address that
was previously used for the ADS Computer before the system was upgraded.
• In the Default Gateway: fields, enter the IP Address of the hospital’s default
Gateway. This was previously listed in the /etc/rc2.d/S93route file on the

ADS Computer before the system was upgraded. If additional gateways need to be
added, add them later on according to Section 35.3.2.2.
• Click the [Submit] button to apply the settings.

35.3.2.2 Adding additional gateways or default routes
If the ADS computer originally had more than one gateway or default route, since the Service
Desktop only allows you to add one default gateway, you must use the steps below if you need
to add additional routes.
2. Make a secure shell connection to the Reconstruction Computer as follows:
a. Establish an ssh connection as a recon user to the Reconstruction Computer, by
entering:
ssh recon@reconbox
b. At the password: prompt, enter:
M0n!AgneU (or the customer specified, no default password)
3. Change to the /etc/sysconfig/network/ directory, by entering:
cd /etc/sysconfig/network/
4. Change as root user on the Reconstruction Computer as follows:
a. Change a root user to the Reconstruction Computer, by entering:
su — root
@!Fab3ts
5. Edit the routes file, by entering:
vi routes
The routes file opens in the VI editor.
6. Use the cursor keys to move down to the end of the routes file.
7. Press the <Esc> key and the <I> key to enter in insert mode.
8. Enter a new line for each additional route you want to add. The format you must use is
described below.
The format is : <host or network> space <gateway> space <netmask> space
<interface>
where:
• <host or network> is the hostname or network (for the default gateway, this
value is default).

Configuration
• <gateway> is the IP of the gateway (router) indicated by the hospital network

administrator.
• <netmask> is the netmask (for the default gateway, this value is – (minus) and for
additional routes its the IP address of the netmask provided by the hospital network
administrator).
• <interface> is the external eth1 network interface on the Reconstruction

Computer. This value is always – (minus) which represents the default eth1 interface
on the Reconstruction Computer.
The line for the default gateway will already exist, and never needs changing as this is
managed by the Service Desktop, as described in above in Section 35.3.2.1 or within
Chapter 6, Section 7.6.2, Configuring the default gateway. If for example, the default
gateway of 3.249.2.1 (see example in Illustration 5-43) then the line associated with the
default gateway would be : default 3.249.2.1 – –
If for example (see example in Illustration 5-43) you are told to add an additional route to
a discrete host of IP address 10.1.1.1 on netmask 255.255.255.255, via gateway
3.249.15.122, you would add the following line:10.1.1.1 3.249.15.122
255.255.255.255 -
If for example (see example in Illustration 5-43) you are told to add an additional route to
a network destination 10.3.1.0 on netmask 255.255.255.0 via gateway 3.249.15.125,
you would add the following line:10.1.1.0 3.249.15.125 255.255.255.0 -

Illustration 5-43: Example network requiring additional routes in addition to the default
gateway
9. Once finished adding additional routes, press the <Esc> key to leave insert mode.
10. Save the file via an overridden write and quit, by entering:
:wq!
11. Optionally restart the network, by entering:
/etc/init.d/network restart
12. Since the additional routes are not visible within the Service Desktop, manually note down
the additional you configured within Chapter 8, LBK-A004 - System configuration form
Reconstruction Station so that it is not forgotten that they have been configured.
35.3.3 Restore permitted hosts
Reload the Senographe system IP Filters so that the recently updated network host has access
through the Reconstruction Computer firewall via the DICOM protocol. To do this, perform the
following sub-steps:
NOTE: Even though the firewall is on the Reconstruction Computer, the steps are still
performed on the ADS Computer. Running the script described in the steps below
results with the ADS connecting to the Reconstruction Computer, and modifying the
appropriate firewall files.

Configuration

2. Execute the IPFreload.sh script, by entering:
IPFreload.sh
3. When the Password: prompt appears requesting you to enter the root password, enter:
An End of script message appears. The newly declared network host can now access
the Senographe system via the firewall on the Reconstruction Computer.
35.3.4 Make hospital network connection, and if necessary restore Network Interface
Card (NIC) speed settings
If the recorded NIC settings during the backup phase in Section 13., Query and record the
settings of the Network Interface Card (NIC) are Auto-negotiation enabled, you will not need to
restore these settings as they are the default settings for the NIC. If the recorded NIC settings
during the backup phase in Section 13., Query and record the settings of the Network Interface
Card (NIC) are anything other than Auto-negotiation enabled, restore them according to the
steps below.
35.3.4.1 Make network connection to the hospital network
1. Connect the cable from the hospital network to the Ethernet port at the bottom of the Control
Station.
NOTE: The hospital network is actually connected to the Reconstruction Computer,
however the network cable routing has been modified in the Control Station so
that the Ethernet socket is now connected to the Reconstruction Computer
instead of the ADS Computer.
2. Tidy away the hospital network cable.
35.3.4.2 Determine hospital maximum network speed
The following steps are only necessary if you did not note down the NIC settings during the
backup phase of the upgrade or if the hospital network engineer does not know the maximum
speed supported by the hospital network switch. Use the following steps to determine the
maximum speed supported by the hospital network switch:
1. Ask the hospital network engineer for an IP address of a known node on the network that is
alive and reachable by a network ping command.
2. On the ADS Computer, from behind the Browser, right click on the background, and from the
Root menu, select Service Tools > Command window.
a. Establish an ssh connection as a root user to the Reconstruction Computer, by
entering:
ssh recon@reconbox


su — root
@!Fab3ts
5. Ping the IP address given to you by the hospital network engineer, by entering: ping <ip
address>.
• If the ping test works, auto-negotiation is supported.
• If the ping test fails, the highest supported speed needs determining – go to Step 6.
6. Set the external network card of the Reconstruction Computer to 1000 Mbit/s full duplex with
auto-negotiation disabled, by entering:
ethtool —s eth1 speed 1000 duplex full autoneg off
address>.
• If the ping test works, all speeds are supported and only auto-negotiation is not
supported.
8. Set the external network card of the Reconstruction Computer to 1000 Mbit/s half duplex
with auto-negotiation disabled, by entering:
ethtool —s eth1 speed 1000 duplex half autoneg off
address>.
• If the ping test works, the highest speed supported is 1000 Mbit/s half duplex.
address>.
• If the ping test works, the highest speed supported is 100 Mbit/s full duplex.
12. Set the external network card of the Reconstruction Computer to 100 Mbit/s half duplex with
ethtool —s eth1 speed 100 duplex half autoneg off
address>.

Configuration
• If the ping test works, the highest speed supported is 100 Mbit/s half duplex.
address>.
16. Set the external network card of the Reconstruction Computer to 10 Mbit/s half duplex with
address>.
• If the ping test fails, the highest speed supported is 10 Mbit/s half duplex.
NOTE: If you determine the network speed of the hospital is running only at 10 Mbit/s,
advise the customer that they will not be able to send reconstructed volumes
over the network within a respectable time frame, and encourage them the
improve the infrastructure speed of their network as soon as possible.
18. Exit as root user, by entering
exit
19. Close the ssh session, by entering:
exit
35.3.4.3 If necessary, permanently configure the supported network speed
In section Section 35.3.4.2 or from the backup, you have determined the maximum speed
supported by the hospital network switch and whether auto-negotiation is supported. If the
default of 1000 Mbit/s auto-negotiation is not supported perform the following steps to modify
the maximum speed of the Reconstruction Computer external network interface card (eth1) to
support the hospital switch network speed.
• Note : The changes you make in the steps below modify the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules in
the /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-eth1 file. The Service Desktop “Reconstruction
— Networking” page for changing the IP address and netmask on of the eth1 network
interface card overwrites the /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-eth1 file, and does not
keep the existing the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules. If at a later time you change the IP address
and netmask on of the eth1 network interface card on the Reconstruction Computer using
the using the Service Desktop “Reconstruction — Networking” page, you must redo the

steps below in order to re-configure the maximum speed of the eth1 network interface card
on the Reconstruction Computer.
entering:
ssh recon@reconbox
su — root
@!Fab3ts
4. Change to the /etc/sysconfig/network/ directory, by entering:
cd /etc/sysconfig/network/
5.
6. Edit the ifcfg-eth1 by entering:
vi ifcfg-eth1
The contents of the ifcfg-eth1 file appears in the vi editor, similar to the following (the
IPADD and NETMASK values are examples, and will depend on what you configured for
the network earlier on):
BOOTPROTO='static'
BROADCAST=''
ETHTOOL_OPTIONS=''
IPADDR='3.243.1.27'
NETMASK='255.255.255.0'
MTU=''
NAME='82540EM Gigabit Ethernet Controller'
NETWORK=''
REMOTE_IPADDR=''
STARTMODE='auto'
USERCONTROL='no'
ETHTOOL_OPTIONS=''
Initially, the default value for the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rule is empty (i.e. nothing between
the inverted commas), which corresponds to auto-negotiation on.

Configuration
8. On the last line of the ifcfg-eth1 file, edit the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rule, taking care not to
remove the inverted commas, and update it with an appropriate speed and duplex mode
corresponding to the maximum speed and duplex mode supported by the hospital network.
For the appropriate the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rule to put, refer to Table 5-19.
Table 5-19: ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules corresponding to the hospital network speed
Determined hospital network speed ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rule to put
All speeds supported, except auto-nego‐ ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 1000 duplex full autoneg off'
tiation mode
Highest speed supported is 1000 Mbit/s ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 1000 duplex half autoneg off'
half duplex
Highest speed supported is 100 Mbit/s ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 100 duplex full autoneg off'
full duplex
Highest speed supported is 100 Mbit/s ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 100 duplex half autoneg off'
half duplex
Highest speed supported is 10 Mbit/s full ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 10 duplex full autoneg off'
duplex
Highest speed supported is 10 Mbit/s half ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 10 duplex half autoneg off'
duplex
For example, if the highest speed supported by the hospital network is Highest speed
supported is 100 Mbit/s half duplex, the contents of the ifcfg-eth1 file would look like
the following (the IPADD and NETMASK values are examples, and will depend on what
you configured for the network earlier on).
BOOTPROTO='static'
BROADCAST=''
ETHTOOL_OPTIONS=''
IPADDR='3.243.1.27'
NETMASK='255.255.255.0'
MTU=''
NAME='82540EM Gigabit Ethernet Controller'
NETWORK=''
REMOTE_IPADDR=''
STARTMODE='auto'
USERCONTROL='no'
ETHTOOL_OPTIONS='speed 100 duplex half autoneg off'
9. Once you have finished editing the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rule, press the <Esc> key to leave
insert mode.
:wq
11. Exit as root user, by entering
exit
exit

The next time the system reboots the Reconstruction Computer will take into account the
updated ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules in the /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-eth1
file, and set the eth1 network interface card to the defined speed and duplex mode.
NOTE: If you want the new configuration to take immediate effect without rebooting
the entire system, as root user on the Reconstruction Computer; enter : /etc/
init.d/network restart.
35.4 Finalization

Configuration
36 Job Card ELE A022 – Worklist AE Title Configuration

Personnel
Requirements
36.2 Overview
From ADS 56.10 delivered with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, the AE title used for
worklist no longer includes WL_ and keeps letter case. Therefore, you must perform one of the
actions as described, according to one of the two scenarios below:
• Scenario 1 : The hospital want to (or are easily able to) change the DICOM configuration of
their worklist server(s). In this scenario, you must contact the hospital network administrator
in order to update the DICOM configuration of the Senographe Essential system. For
example, if the hostname of the Senographe Essential system is Ess001, then the AE title
for the worklist will now be Ess001 instead of WL_ESS001.
• Scenario 2 : The hospital does not want to change the DICOM configuration of their worklist
server(s) or it is difficult for them because they are dependant on an external vendor to
change the DICOM configuration of their worklist server(s). In this scenario, use the
procedure below to put back WL_ in the Worklist AE title of the Senographe Essential
system.
NOTE: No other change in DICOM declaration is required (other DICOM hosts other than the
worklist servers are not affected).
The system has been upgraded with the - -
GE Breast Tomosynthesis level software.
36.4 Procedure
36.4.1 Set the Worklist AETitle
To set the Worklist AETitle, do the following:
su –
3. Change to the /export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts directory, by entering:

cd /export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts
4. Execute the SetWorklistAETitle.sh script, by entering:
SetWorklistAETitle.sh
5. At the Enter the AE Title value : prompt that appears, enter the updated Worklist
AE Title for the Senographe Essential system. For example, if the hostname of the
Senographe Essential system is Ess001, enter WL_Ess001.
NOTE: When specifying the host name, you must be aware of the implementation of
how the script works, and how the system used to set the Worklist AETitle in
the past. The script allows you to use mixed case, whereas in the past, the
system would force all upper case when it automatically set the Worklist
AETitle. Therefore, when using the script for IB systems, ensure that you
specify the host name all in upper case. For IB systems, if you use mixed case
when using the script, you will still need to arrange to have the configuration
hospital Worklist servers to match the mixed case. For new systems, you have
the choice to use either mixed case or all upper case since the hospital
Worklist servers will need configuring for the newly installed system anyway.
6. The SetWorklistAETitle.sh script, updates the Worklist AE Title for the Senographe
Essential system, and responds with a message similar to the following:
The new AE Title value is : WL_Ess001
exit
exit
select Restart Browse to restart the Browser. The changes Worklist AE Title for the
Senographe Essential system are now effective.
36.4.2 Check the Worklist AETitle has been set
To check whether the Worklist AETitle has been set, do the following:
NOTE: In order to check that the Worklist AETitle has been set, you must be sdc user.
Opening a new command window sets you as sdc user by default. If you
already have a command window open from a previous task, enter su – sdc
to ensure that you are sdc user. If you attempt to run the following command in
the step below as root user, you will get the response WORKLISTAETITLE:
Undefined variable.
2. Query the existing Worklist AETitle, by entering:
echo $WORKLISTAETITLE
Assuming you have run the command as sdc user as instructed, the repsonse to the
command will be one of the following:
326 36 Job Card ELE A022 - Worklist AE Title Configuration

• If the Worklist AETitle has been set, the currently set Worklist AETitle is returned. For
example, if you had previously set the Worklist AETitle to WL_Ess001, the returned
value would be WL_Ess001.
• If the Worklist AETitle has not been set, the returned value is WORKLISTAETITLE:
Undefined variable.
36.5 Finalization

37 Job Card ELE A025 - Reconstruction Computer and/or ADS Computer Post
Install Configuration
Personnel
Requirements
37.2 Overview
The Reconstruction Computer and ADS Computer communicate via a secure network
connection. When you change either the ADS Computer hardware/software or Reconstruction
Computer hardware/software you must perform the applicable steps in this Job Card to:
• reestablish the secure network communication between the Reconstruction Computer and
ADS Computer
• restore the configuration on that component (either Reconstruction Computer or ADS

Computer) that was changed, including recovering the database
The steps to reestablish the secure network communication vary according to whether the
internal IP address scheme between the Reconstruction Computer and ADS Computer is
different to the default internal IP address scheme.
When you reinstall the Reconstruction Computer software or change the Reconstruction
Computer hardware, perform Section 37.3.1.
When you reinstall the AWS software or change the ADS Computer hardware, perform Section
37.3.2.
37.3 Procedure
37.3.1 Restoring the Reconstruction Computer Configuration (post LFC)
37.3.1.1 Reestablish connectivity with the ADS Computer
NOTE: When the Reconstruction Computer is changed or the Reconstruction
Software reinstalled, initially there is no network connectivity between the ADS
Computer and the Reconstruction Computer. Therefore, the Reconstruction
Computer will not automatically power on via the usual wake-up on LAN signal
when the entire system is powered on. You must manually power on the
Reconstruction Computer by pressing the power button on the front panel.
2. Determine whether you need to temporarily revert the IP Address and netmask of the ADS
Computer back to the default values so it can communicate with the newly installed
Reconstruction Computer, as follows:
a. Launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, Section 5.2.1, Launching the Service
Desktop).
The Service Desktop appears.
328 37 Job Card ELE A025 - Reconstruction Computer

and/or ADS Computer Post Install Configuration
b. Check the current IP address of the ADS Computer within the Connectivity
Parameters section of the Service Desktop home page.
• If the IP Address returned is 192.168.2.10, the ADS Computer is using
the default IP Addressing scheme for the second internal network, and
you can proceed directly to Step 3.
• If the IP Address returned is not 192.168.2.10 (for example 10.0.1.10),

the ADS Computer is not using the default IP Addressing scheme for the
second internal network, and you must revert the settings back according
to Section 41., Reverting back the configuration of the second internal
(INT2) network on the ADS Computer to the default values before
proceeding to Step 3.
su –
/export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts/createadsrsakey.sh
Once the createadsrsakey.sh script completes, keep the command window open for
reverting back the hostname of the ADS computer.
6. At the password: prompt that appears, enter:
M0n!AgneU
7. Update the hostname of the ADS computer on the Reconstruction Computer, as follows:
a. Change to the /export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts/ directory, by
entering:
cd /export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts/
b. Execute the SetNewHostname.sh script, by entering:
./SetNewHostname.sh –u <ADS hostname>
Where <ADS hostname> is the current ADS Hostname (given in the ADS
Command Line prompt).
c. Once the script completes, logout as root user, by entering:
exit
d. Close the command window, by entering:
exit
37.3.1.2 Restore the Reconstruction Computer Configuration
1. Restore the previous Reconstruction Computer configuration backup, as follows:

a. Launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, Section 5.2.1, Launching the Service
Desktop).
b. From the Service Desktop, click the [Utilities] button.
c. In the left pane, select System Tools→ Restore.
The RESTORE screen appears.
d. Under the Restore section, select the RECON radio button.
e. Under the Restore From section, select the most recent Reconstruction Computer
backup.
f. Click on the [START] button.
A message indicating successful completion appears at the end of the restore
procedure.
2. Determine whether you need to change the internal IP address scheme of the second
internal network to stop it conflicting with the hospital, as follows:
• If during Section 37.3.1.1, Step 2 you had to revert back the ADS Computer to its
default IP address, there is a conflict with the hospital network, and you must change
the then you must change the internal IP address scheme of the Reconstruction
Computer according to Section 41., Modify the configuration of the second internal
(INT2) network on the Reconstruction Computer and the ADS Computer according to
Section 41., Modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the
ADS Computer.
• If during Section 37.3.1.1, Step 2 the ADS Computer was already using the default
internal IP address scheme, there is no conflict with the hospital network and no
additional steps are required.
Service Tools→ Recover database to rebuild the database on the ADS Computer.
NOTE: As the database is on the ADS Computer, the images of the reconstruction
volumes that were previously on the Reconstruction Computer will still appear
on the database, however they are physically no longer present. Therefore, it
is necessary to perform a recover database, so that the database entries on
the ADS Computer are updated so that the images of the reconstruction
volumes that no longer exist are removed from the database.
4. The Reconstruction Computer will no longer have the constructed 3D volumes for each of
the patient exams. The 3D volumes will need to be reconstructed if they were never pushed
to the IDI (or an external PACs that supports the 3D volumes). Check with the customer
whether they want the 3D volumes reconstructed. In the case the customer wants the 3D
volumes reconstructed, perform the following sub-steps:
a. From the Browser, select the patient, then the exam (study), and then click on the
required series. Each selected item is highlighted by inverting the light and dark parts
of the image.
To select additional series, hold down the <Control> key on the keyboard
while selecting them in the list.

b.
Click the [Reconstruction on demand] button .
Each 3D volume will take approximately 2.5 minutes to be build on the
Reconstruction Computer. While the 3D volumes are being reconstructed in
the background, the system can carry on being used as normal.
5. Restore the Reconstruction Computer firewall so the defined hosts can access the system,
as follows:
a. Right mouse click the Browser background, and from the Root menu that appears,
select Service Tools→ Command window.
b. Execute the IPFreload.sh script, by entering:
IPFreload.sh
c. When the Password: prompt appears requesting you to enter the root password,
enter:
An End of script message appears. The declared network hosts can now
access the Senographe system via the firewall on the Reconstruction
Computer.
6. If the Reconstruction Computer was configured to use multiple routes in addition to the
default route, re-configure the additional routes according to the manually backed up
information in Chapter 8, LBK-A004 - System configuration form Reconstruction Computer.
For more information about configuring multiple routes, refer to Section 35., Adding
additional gateways or default routes.
37.3.2 Restoring the ADS Computer Configuration (post LFC)
37.3.2.1 Reestablish connectivity with the Reconstruction Computer
Note: The following procedure assumes you have already installed the ADS Software, during
which time you will have already configured the IP address and netmask of the e1000g0
network card on the ADS Computer (for the INT2 network) to correspond with the network used
by the Reconstruction Computer. For more information, refer to Section 38.3, ADS software.
NOTE: When the ADS Computer is changed or the AWS Software reinstalled, initially
there is no network connectivity between the AWS Unit and the Reconstruction
Computer. Therefore, the Reconstruction Computer will not automatically
power on via the usual wake-up on LAN signal when the entire system is
powered on. You must manually power on the Reconstruction Computer by
pressing the power button on the front panel.
su –


/export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts/createadsrsakey.sh
5. At the password: prompt that appears, enter:
M0n!AgneU
37.3.2.2 Restore the ADS Computer Configuration
1. Follow the instructions given in Job Card ELE A044 - Install User Publications of the Core
SIP to install the Embedded Publications.
2. Restore AWS parameters from the system backup located on the backup CD-R. See
Section 39., Restore procedure. If the backup CD-R is not available, the patients in the
Worklist will be lost, and the procedures given in the Job Card ELE A013 - AWS
Configuration in the Core SIP must be performed.
NOTE: You do not need to restore the parameters of the Reconstruction Station
because they are already on the configuration files on the Reconstruction
Station. The Service Desktop will automatically display the existing parameters
of the Reconstruction Station within the Reconstruction pages of the Service
Desktop.
NOTICE
An ADS backup from a particular ADS version can only be restored by the same
version of ADS. You SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT restore an ADS backup if the
ADS version differs from the ADS version when the backup was made as it will
introduce problems with ADS operation.
3. Open the Remote Hosts Selection window (refer to Job Card ELE A023 - Declare Worklist
Hosts in the Core SIP) and check that all network devices are still correctly declared. If not,
do the following, as required for each network host and printer:
• declare the network hosts (refer to Job Card ELE A022 - Declare Network Hosts in
the Core SIP)
• declare the printers (refer to Job Card ELE A020 - Declare and Set Printers (Filming
Devices) in the Core SIP)
4. If the Senographe system does not use the default AOP Classic (AOP A) tables
configuration, restore as necessary the AOP configuration (see Job Card ELE A031 - AOP
Configuration in the Core SIP). Ensure you follow your local regulations when configuring
the AOP configuration.
Service Tools→ Recover database to rebuild the database on the ADS Computer.

NOTE: Once the database is rebuilt, if there were any 3D volumes on the
Reconstruction Station they will now be visible on the AWS Unit, however the
original projections (i.e. 9 images of a Tomo sequence) that formed each of
the 3D volumes are no longer on the AWS Unit. If the customer wishes to
restore any of they original projections, they can by retrieving them from the
remote PACS, IDI, or from archives burnt to CD-R.
6. Update IDC files on the ADS Computer according to the steps described in the section
UPDATE IDC FILES ON THE ADS COMPUTER of the booklet Senographe Essential IDC
OS and SW Installation Guide (5415906-X-1EN).
7. Install the Collimator Check Script as described in Job Card IST A013a – Collimator Check
Script Installation.
8. If the Stereotaxy option exists, restore the Stereotaxy configuration according to Scenario
IST A001 - Installation in the Senographe Essential Stereotaxy Service Manual (5304972-
X-1EN).
9. If the CESM option exists, do the following:
a. Re-activate the CESM option by performing Job Card UPG A011 - Activating the
CESM Feature in Contrast Enhanced Spectral Mammography SIP.
b. Do the AOP Calibration by performing Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration in the
Contrast Enhanced Spectral Mammography SIP.
10. Reinstall system options. System options to be connected to the Senographe can include:
Review workstation, CAD, Mass archiving system, Laser Camera, Networking. Refer to the
corresponding Service Manual to re-install each option.
11. Because the IDC, Reconstruction Station, and Senographe parameter backup copies were
held in the AWS, a new backup must be performed in order to make IDC, Reconstruction
Station, and Senographe backup parameters available. Perform a system backup according
to Section 39., Backup procedure.
12. Configure the Worklist AE Title of the ADS Computer to match that of the old ADS Computer
that has been defined on the Worklist servers in the hospital network. For more information,
see Job Card ELE A022 – Worklist AE Title Configuration.
37.4 Finalization

38 Job Card ELE A030 - Software and firmware reload or update

This Job Card describes the steps you must execute before installing or upgrading the software
or firmware of the different subsystems. It is organized by sub-system (Gantry, MTD, ADS, IDC,
Reconstruction). This procedure does not describe how to reload or update the Generator
firmware since it is done by replacing the ePROMs.
NOTICE
Whenever possible, a full system backup must be available. Refer to Job Card
ELE A052 - Back up/Restore.
38.1 Positioner software and firmware

38.1.1 Gantry CPU software (Poseidon)
To update the Gantry CPU software, follow the instructions supplied in the Gantry Software
Update CD-ROM that is kept with the system.
38.1.2 Gantry node firmware
NOTICE
If the Gantry CPU board software (Poseidon) must be updated or reloaded along
with nodes firmware, always update/reload the Gantry CPU board first.
To update any of the gantry nodes firmware, follow the instructions supplied in the Gantry
Software Update CD-ROM that is kept with the system.
38.2 MTD firmware
The procedure to update the MTD firmware is similar to the procedure to update Gantry nodes.
However, refer to the booklet delivered with the Software backup kit for MTD.
38.3 ADS software
CAUTION
Make a backup of the Repeat and Reject Analysis database. Use the AWS
Export Database feature as described in the chapter QC Tests for the Radiologic
Technologist of the Senographe Essential QC Manual.
If there is a system failure that results in the loss of information from the Repeat
and Reject Analysis database, an entry must be recorded in the QC log. This QC
log entry must describe the occurrence and the cause of data loss, to provide
documentation on the reasons for which an analysis may not be available in a
particular period. A Field Service record must also be prepared to indicate the
nature of the failure and loss of information.
NOTICE
When reloading system software from cold (i.e., including the operating system),
first disconnect the cable to the external network, i.e., the cable that connects the
Reconstruction Station to the external network. When the procedure is complete,
connect the cable.
334 38 Job Card ELE A030 - Software and firmware reload

or update
A full AWS software reload (operating system and application software) is necessary in some
cases. For example, the ADS unit has been replaced, or if lost or corrupted files make it
impossible to run the application after rebooting, and reloading the application only is not
successful. Use the same ADS OS and Application Software DVD-ROMs as used for the
current installation (supplied with the system or supplied for a software update).
When performing the AWS software reload, the networking values you define will vary
according to your scenario, as follows:
• For a brand new installation or an existing installation where the IP Address scheme
between the ADS Computer and Reconstruction Computer was not changed from their
default values, use the following default values for e1000g0:
○ IP Address for e1000g0 : 192.168.2.10

○ Netmask for e1000g0 : 255.255.255.0
• For an existing installation where the IP Address scheme between the ADS Computer and
Reconstruction Computer was changed from their default values, use the following values
for e1000g0:
○ IP Address for e1000g0 : 10.0.1.10

○ Netmask for e1000g0 : 255.255.255.0
Restore the AWS Configuration. For more information, refer to Section 37., Restoring the ADS
Computer Configuration (post LFC).
38.4 IDC software
Software reload from the OS and Application Software DVD-ROMs is necessary when the IDC
Computer has been replaced, or if a new version of the IDC software must be installed on your
system. Use the following steps to perform an IDC Software Reload:
1. If possible, back up the system configuration (including the IDC configuration) to the ADS
hard disk. Refer to Job Card ELE A052 - Back up/Restore.
2. Follow the installation instructions given on the back of the DVD-ROM case of the IDC
Application Software DVD-ROM used for the current installation or supplied for a software
update.
3. Restore the IDC directory data from the current system backup from the AWS hard disk.
Refer to Job Card ELE A052 - Back up/Restore.
4. Reload the detector parameters according to the Load Detector Parameters section in Job
Card D/R A141 - Image Receptor/Digital Detector in the Core SIP (requires the CD-ROM
containing parameters for the detector).
38.5 Reconstruction software
Software reload from DVD-ROM is necessary when the Reconstruction Computer has been
replaced, or if a new version of the Reconstruction software must be installed on your system.
Use the following steps to perform an Reconstruction Computer Software Reload:
1. If possible, back up the system configuration (including the Reconstruction Computer
configuration) to the ADS hard disk. Refer to Job Card ELE A052 - Back up/Restore.

2. Use the Reconstruction Station Installation – OS and SW Installation Guide booklet to install
the operating system and application software on the Reconstruction Computer.
3. Restore the Reconstruction Computer Configuration. For more information, refer to Section
37., Restoring the Reconstruction Computer Configuration (post LFC).
336 38 Job Card ELE A030 - Software and firmware reload

or update
39 Job Card ELE A052 - Back Up/Restore

Personnel
Requirements
1 Field engineer Not Applicable 15 mins Not Applicable
39.2 Overview
Backup and restore procedures for the option are similar to the procedures of the Core system
with the addition of the Reconstruction Station parameters to the backup data.
For theoretical information on the backup/restore refer to the Job Card ELE A052 - Back-up/
Restore Procedure in the Core SIP.
This Job Card is composed as follows:
• backup procedure Section 39.4.1
• restore procedure Section 39.4.2
• backup troubleshooting Section 39.4.4

Blank CD-R 1 - - -
39.4 Procedure
39.4.1 Backup procedure
NOTICE
If backup to CD-R is not possible, record ADS parameters manually to enable
manual restore later (e.g., after an upgrade procedure).
Refer to Chapter 8, LBK A003 - Back-up/Restore Procedure - ADS Parameters
Manual Record Sheets for a suitable form.
NOTICE
If you are backing up a system before upgrading the ADS version, record the
ADS parameters manually so that they can be restored later (see Chapter 8, LBK
A003 - Back-up/Restore Procedure - ADS Parameters Manual Record Sheets).
1. Manually back up the Reconstruction Station parameters using Chapter 8, LBK-A004 -
System configuration form Reconstruction Station.

2. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, How to Use the Service
Desktop).
3.
From the Service Desktop, click the Utilities button .
NOTE: This step is optional. If no CD-R disk is inserted, ADS parameters are still copied to
the hard disk.
4. To back up the parameters of the ADS separately, insert a CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive
on the ADS computer.
5. In the left pane, select System Tools→ Backup.
The SYSTEM BACKUP screen appears.
6. Follow these steps:
a. Enter a suitable name into the text field System Backup Description Text.
b. Click on the [START] button.
If no CD-R disk is present, the message CD Mount Error Or CD Not Blank
appears.
Click [Continue] to continue the backup.
The process takes about 10 minutes.
The message System Backup Completed appears when the backup process
ends.
7. In the left pane, select System Tools→ Restore.
If the name of the system backup (as defined in Step 6.a) appears on the screen the
backup is complete.
If the name of the system backup does not appear on the screen the backup failed, refer
to Section 39.4.4
8. Remove the CD-R disk, label it with the name and date of the backup and store it with the
system.
39.4.2 Restore procedure
NOTICE
If you are backing up a system before upgrading the ADS version, record the
ADS parameters manually so that they can be restored later (see Chapter 8, LBK
A003 - Back-up/Restore Procedure - ADS Parameters Manual Record Sheets).
1. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, How to Use the Service
Desktop).
2.
From the Service Desktop, click the Utilities button .
3. In the left pane, select System Tools→ Restore.
338 39 Job Card ELE A052 - Back Up/Restore

The RESTORE screen appears.
4. Select the appropriate restore procedure (under Restore).

You can restore separate sub-system data (AWS, IDC, DMR, RECON) as required.
5. Select the data source (under Restore From).
6. If you are restoring from the CD-R disk, insert the CD-R disk containing the backup data into
the CD-ROM drive on the ADS computer. When restoring from CD-R, only the ADS backup
is available.
7. Click on the [START] button.
A message indicating successful completion appears at the end of the restore
procedure.
8. If the restore is successful, some actions are necessary, depending on the restored sub-
system:
• If the ADS data has been restored, the Browser must be restarted according to the
section Restarting the Browser in the Senographe Operations - How to... chapter of
the Core SIP.
• If the language used by the ADS Computer is a different to English, restore the
appropriate language according to section 6-3, Set General Configuration
Parameters of Job Card ELE A013 - AWS Configuration in the Core SIP.
• If the IDC data has been restored, the IDC must be rebooted, see Section 39.4.3.
• If the Generator data has been restored, the tube heater current must be
recalibrated.
Perform Job Card CAL A012 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current in the Core SIP.

• If the Reconstruction Computer data has been restored, the entire system must be
rebooted (via the shutdown button on the Browser, and powering up afterwards via
the X-ray Console ON button).
• If the system has the Stereotaxy option, please perform accuracy checks described
in the Planned Maintenance chapter of the Stereotaxy Operator Manual.
9. If the restore is not completed successfully, check the following:
• That the backup source is functioning correctly (AWS hard disk or CD-R disk).
• That communication is correct between the AWS and the sub-system being restored.
39.4.3 IDC reboot
After IDC data has been restored, the IDC must be rebooted so that it can recognize the
changed data. This can be done either by powering OFF/ON, or using a command window. To
reboot the IDC using a command window:
1. From behind the Browser, launch a command window (see Launching a Command Line
Window in the Core SIP).
2. Make a telnet connection with the IDC by entering:
telnet idc
3. At the Login: prompt, specify the xruser user by entering:
xruser
4. When prompted to specify the xruser password, enter:
4$xray
5. At the [xruser@idc ~]$ prompt, reboot the IDC by entering:
reboot
The IDC shuts down and reboots; the message Connection closed by foreign host
appears.
The X-ray Console first displays the message S86 AWS/IDC Communication lost, then
displays the message S83 Detector environment not OK until the reboot is complete.
39.4.4 Backup troubleshooting
Use the information in the following sections as a guide in troubleshooting backup/restore
problems.
1. If AWS Backup to Hard Disk Fails:
Check communication between the AWS and the IDC (check the ADS to IDC cable
connections, and if necessary, run the AWS-IDC Communication tests from the Service
Desktop).
Check that there is enough space on the AWS disk to receive the backup data.
2. If AWS Backup to Hard Disk Fails:
Check that there is enough space on the AWS disk to receive the backup data.

3. If AWS Backup to CD-R Fails:

Check that the CD-R is not damaged.
Ensure that the CD-R has not been erased using the CD Erase function, as this is only
applicable to CD-RW media and not CD-R media.
NOTE: If the backup to CD-R is not possible, record the AWS parameters manually.
See Chapter 8, LBK A003 - Back-up/Restore Procedure - ADS Parameters
Manual Record Sheets).
4. If you have to free up disk space to perform a new backup, proceed as follows:
a. From behind the Browser, launch a command window (see Launching a Command
Line Window in the Core SIP).
b. Log in as root as follows:
i. At the ADS prompt enter:
su -root
ii. When requested to specify the root password, enter:
c. Change to the /export/home/iqst/subsystems/idc/backup directory by entering
cd /export/home/iqst/subsystems/idc/backup
d. Delete files in the current IDC backup directories by entering:
rm -rf current
e. Delete files in the previous IDC backup directories by entering:
rm -rf previous
f. Make a new current IDC backup directory by entering:
mkdir current
g. Change the privileges of the current directory to read/write/execute, by entering:
chmod 777 current
h. Change the ownership of the current directory to the sdc user, by entering:
chown sdc:informix current
i. Make a new current IDC backup directory by entering:
mkdir previous
j. Change the privileges of the previous directory to read/write/execute, by entering:
chmod 777 previous
k. Change the ownership of the previous directory to the sdc user, by entering:
chown sdc:informix previous
l. Perform a new backup, see Section 39.4.1

39.5 Finalization

40 Job Card ELE A055a - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT1 network)

Personnel
Requirements
40.2 Overview
network (INT1) and one external network (EXT) as shown in Illustration 5-44. In the pre-upgrade
situation, the ADS computer had one network interface card (NIC) on the internal network and
the other network card on the external network connected to the hospital. In the pre-upgrade
case, if there was a conflict with the hospital network, the IP address scheme of the internal
network (INT1) would have needed modifying to stop the conflict.

Illustration 5-44: Clash with the hospital network in a pre-upgrade scenario
networks (INT1 and INT2) and one external network (EXT) as shown in Illustration 5-45.
• The original internal network (INT1) remains the same, and is for the internal
communications between the ADS Computer, IDC, and Gantry CPU Board, and can still
clash with the hospital network.
• The second and new internal network (INT2) is for the internal communications between the
ADS Computer and the Reconstruction Computer, and this network can also conflict with the
hospital network.
344 40 Job Card ELE A055a - Changing Internal IP

Addressing (INT1 network)
Illustration 5-45: Clash with the hospital network in a post-upgrade scenario
Case 1 — Before the upgrade the hospital clashed with the internal network of the system
If there was originally a conflict with the hospital network before the upgrade, the IP address
scheme of the first internal network (INT1) will need modifying according to the instructions in
this Job Card to stop the conflict.
Within the upgraded Senographe system the first internal network (INT1) that allows the ADS
Computer, IDC and Gantry (Poseidon) components to communicate internally among each
other uses a private network of 192.168.1.0 with a Netmask 255.255.255.0.
On some sites, the hospital network can also be 192.168.1.0. In this case there can be IP
address conflicts between the hospital and Senographe system networks. The conflicts can

arise since some of the nodes on the hospital network may have the same IP address as the
default IP addresses assigned to the Senographe system components on the first internal
network (INT1). If such a conflict exists, the Senographe system cannot be used on the hospital
network until you have changed the Senographe system internal IP addresses on the first
internal network (INT1).
The new Senographe system internal IP addresses on the first internal network (INT1) can be
one of the another non-routable 192.168.xxx.xxx private network. However, care must be taken
so ensure the new network specified is not on the same network as the second internal network
(INT2) (192.168.2.0).
In the following example, the Senographe system default internal IP addresses on the
192.168.1.0 network have been changed to be on the 192.168.100.0 network.
Table 5-20: First Internal Network (INT1) default IP addresses and example IP address for
changing to
Component Hostname Default IP Address (which Example IP Address to

will need changing) change to
ADS Computer ads 192.168.1.10 192.168.100.10
IDC Computer idc 192.168.1.20 192.168.100.20
IDC Table idc_tbl 192.168.1.21 192.168.100.21
Gantry CPU (Poseidon) pos 192.168.1.40 192.168.100.40
Laptop laptop 192.168.1.29 192.168.100.29
Titan titan 192.168.1.30 192.168.100.30
The IDC Table, Laptop and Titan entries in the table above are components that no longer exist.
However they still must be configured and retained in the Senographe system for legacy
reasons.
Changing the Senographe system internal IP addresses on the first internal network (INT1)
does not affect any of the features of the system (service features, service desktop, calibration
menus, diagnostic menus, etc.). However, it does affect performing upgrades of the
Senographe system components (see Section 40.3.9).
Instead of using the manual procedure in this Job Card, you can save time by using the new-
intip that is located on the AWS Application DVD-ROM. For more information, see The new-
intip script.
Case 2 — Before the upgrade the hospital did not clash with the internal network of the system,
but after the upgrade there is a clash
In the post upgrade case, if there is a conflict with the hospital network, the IP address scheme
of the second internal network (INT2) needs modifying according to the instructions in Job Card
ELE A055b - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT2 network) to stop the conflict.
40.3 Procedure
40.3.1 Create a Backup Directory
1. From behind the Browser, launch a command window.

2. Change to the /export/home/extra_tmp directory on the ADS Computer, by entering:

cd /export/home/extra_tmp
3. Make an IPbak backup directory by entering:
mkdir IPbak
40.3.2 Disable the Second Internal Network
a. At the ADS prompt, enter:
su -
operator
3. Disable the second internal network, by entering:
ifconfig e1000g0 down
40.3.3 Change IDC IP Address
2. Make a telnet connection with the IDC by entering:
telnet idc
3. Log in to the IDC as follows:
a. At the username prompt, enter:
xruser
b. At the password prompt, enter:
4$xray
a. At the prompt, enter:
su
#superxr
5. Change to the /magichome/xruser/bin directory on the IDC, by entering:
cd /magichome/xruser/bin
6. Change the IDC IP address, by entering:
./changeIDC_IP.sh <new IDC IP address>
where <new IDC IP address> is your preferred new address (e.g. 192.168.100.20).

NOTE: You cannot specify a new IDC IP address of the format 192.168.2.xx because
the sub-net 192.168.2.0 is reserved for the Detector.
7. When the script has completed, you are returned to the command prompt. Reboot the IDC,
by entering:
reboot
You are returned to the command window with an ADS prompt.
8. Close the command prompt window.
40.3.4 Change Poseidon (Gantry CPU) IP Address
1. If necessary, power on the Senographe system.
3. Make a telnet connection with the Poseidon by entering:
telnet pos
4. At the -> prompt that appears, run the boot change application by entering:
posBootChange
5. A series of parameters are displayed each time you press the <Return> key. If you do not
want to change the current value of a parameter, press the <Return> key. If you want to
change the current value of a parameter, type the new value and then press the <Return>
key. Complete the following sub-steps:
a. At the boot device : InPci0 prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the
current value.
b. At the processor number : 0 prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the
current value.
c. At the hostname : prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the current value.
d. At the filename : prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the current value.
e. At the inet on ethernet(e) : 192.168.1.40 prompt, type the new Poseidon
IP address (e.g. 192.168.100.40) and press the <Return> key.
f. At the inet on backplane (b) : prompt, do the following:
• If no value is quoted, press the <Return> key to retain the blank value.
• If a value is quoted (e.g. 192.168.1.40), delete the value by pressing the

<.> key, press the <Return> key to set the blank value.
g. At the host inet (h) : 192.168.1.10 prompt, type the new ADS workstation
IP address (e.g. 192.168.100.10) and press the <Return> key.
h. At the gateway inet (g) : 192.168.1.10 prompt, type the new ADS
workstation IP address (e.g. 192.168.100.10) and press the <Return> key.
i. At the user (u) : labo prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the current
value.

j. At the ftp password (pw) (blank - use rsh) : password prompt, press
the <Return> key to retain the current value.
k. At the flags (f) : 0x0 prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the current
value.
l. At the target name (tn) : prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the current
value.
m. At the startup scripts (s) : prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the
current value.
n. At the other (o) : prompt, press the <Return> key to retain the current value.
The configuration is complete, and you are returned to the > prompt.
NOTE: If you make a typing error, you can correct your mistake at the end (in step 7)
after re-entering the command posBootChange.
6. At the -> prompt, check that the IP Address changes you made in step 5 above were set by
re-entering:
posBootChange
7. Then press the <Return> key at each parameter to and check that the IP addresses have
been set to the correct values.
NOTICE
Double check that the parameters are set as described in step 5 above. An error
in any of the parameters can render the Gantry CPU inoperable, which requires a
board replacement.
8. Logout from Poseidon, by entering:
logout
9. Reboot the system (power off and on the Gantry from the X-ray Console).
40.3.5 Re-enable the Second Internal Network
su -
operator
3. Disable the second internal network, by entering:
ifconfig e1000g0 up
40.3.6 Change the ADS Computer Internal IP Address
Before you undertake the following steps, ensure that you have already undertaken the steps
described in Section 40.3.3 and Section 40.3.4 above.


su -
operator
3. Change the permissions of some of the ADS configuration files, as follows:
a. Make the /etc/inet/hosts file writable by other users, by entering:
chmod o+w /etc/inet/hosts
b. Make the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file writable by the
owner, by entering:
chmod u+w ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment
c. Make the ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file writable by
the owner, by entering:
chmod u+w ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg
4. Exit as root user to return to sdc user, by entering:
exit
You are returned to the command prompt as sdc user.
5. Copy the original /etc/inet/hosts file to the /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak
directory for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /etc/inet/hosts /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/hosts.original
6. Open the /etc/inet/hosts file with the textedit command, by entering:
textedit /etc/inet/hosts
The /etc/inet/hosts file appears in an X-Windows based TextEdit application
window.

7. Within the TextEdit application window, change all of the current Senographe systems IP
addresses from 192.168.1.x to match your preferred new address scheme (e.g.
192.168.100.x).
8. Save the /etc/inet/hosts file (File > Save) and click the button in the top left of the
TextEdit window to exit the editor.
9. Copy the newly modified /etc/inet/hosts file to the /export/home/extra_tmp/
IPbak directory for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /etc/inet/hosts /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/hosts.new
10. Ensure that /etc/hosts is a symbolic link to /etc/inet/hosts, by using the following
sub-steps:
a. List all the symbolic links associated with the /etc/hosts file, by entering:
ls -l /etc/hosts
b. Review the command line output.
• If the command line output begins with lrwxrwxrwx and finishes with
hosts -> ./inet/hosts, then the symbolic link is set and you can go
to step 12.

• If the command line output begin does not begin with lrwxrwxrwx and
does not finish with hosts -> ./inet/hosts, the symbolic link is not
set and you must go to sub-step c.
c. Remove the /etc/hosts file without prompting for confirmation, regardless of the
file's permissions, by entering:
rm -f /etc/hosts
d. Create a symbolic link from /etc/hosts to /etc/inet/hosts, by entering:
ln -s /etc/inet/hosts /etc/hosts
11. Copy the original ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file to the /
export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak directory for backup purposes, by entering:
cp ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment /export/home/
extra_tmp/IPbak/light_adjustment.original
12. Open the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file with the textedit
command, by entering:
textedit ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment
The ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file appears in an X-Windows
based TextEdit application window.

13. Within the TextEdit application window, scroll down to the last line of the ~sdc/
senovision/scripts/ light_adjustment script. Then change the reference of
http://192.168.1.10 to match the new address of the AWS (e.g. 192.168.100.10).
14. Save the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file (File > Save) and click
the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor.
15. Copy the newly modified ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file to the /
export/home/extra_tmp/ IPbak directory for backup purposes, by entering:
cp ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment /export/home/
extra_tmp/IPbak/light_adjustment.new
16. Copy the original ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file to the /
cp ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg /export/home/
extra_tmp/IPbak/PositionerServer.cfg.original
17. Open the ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file with the textedit
command, by entering:
textedit ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg
The ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file appears in an X-
Windows based TextEdit application window.

18. Within the TextEdit application window, scroll down to the INET_ADDR parameter located in
the [ConfigSPLine] section of the ~sdc/senovision/config/
PositionerServer.cfg file. Then change the reference of 192.168.1.40 to match the
new address of the Poseidon (Gantry CPU) (e.g. 192.168.100.40).
19. Save the ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file (File > Save) and
click the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor.
20. Copy the newly modified ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file to
the /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak directory for backup purposes, by entering:
cp ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg /export/home/
extra_tmp/IPbak/PositionerServer.cfg.new
21. Copy the original /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd file to the /export/
home/extra_tmp/IPbak directory for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd /export/home/extra_tmp/
IPbak/svcproxy_env.cmd.original
22. Open the /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd file with the textedit command,
by entering:
textedit /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd
The /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd file appears in an X-Windows
based TextEdit application window.

23. Within the TextEdit application window, change the all of the current Senographe system IP
addresses from 192.168.1.x to match your preferred new address scheme (e.g.
192.168.100.x).
24. Save the /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd file (File > Save) and click the
button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor.
25. Copy the newly modified /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd file to the /
cp /export/home/insite/svcproxy_env.cmd /export/home/extra_tmp/
IPbak/svcproxy_env.cmd.new
su -
operator
27. Revert the permissions of some of the ADS configuration files back to their original state, as
follows:
a. Change the /etc/inet/hosts file to its original permissions, by entering:

chmod o-w /etc/inet/hosts

b. Change the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file to its original
permissions, by entering:
chmod u-w ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment
c. Change the ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg file to its
original permissions, by entering:
chmod u-w ~sdc/senovision/config/PositionerServer.cfg
exit
29. Reboot the system for the changes to take effect, by entering:
reboot
30. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop and ensure that the Service Desktop is
working as expected.
31. Shut down and power up the entire Senographe system.
32. After the reboot has completed, an S61 X-ray Beam not ready error message may
appear on the X-ray Console. This occurs because the Gantry CPU has to boot up after the
ADS computer. To restore communication between the Gantry CPU and the ADS computer,
on the X-ray Console press the O (off) button and then press the I (on) button.
40.3.7 Copy Backup Files from the IPbak Directory to CD-R
Use the following steps to copy the Senographe system log files to a writable CD-R disk.
1. Insert a writable CD-R disk into the Senographe system writable CD-ROM drive.
3. Run the BurnCdr.sh script to copy the contents of the /export/home/extra_tmp/
IPbak directory to the CD-R disk, with a CD volume name of your choice, by entering:
BurnCdr.sh -i -k -v <volumuename> /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/
where <volumuename> is your preferred name for the CD volume name (e.g.
IPbackup).
4. Once the BurnCdr.sh script completes copying the log files to the CD-R disk, you are
prompted to eject the CD-ROM. Accept the prompt, remove the CD-R disk from the CD-
ROM drive and close the CD-ROM drive.
5. Exit the command window by entering:
exit
The command window closes.

40.3.8 Completion
1. Make a noticeable entry in the maintenance log book that the internal IP addresses of the
Senographe system have been changed.
2. Explain to the customer that each time they power on the Senographe system they may see
the following message on the X-ray Console: S61 X-ray Beam not ready
Explain to them that this is normal and due to the fact that the Gantry CPU has to boot
up after the ADS computer. Explain to the customer that a simple reboot of the Gantry
CPU removes the error and restores communication between the Gantry CPU and the
ADS computer.
Explain to the customer that once the system has fully powered up, that on they X-ray
Console they simply have to press the O (off) button and then press the I (on) button.
You can demonstrate this to them as follows:
1. Power off the Senographe system from the ADS software interface.
2. Power on the system from the X-ray Console (press the I (on) button).
3. Login as sdc so that the ADS software is running.
4. Point out the S61 X-ray Beam not ready error message on the X-ray Console.
5. Press the O (off) button on the X-ray Console (this action powers down the Gantry
CPU but not the ADS Computer).
6. Press the I (on) button on the X-ray Console (this action powers on the Gantry CPU
which then establishes a network connection with the ADS Computer).
7. Point out that the S61 X-ray Beam not ready error message no longer appears
on the X-ray Console.
40.3.9 Steering Guide For Future Component Upgrades
If you ever upgrade the software on any of the Senographe components in the future you must
ensure that the internal IP addresses are re-configured back to their default values before you
run the software upgrade for that component. To do this you would proceed as described in the
following sub section.
40.3.9.1 Steering Guide for Future AWS Software Upgrades on the ADS Computer
If you want to upgrade the AWS Workstation software on the ADS Computer, proceed as
follows:
1. Perform Section 40.3.6 to re-configure each of the files on the ADS Computer back to their
default 192.168.1.0 network address scheme.
2. Run the upgrade of the AWS Workstation software on the ADS Computer.
3. Perform Section 40.3.6 to re-configure each of the files on the ADS Computer back to your
preferred network address scheme (e.g. 192.168.100.0 network).
40.3.9.2 Steering Guide for Future Software Upgrades on the IDC
If you want to upgrade the software on the IDC, proceed as follows:

1. Perform Section 40.3.3to re-configure the IDC back to the default IP address of
192.168.1.20.
3. Run the upgrade of the software on the IDC.
4. Perform Section 40.3.3 to re-configure the IDC back to your preferred IP address (e.g.
192.168.100.20).
40.3.9.3 Steering Guide for Future Software Upgrades on the Gantry CPU
If you want to upgrade the software on the Gantry CPU, proceed as follows:
1. Perform to Section 40.3.4 re-configure the Gantry CPU back to the default IP address of
192.168.1.40.
3. Run the upgrade of the software on the Gantry CPU.
4. Perform Section 40.3.4 to re-configure the Gantry CPU to your preferred IP address (e.g.
192.168.100.40).
40.4 Finalization

41 Job Card ELE A055b - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT2 network)

Personnel
Requirements
41.2 Overview
network (INT1) and one external network (EXT) as shown in Illustration 5-46. In the pre-upgrade
situation, the ADS computer had one network interface card (NIC) on the internal network and
the other network card on the external network connected to the hospital. In the pre-upgrade
case, if there was a conflict with the hospital network, the IP address scheme of the internal
network (INT1) would have needed modifying to stop the conflict.

Illustration 5-46: Clash with the hospital network in a pre-upgrade scenario
networks (INT1 and INT2) and one external network (EXT) as shown in Illustration 5-47.
• The original internal network (INT1) remains the same, and is for the internal
communications between the ADS Computer, IDC, and Gantry CPU Board, and can still
clash with the hospital network.
• The second and new internal network (INT2) is for the internal communications between the
ADS Computer and the Reconstruction Computer, and this network can also conflict with the
hospital network.
360 41 Job Card ELE A055b - Changing Internal IP

Illustration 5-47: Clash with the hospital network in a post-upgrade scenario
Case 1 — Before the upgrade the hospital clashed with the internal network of the system
If there was originally a conflict with the hospital network before the upgrade, the IP address
scheme of the first internal network (INT1) will need modifying according to the instructions in
Job Card ELE A055a - Changing Internal IP Addressing (INT1 network) to stop the conflict.
Case 2 — Before the upgrade the hospital did not clash with the internal network of the system,
but after the upgrade there is a clash
In the post upgrade case, if there is a conflict with the hospital network, the IP address scheme
of the second internal network (INT2) needs modifying according to the instructions in this Job
Card to stop the conflict.

By default, the second internal network (INT2) consists of:

• the ADS Computer e1000g0 NIC with an IP Address of 192.168.2.10 on a netmask of
255.255.255.0 (24 network) — this is denoted as 192.168.2.10/24 in some configuration
files
• the Reconstruction Computer eth0 NIC with an IP Address of 192.168.2.50 on a netmask of

255.255.255.0 (24 network) — this is denoted as 192.168.2.50/24 in some configuration
files
A conflict will occur when the host IP address range assigned to the hospital falls within the
same range as the second internal network (INT2) between the ADS Computer and the
Reconstruction Computer. To know whether a conflict will occur, you must use both the network
and netmask of the hospital to calculate the host IP address range of the hospital so see
whether it conflicts with second internal network (INT2) between the ADS Computer and the
Reconstruction Computer.
• If the calculated hospital host IP address range falls within the same range as the second
internal network (INT2) between the ADS Computer and the Reconstruction Computer, a
conflict will occur and you must apply this Job Card in order to resolve the conflict.
• If the calculated hospital host IP address range does not fall within the same range as the
second internal network (INT2) between the ADS Computer and the Reconstruction
Computer, a no conflict will occur and no further action is required.
If a conflict exists between the hospital network and the second internal network (INT2) between
the ADS Computer and the Reconstruction Computer, you must use another internal non-
routable IP Addressing scheme that does not conflict with the hospital network and does not
conflict the first internal network (INT1) between the ADS Computer and the IDC Computer and
Gantry CPU Board. If a conflict exists between, it is recommended to use 10.0.1.0 network with
a netmask of 255.255.255.0 (24 common prefix bits in the netmask), such that you will change
the second internal network (INT2) to use the following:
• the ADS Computer e1000g0 NIC with an IP Address of 10.0.1.10 on a netmask of
255.255.255.0 (24 common prefix bits in the netmask) — this is denoted as 10.0.1.10/24 in
some configuration files
• the Reconstruction Computer eth0 NIC with an IP Address of 10.0.1.50 on a netmask of

255.255.255.0 (24 common prefix bits in the netmask) — this is denoted as 10.0.1.50/24 in
some configuration files
Table 5-21 summarizes the changes you will make on the Reconstruction Computer.
Table 5-21: Summary of changes required on Reconstruction Computer
File Entry in file Entry represents Original value Changed value for
for entry entry
/etc/hosts The current ADS host‐ ADS e1000g0 NIC 192.168.2.10 10.0.1.10
name (e.g. P15). IP Address
reconbox Reconstruction 192.168.2.50 10.0.1.50
Computer eth0 NIC
IP Address

File Entry in file Entry represents Original value Changed value for
for entry entry
/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg- IPADDR= Reconstruction 192.168.2.50/24 10.0.1.50/24
eth0 Computer eth0 NIC
IP Address
/recon-software/netserver/ set_host_address on ADS e1000g0 NIC 192.168.2.10 10.0.1.10
Prefs/SdCRHosts second line IP Address
set_host_address on Reconstruction 192.168.2.50 10.0.1.50

fourth line Computer eth0 NIC
IP Address
set_storage_address Reconstruction 192.168.2.50 10.0.1.50
on fourth line Computer eth0 NIC
IP Address
41.3 Procedure
41.3.1 Modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the
Perform the following steps to modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on
the Reconstruction Computer so that it no longer conflicts with the hospital network. Since the
ADS Computer is used to access the Reconstruction Computer, you must perform these steps
before modifying the configuration on the ADS Computer. In the examples below, the hostname
(station name) of the ADS Computer is P15 (which does not need changing). These steps must
be used if there is a conflict with the hospital network in the following situations:
• at installation/upgrade time
• if the Reconstruction Computer SW is reloaded
• if the Reconstruction Computer is changed
entering:
ssh recon@reconbox
su — root
@!Fab3ts
4. Change to the /etc directory, by entering:

cd /etc
5. Make a backup of the hosts file, by entering:
cp hosts hosts.bac
6. Edit the hosts file by entering:
vi hosts
7. Use the cursor keys to move down to the end of the file where the two entries for the current
ADS hostname (e.g. P15) and reconbox exist.
9. Change the IP address in the ads-ext line from 192.168.2.10 ads-ext to 10.0.1.10
ads-ext.
10. Change the IP address in the reconbox line from 192.168.2.50 reconbox to
10.0.1.50 reconbox.
11. Once finished changing the current ADS hostname and reconbox entries, press the <Esc>
key to leave insert mode.
12. Change to the /etc/sysconfig/network directory, by entering:
cd /etc/sysconfig/network
13. Make a backup of the ifcfg-eth0 file, by entering:
cp ifcfg-eth0 ifcfg-eth0.bac
14. Edit the ifcfg-eth0 file by entering:
vi ifcfg-eth0
15. Use the cursor keys to move down in the file where the entry for IPADD= exists.
17. Change the IP address in the IPADDR= line from IPADDR=’192.168.2.50/24’ to
IPADDR=’10.0.1.50/24’.
18. Once finished changing the IPADDR= entry, press the <Esc> key to leave insert mode.
:wq
20. Change to the /recon-software/netserver/Prefs directory, by entering:
cd /recon-software/netserver/Prefs
21. Make a backup of the SdCRHosts file, by entering:
cp SdCRHosts SdCRHosts.bac
22. The SdCRHosts file contains one entry for the ADS Computer IP address on the second
line that will need changing, and two entries on the fourth line for the IP Address of the
Reconstruction Computer that will need changing. Edit the SdCRHosts file by entering:
vi SdCRHosts
23. Use the cursor keys to move down in the second line of the file where the entry for
set_host_address exists.

25. Change the IP address in the set_host_address entry from set_host_address
"P15" "192.168.2.10" to set_host_address "P15" "10.0.1.10".
NOTE: In the set_host_address entry above, P15 is an example ADS hostname, and the
actual ADS hostname will vary according to the ADS hostname orginally given to the
system.
26. Use the cursor keys to move down in the third line of the file where the entry for
set_host_address exists.
27. Change the IP address in the set_host_address entry from set_host_address
"reconbox" "192.168.2.50" to set_host_address "reconbox" "10.0.1.50".
28. Use the cursor keys to move further to the right of the third line of the file where the entry for
set_storage_address exists.
29. Change the IP address in the set_storage_address entry from
set_storage_address "reconbox" "192.168.2.50" to set_storage_address
"reconbox" "10.0.1.50".
30. Once finished changing the set_storage_address entry, press the <Esc> key to leave
insert mode.
:wq
32. Optionally restart the network, by entering:
/etc/init.d/network restart
exit
exit
41.3.2 Modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the ADS
Computer
Perform the following steps to modify the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on
the ADS Computer so that it no longer conflicts with the hospital network. Since the ADS
Computer is used to access the Reconstruction Computer, you must perform these steps after
modifying the configuration on the Reconstruction Computer. In the examples below, the
hostname (station name) of the ADS Computer is P15 (which does not need changing). These
steps must be used if there is a conflict with the hospital network in the following situations:
• at installation/upgrade time
• if the ADS Computer SW is reloaded
• if the ADS Computer is changed

41.3.2.1 Modify the Solaris Network Settings on the ADS Computer

su –
3. Run the system configuration mode by entering:
sys-unconfig
4. At the warning message that appears, answer y (yes) to continue.
5. The AWS shuts down. Wait until AWS power has been switched off by the UPS (AWS shut
down, power light on monitor goes out). Then press the UPS ON switch on the Generator
Cabinet to power up the AWS.
6. The AWS starts up in configuration mode.
7. The system now displays a succession of screens in which you must enter the network
parameters. Specify the network parameters as outlined in the following sections. Where
necessary, use the arrow keys to move the cursor, and use the <Return> key to select an
item.
8. At the Network Connectivity screen, ensure that Yes is selected for the Networked
option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
9. At the Configure Multiple Network Interface screen, ensure that only e1000g0
is selected from the list of Network Interfaces. Press the <Return> key to confirm the
selection, and then press the <F2> key to continue.

10. At the DHCP for e1000g0 screen ensure, that No is selected for the Use DHCP for
e1000g0 option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
11. At the Hostname for e1000g0 screen, type the existing hostmame of the Acquisition
Workstation in the Host name for e1000g0 field (in the example, P55 is used). Press
<Return> when done, and then press the <F2> key to continue.
12. At the IP Address for e1000g0 screen, type the new internal IP address (10.0.1.10) to
be used for the Acquisition Workstation in the IP address for e1000g0 field. Press <Return>
when done, and then press the <F2> key to continue.

13. At the Subnet for e1000g0 screen, ensure that Yes is selected for the System part of a
subnet option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
14. A Netmask screen appears with a default netmask of 255.255.255.0. Keep the default
netmask, and press the <F2> key to continue.
15. At the IPv6 for e1000g0 screen, ensure that No is selected for the Use IPV6 option, and
press the <F2> key to continue.

16. At the Set the Default Route for e1000g0 screen, ensure that Specify One is
selected for the Default Route for e1000g0 option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
17. At the Default Route IP Address for e1000g0 screen, enter the new IP address of
the Reconstruction Computer (10.0.1.50) for the default route. Press <Return> when done,
and then press the <F2> key to continue.
18. At the Confirmation Information for e1000g0 screen, ensure that the correct
information appears for the e1000g0 network interface, and press the <F2> key to continue.

A screen with Just a moment indicating a delay may appear while the settings for the
e1000g0 network interface are being stored.
19. At the Configure Security Policy screen, ensure that No is selected for the
Configure Kerberos Security option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
20. At the Confirm Information screen that appears displaying the Kerberos Security
settings, press the <F2> key to continue.

21. At the Name Service screen, use the Down arrow key to move to None Name service
option, then press <Return> to confirm the selection. Press the <F2> key to continue.
NOTE: Do not select NIS+ or NIS services. NIS+ is the primary selection.
22. At the Confirm Information screen that appears displaying the Name Service settings,

23. At the NFSv4 Domain Name screen, use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Use
the NFSv4 domain derived by system option. Press <Return> to confirm the
selection, then press the <F2> key to continue.
24. At the Confirm Information for NFSv4 Domain screen that appears, press the <F2>
key to continue.

25. At the Time Zone screen, use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Other - offset
from GMT region. Press <Return> to confirm the selection, then press the <F2> key to
continue.
26. At the Offset from GMT screen that appears, type 0 for the offset the press <Return> to
confirm the selection. Press the <F2> key to continue.

27. A Date and Time screen appears with some existing date and time settings.
Proceed as follows:
• If the date and time settings are incorrect, use the Up or Down arrow keys to move to
the field to be modified (as applicable). Type in the correct value, then press
<Return> to confirm the new value and move to the next field. When you are happy
with the date and time settings, press the <F2> key to continue.
• If the date and time settings are correct, press the <F2> key to continue.
28. At the Confirm Information screen that appears displaying the date and time settings,

29. The Root Password screen appears prompting you to specify a root password for the
Acquisition Workstation.
Type the required root password (usually operator) in both the Root password fields and
press the <Return> key when done. The password you type is not displayed. The default
password for root is operator.
NOTE: Ensure that the caps-lock key is not engaged before entering the password.
If there is a difference between the two entries, the system will request it again.
Press the <F2> key to continue.
30. When the configuration is complete, a System identification is completed
message appears. The system then automatically reboots.
41.3.2.2 Update the hosts file on the ADS Computer
2. Change to the /export/home/extra_tmp directory on the AWS, by entering:
3. Make an IPbak backup directory by entering:
mkdir IPbak


su –
5. Change the permissions of the /etc/inet/hosts ADS configuration file so it is writable by
other users, by entering:
exit
cp /etc/inet/hosts /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/hosts.original
8. Open the /etc/inet/hosts file with the vi command by entering:
vi /etc/inet/hosts
9. The /etc/inet/hosts file appears in the vi editor.
10. Within the vi editor, scroll down to the last entry which has 192.168.1.50 reconbox.
Press the <Esc> key and the <I> key to enter in insert mode, and change the IP address of
the Reconstruction Computer, so that the entry reads 10.0.1.50 reconbox . Once
finished with the modification, press the <Esc> key to leave insert mode.
:wq
12. Save the /etc/inet/hosts file (File > Save) and click the button in the top left of the
TextEdit window to exit the editor.
cp /etc/inet/hosts /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/hosts.new
sub-steps:
a. List all the symbolic links associated with the /etc/hosts file by entering:
ls -l /etc/hosts
hosts -> ./inet/hosts the symbolic link is set and you can go to
Step 15.
• If the command line output does not begin with lrwxrwxrwx and finishes
with hosts -> ./inet/hosts the symbolic link is not set and you
must go to Step 14.c.

rm -f /etc/hosts
d. Create a symbolic link from /etc/hosts is to /etc/inet/hosts by entering:
su –
16. Change the permissions of the /etc/inet/hosts ADS configuration file back to its
original state, by entering:
exit
18. Reboot the system for the changes to take effect by entering:
reboot
19. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop, and ensure that the Service Desktop is
working and can see the Reconstruction Computer as expected (i.e. the Service Desktop
Home Page shows the Reconstruction Computer details).
41.3.3 Reverting back the configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the
ADS Computer to the default values
In some situations (e.g. when changing the Reconstruction Computer or reloading the
Reconstruction Computer SW) you need to temporarily revert back the configuration of the
second internal (INT2) network on the ADS Computer so that it can communicate with the
Reconstruction Computer. Perform the following steps to temporarily revert back the
configuration of the second internal (INT2) network on the ADS Computer to the default values
so that it can communicate with a newly installed Reconstruction Computer. These steps must
be used if there is a conflict with the hospital network in the following situations:
• if the Reconstruction Computer SW is reloaded
• if the Reconstruction Computer is changed
41.3.3.1 Revert back the Solaris Network Settings on the ADS Computer


su –
3. Run the system configuration mode by entering:
sys-unconfig
4. At the warning message that appears, answer y (yes) to continue.
5. The AWS shuts down. Wait until AWS power has been switched off by the UPS (AWS shut
down, power light on monitor goes out). Then press the UPS ON switch on the Generator
Cabinet to power up the AWS.
6. The AWS starts up in configuration mode.
7. The system now displays a succession of screens in which you must enter the network
parameters. Specify the network parameters as outlined in the following sections. Where
necessary, use the arrow keys to move the cursor, and use the <Return> key to select an
item.
8. At the Network Connectivity screen, ensure that Yes is selected for the Networked
option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
9. At the Configure Multiple Network Interface screen, ensure that only e1000g0
is selected from the list of Network Interfaces. Press the <Return> key to confirm the
selection, and then press the <F2> key to continue.

10. At the DHCP for e1000g0 screen ensure, that No is selected for the Use DHCP for
e1000g0 option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
11. At the Hostname for e1000g0 screen, type ads-ext for the Acquisition Workstation
hostname in the Host name for e1000g0 field (in the example, P55 is used). Press <Return>
when done, and then press the <F2> key to continue.
NOTE: It is important you specify ads-ext for the Acquisition Workstation hostname
because the default ADS hostname expected on a new Reconstruction
Computer or new software installation on the Reconstruction Computer is
ads-ext. You will change the Acquisition Workstation hostname again later
on once the Reconstruction Computer has been re-configured.

12. At the IP Address for e1000g0 screen, type the default internal IP address
(192.168.1.10) to be used for the Acquisition Workstation in the IP address for e1000g0
field. Press <Return> when done, and then press the <F2> key to continue.
13. At the Subnet for e1000g0 screen, ensure that Yes is selected for the System part of a
subnet option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
14. A Netmask screen appears with a default netmask of 255.255.255.0. Keep the default
netmask, and press the <F2> key to continue.
15. At the IPv6 for e1000g0 screen, ensure that No is selected for the Use IPV6 option, and

16. At the Set the Default Route for e1000g0 screen, ensure that Specify One is
selected for the Default Route for e1000g0 option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
17. At the Default Route IP Address for e1000g0 screen, enter the default internal IP
address of the Reconstruction Computer (192.168.1.50) for the default route. Press
<Return> when done, and then press the <F2> key to continue.
18. At the Confirmation Information for e1000g0 screen, ensure that the correct
information appears for the e1000g0 network interface, and press the <F2> key to continue.

A screen with Just a moment indicating a delay may appear while the settings for the
e1000g0 network interface are being stored.
19. At the Configure Security Policy screen, ensure that No is selected for the
Configure Kerberos Security option, and press the <F2> key to continue.
20. At the Confirm Information screen that appears displaying the Kerberos Security
settings, press the <F2> key to continue.

21. At the Name Service screen, use the Down arrow key to move to None Name service
option, then press <Return> to confirm the selection. Press the <F2> key to continue.
NOTE: Do not select NIS+ or NIS services. NIS+ is the primary selection.
22. At the Confirm Information screen that appears displaying the Name Service settings,

23. At the NFSv4 Domain Name screen, use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Use
the NFSv4 domain derived by system option. Press <Return> to confirm the
selection, then press the <F2> key to continue.
24. At the Confirm Information for NFSv4 Domain screen that appears, press the <F2>
key to continue.

25. At the Time Zone screen, use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Other - offset
from GMT region. Press <Return> to confirm the selection, then press the <F2> key to
continue.
26. At the Offset from GMT screen that appears, type 0 for the offset the press <Return> to
confirm the selection. Press the <F2> key to continue.

27. A Date and Time screen appears with some existing date and time settings.
Proceed as follows:
• If the date and time settings are incorrect, use the Up or Down arrow keys to move to
the field to be modified (as applicable). Type in the correct value, then press
<Return> to confirm the new value and move to the next field. When you are happy
with the date and time settings, press the <F2> key to continue.
• If the date and time settings are correct, press the <F2> key to continue.
28. At the Confirm Information screen that appears displaying the date and time settings,

29. The Root Password screen appears prompting you to specify a root password for the
Acquisition Workstation.
Type the required root password (usually operator, unless the customer wants
something different) in both the Root password fields and press the <Return> key when
done. The password you type is not displayed. The default password for root is operator.
NOTE: Ensure that the caps-lock key is not engaged before entering the password.
If there is a difference between the two entries, the system will request it again.
Press the <F2> key to continue.
30. When the configuration is complete, a System identification is completed
message appears. The system then automatically reboots.
41.3.3.2 Revert back the hosts file on the ADS Computer
2. Change to the /export/home/extra_tmp directory on the AWS, by entering:
3. If necessary, make an IPbak backup directory by entering:
mkdir IPbak


su –
operator
5. Change the permissions of the /etc/inet/hosts ADS configuration file so it is writable by
other users, by entering:
exit
cp /etc/inet/hosts /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/hosts.original2
8. Open the /etc/inet/hosts file with the iv command by entering:
vi /etc/inet/hosts
9. The /etc/inet/hosts file appears in the vi editor.
10. Within the vi editor, scroll down to the last entry which has 10.0.1.50 reconbox. Press
the <Esc> key and the <I> key to enter in insert mode, then change the IP address of the
Reconstruction Computer back to its default value, so that the entry reads 192.168.2.50
reconbox . Once finished with the modification, press the <Esc> key to leave insert mode.
:wq
cp /etc/inet/hosts /export/home/extra_tmp/IPbak/hosts.new2
sub-steps:
a. List all the symbolic links associated with the /etc/hosts file by entering:
ls -l /etc/hosts
hosts -> ./inet/hosts the symbolic link is set and you can go to
Step 14.
• If the command line output does not begin with lrwxrwxrwx and finishes
with hosts -> ./inet/hosts the symbolic link is not set and you
must go to Step 13.c.

rm -f /etc/hosts
d. Create a symbolic link from /etc/hosts is to /etc/inet/hosts by entering:
su –
15. Change the permissions of the /etc/inet/hosts ADS configuration file back to its
original state, by entering:
exit
17. Reboot the system for the changes to take effect by entering:
reboot
18. From the Browser, launch the Service Desktop, and ensure that the Service Desktop is
working and can see the Reconstruction Computer as expected (i.e. the Service Desktop
Home Page shows the Reconstruction Computer details).
41.4 Finalization


Chapter 6 Calibrations and Configuration

1 Job Card CAL A001 - Detector Gain Calibration 3D
Personnel
Requirements
1.2 Overview
The goal of gain calibration is to compensate for differences in pixel responses and differences
in electronic gain. This calibration makes the image of a flat uniform object look flat (flat field
uniformity).
Flat field phantom 1 - 5144828 -
1.3.2 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
CAUTION
Risks of exposure to X-rays.
This procedure produces X-rays.
Ensure that you take appropriate precautions when operating with X-rays. For
example stay behind the radiation screen during an X-ray exposure.
The system has been powered since at - -
least 10 min.
The MTD is inserted. - -
The system is in 2D mode. - -
No compression paddle is inserted. - -
The Tube Head Covers are installed on - -
the Tube Head
Chapter 6 Calibrations and Configuration 391

1.4 Procedure
1.4.1 Detector Gain Calibration
Before proceeding with the following Detector Gain Calibration procedure, ensure that the Tube
Head Covers are installed on the Tube Head.
1. Insert the MTD.
2. Launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, Section 5.2.1, Launching the Service Desktop)
3.
From the Service Desktop, click the [Calibration] button and select Detector, after
Summary display, click again on Detector.
4. Select the Gain radio button, then click [START].
NOTE: The displayed configurations to calibrate will be MTD specific calibrations. If
the MTD is not inserted, the displayed configurations to calibrate will be the
normal non MTD configurations.
5. Before starting the calibration, follow the on-screen instructions for pre-requisites.
6. Select the configuration that you want to calibrate and [START].
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the system.
Install the flat field phantom (25 mm of acrylic) on the MTD carbon cover.
8. You are requested to:
a. Check that the collimator is in full FOV.
NOTE: Check that the system is in 2D mode.
b. Perform an acquisition.
The system checks image quality based on this acquisition.
The IQ check technique and parameters are set automatically.
9. If the check is successful, the system asks you to make a 3D acquisition (see 3D exposure
sequence) to perform gain calibration.
The system selects the calibration technique and parameters and computes the gain
map.
The system displays a message to indicate successful completion.
CAUTION
Risk of crushing injury
If the MTD is not put into 3D mode after being in 2D mode, upon performing
angulation, the MTD Carbon Cover plane will move with the Arm and the Flat
Field Phantom will slide onto the floor.
Ensure you put the MTD in 3D mode so that the plane of the MTD Carbon Cover
surface remains fixed when performing the angulation.
10. Click on the [Complete] button in the Service Desktop.
11. Repeat the procedure for each of the listed techniques.
392 1 Job Card CAL A001 - Detector Gain Calibration 3D

The following table lists the techniques that must be calibrated, with specified
parameters and configurations.
IQ check technique
Calibration technique
NOTE: Both techniques are set

3D Technique listed in Service Desktop automatically. However, Configuration IQ check
(Technique for calibration) check that they are dis‐ Configuration calibration
played on the X-ray Con‐
sole when performing the
calibration.
IQ Check: MTD inserted, no paddle in‐

Mo/Mo 26 kV 64 mAs, LF; serted, flat field phantom on MTD carbon
MTD, 3D, LF, Mo/Mo, 27kVp cover.
(Mo/Mo/LF/MTD) Gain calibration: MTD inserted, no pad‐
Mo/Mo 27 kV 500 mAs, LF dle inserted, flat field phantom on MTD
carbon cover.

Mo/Rh 28 kV 36 mAs, LF serted, flat field phantom on MTD carbon
MTD, 3D, LF, Mo/Rh, 29kVp cover.
(Mo/Rh/LF/MTD) Gain calibration: MTD inserted, no pad‐
Mo/Rh 29 kV 280 mAs, LF dle inserted, flat field phantom on MTD
carbon cover.

Rh/Rh 30 kV 32 mAs, LF serted, flat field phantom on MTD carbon
MTD, 3D, LF, Rh/Rh, 31kVp cover.
(Rh/Rh/LF/MTD) Gain calibration: MTD inserted, no pad‐
Rh/Rh 31 kV 180 mAs, LF dle inserted, flat field phantom on MTD
carbon cover.
1.4.2 Corrective actions after failure

If an error is found, the system displays an error message and requests further action. Possible
error messages are:
1. IQ check failed - Detector not ready:
• The system informs you that the IQ check failed because the check for detector lag
failed, or because the detector temperature was outside limits.
• The system then requests you to try the test again after a 15 minute delay or after
the detector temperature has stabilized.
2. IQ check failed - system configuration is not OK. The system asks you to
repeat the IQ check after checking the system configuration:
a. Remove the paddle if it is inserted.
b. Check the phantom position.
c. Check that there are no collimator blade in the field of view:
i. Make a 3D acquisition in the Medical application in the following
conditions:
• Track/Filter: Mo/Mo
• 27 kV

• 500 mAs
ii. On the ADS, check in the projections that the X-ray beam field covers the
detector field of view by adjusting the contrast such that window width is
less than 200.
If collimator blades are visible at the borders, check tube tilt,
centering, and collimator format calibrations.
If necessary repeat these calibrations.
If the system displays the message IQ check failed - system configuration
is not OK again, contact your OLC.
1.5 Finalization

2 Job Card CAL A043 - Detector Gain Calibration 2D MTD

Personnel
Requirements
2.2 Overview
The goal of gain calibration is to compensate for differences in pixel responses and differences
in electronic gain. This calibration makes the image of a flat uniform object look flat (flat field
uniformity).
Flat field phantom 1 - 5144828 -
2.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
The system has been powered since at - -
least 10 min.
No compression paddle is inserted. - -
2.4 Procedure
2.4.1 Detector Gain Calibration
1. Insert the MTD.
2. Launch the Service Desktop (see Chapter 4, Section 5.2.1, Launching the Service Desktop)
3.
From the Service Desktop, click the [Calibration] button and select Detector, after
Summary display, click again on Detector.
4. Select the Gain radio button, then click [START].

NOTE: The displayed configurations to calibrate will be MTD specific calibrations. If

the MTD is not inserted, the displayed configurations to calibrate will be the
normal non MTD configurations.
5. Before starting the calibration, follow the on-screen instructions for pre-requisites.
6. Select the configuration that you want to calibrate and [START].
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the system.
Install the flat field phantom (25 mm of acrylic) on the MTD carbon cover.
8. You are requested to:
a. check that the collimator is in full FOV,
b. make an exposure for an image quality check
The IQ check technique and parameters are selected automatically.
9. If the check is successful you are requested to make four exposures for gain calibration. The
system selects the calibration technique and parameters.
The system uses information from the four exposures to update the gain map.
The system displays a message to indicate successful completion.
10. Click the [Complete] button in the Service Desktop.
11. Repeat the procedure for each of the listed techniques in Table 6-1.
The following table lists the techniques that must be calibrated, with specified
parameters and configurations.
Table 6-1: 2D Detector Gain Technique
IQ check technique
calibration.

Mo/Mo 26 kV 64 mAs, LF serted, flat field phantom on MTD carbon
MTD, 2D, LF, Mo/Mo, 26kVp cover.
(Mo/Mo/LF/MTD) Gain calibration: MTD inserted, no pad‐
Mo/Mo 26 kV 320 mAs, LF dle inserted, flat field phantom on MTD
carbon cover.

Mo/Rh 28 kV 36 mAs, LF serted, flat field phantom on MTD carbon
MTD, 2D, LF, Mo/Rh, 28kVp cover.
(Mo/Rh/LF/MTD) Gain calibration: MTD inserted, no pad‐
Mo/Rh 28 kV 180 mAs, LF dle inserted, flat field phantom on MTD
carbon cover.

MTD, 2D, LF, Rh/Rh, 30kVp
Rh/Rh 30 kV 32 mAs, LF serted, flat field phantom on MTD carbon
(Rh/Rh/LF/MTD)
cover.

MTD
IQ check technique
calibration.
Gain calibration: MTD inserted, no pad‐

Rh/Rh 30 kV 160 mAs, LF dle inserted, flat field phantom on MTD
carbon cover.

If an error is found, the system displays an error message and requests further action. Possible
error messages are:
1. IQ check failed - Detector not ready:
• The system informs you that the IQ check failed because the check for detector lag
failed, or because the detector temperature was outside limits.
• The system then requests you to try the test again after a 15 minute delay or after
the detector temperature has stabilized.
2. IQ check failed - system configuration is not OK. The system asks you to
repeat the IQ check after checking the system configuration:
a. Remove the paddle if it is inserted.
b. Check the phantom position.
c. Check that there are no collimator blade in the field of view:
i. Make an acquisition in the Medical application for each of the techniques
in Table 6-1.
ii. On the ADS, check in the projections that the X-ray beam field covers the
detector field of view by adjusting the contrast such that window width is
less than 200.
If collimator blades are visible at the borders, check tube tilt,
centering, and collimator format calibrations.
If necessary repeat these calibrations.
If the system displays the message IQ check failed - system configuration
is not OK again, contact your OLC.
2.5 Finalization

3 Job Card CAL A048 - Calibration of Compression Force Sensor MTD

Personnel
Requirements
3.2 Overview
The compression force sensor of the MTD is factory calibrated. The compression force sensor
of the MTD must be calibrated in one of the following situations:
• If the compression force check failed.
• If the MTD software was reloaded.
The calibration establishes a suitable transfer function relating the signal from the MTD internal
force sensor to the true force. This is done by comparing the force reported by the internal
sensor with the force measured externally by a calibrated force detector at several points over
the working range. The system software can then calculate compression forces to an accuracy
of 1 daN.
Calibrated force detector 1 - 46-194427P407 -
capable of measuring
compression force between
the compression paddle and
the image receptor: required
accuracy ±0.5 daN. The
Mammography compression
scale with digital display is
recommended.
Set of acrylic plates 1 - 2299008-2 -
3.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
398 3 Job Card CAL A048 - Calibration of Compression

Force Sensor MTD
CAUTION
Risks of pinching fingers in the paddle holder assembly during installation,
removal or changing the position of the compression paddle.
Slide the paddle onto or in the paddle holder taking care to keep fingers away
from the paddle holder assembly.
3.4 Procedure
3.4.1 Compression Force Sensor Calibration
1. Insert the MTD.
3. In the Calibration tab, click on the [Positioner] button.
The Calibration : Positioner Summary page is displayed.
4. Click on the [MTD Comp Force] button.
The MTD Compression Force Calibration page is displayed.
5. Click on the [START] button.
6. The Gantry readout displays the instructions to follow, summarized here:
• Insert the MTD.
NOTE: If the 3D light stays ON after it stops blinking, switch the system to 2D mode
• Insert the Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD.
NOTE: The MTD dedicated paddles are almost similar to the Core system paddles.
They are identified by a symbol on the metal part:
• Place a 10 mm acrylic plate (minimum dimensions 200 x 200 mm) on the MTD
carbon cover.
• Place the calibrated force detector on the acrylic.

7. The Gantry readout displays a series of force values to be applied, starting with 0 daN.
8. For each requested force, use the manual compression knobs to move the paddle down
until the external force detector displays the requested force. Press the collimator FOV size

button (lower button, behind the tube head) to signal to the system that the requested force
is applied and a measurement can be taken.
9. If an error message appears, follow the instructions of the message.
10. When all requested force values have been successfully measured by the system, save the
calibration results by clicking the [Save] button on the AWS screen.
If you wish to exit the calibration without saving the results (leaving the system un-
calibrated or using the previous settings), click the [Cancel] button on the AWS screen.
11. Navigate to the Calibration : Positioner Summary page.
12. Check that the LAST RUN STATUS of the MTD Thickness Calibration is GOOD.
3.4.2 Compression Force Sensor Calibration Check
NOTE: If you are re-calibrating a Compression board that already contains calibration
information then you can directly follow the verification steps below.
If you are calibrating a Compression board that does not contain calibration
information then you must manually move up the compression paddle and remove it,
then perform Compression Thickness Calibration as described in Job Card CAL A050
- Compression Thickness Calibration with the MTD before you follow the verification
steps below. If you do not perform these steps first then you will witness a 211/003
COMPRESSION CALIB NOT ACHIEVED error.
1. After completing the compression calibration procedure, return to normal application mode.
2. Insert the Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD, and upon insertion check the Gantry LCD
display to ensure the correct Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD is inserted.
3. Set the system as described in Section 3.4.1, Step 6, with the acrylic plate and the external
calibrated force detector in place on the MTD carbon cover.
4. Apply compression to the external calibrated force detector. The applied compression force
is measured by the system and displayed on the Gantry readout.
5. Use the manual compression knobs to apply compressions of 5, 10, 15 and 20 daN. For
each value, check that the forces displayed on the external detector and on the Gantry
readout agree within ±1 daN.
6. If any result is out of range, repeat the calibration procedure.
3.5 Finalization
400 3 Job Card CAL A048 - Calibration of Compression

Force Sensor MTD
4 Job Card CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset Calibration MTD

Personnel
Requirements
4.2 Overview
This Job Card should be used if you witness problems when peforming Chapter 7, Job Card
CHK-IQ A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check.
The present Job Card only refers to the paddle available with the option. To have more
information about the paddles delivered with the Core system, refer to the Job Card CAL A049 -
Compression Paddle Offset Calibration in the Core SIP.
Calipers 1 - - -
4.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
4.4 Procedure
4.4.1 Paddle Number References
The procedure to calibrate the final offset for each Compression Paddle uses a command,
whose syntax refers to the paddle number. Before proceeding, consult Table 6-2 to know which
paddle number corresponds to each of the Compression Paddles delivered with the option.

Table 6-2: Paddle Number References
Paddle Compression Paddle Name (Ref. Photo

Number Number on Label)
24 Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD

P/N: 5371140 or 5491700
25 Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD

P/N: 5480456 or 5491702
26 Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD

P/N: 5477279 or 5491701
For the references of the paddles delivered with the core system refer to the Job Card CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset
Calibration in the Core SIP
4.4.2 Display the existing Offset for Compression Paddles

Before specifying the final offset you must see if an existing offset is already declared. In order
to define the final offset, you will need to add the existing offset value to the current offset,
defined in Section 4.4.3. To display the existing offsets, proceed as follows:
1. From behind the Browser, launch a command window (See Launching a Command Line
Window in the Core SIP).
2. Make a Telnet connection with the Gantry CPU Board, by entering:
telnet pos
402 4 Job Card CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset

Calibration MTD
3. At the -> prompt that appears, display the existing offsets for the Compression Paddles, by
entering:
displayPaddleOffsets
A list of paddle offsets similar to the following appears.
---------------------------------------------------
No - Paddle Deformation Offset (1/10th mm))
---------------------------------------------------
1 - Flex 19x23 0
2 - Std 19x23 0
...
Only paddles for the MTD are useful here.
...
24 — 3D Standard 24x31 0
25 — 3D Std 19x23 Sliding 0
26 — 3D Elevated 24x31 0
4. The existing offset values are displayed in 1/10ths of a mm.
Record the displayed offset values (in 1/10ths of a mm) in column A of Table 6-3. Keep
the Telnet window open, as you will use it again in Section 4.4.4.
4.4.3 Define the Current Offset for Each of the Compression Paddles
Do the following to define the offset for each Compression Paddle:
1. Install the MTD if it is not installed.
2. Insert the Compression Paddle.
3. Use a set of calipers to measure the thickness of the 60 mm acrylic plate, and use this
measured value as the basis of the known thickness. Convert the known thickness in 1/10th
of a mm by multiplying the known thickness by 10. Record this converted value in column B
of Table 6-3.
4. Place the 60 mm acrylic plate (of known thickness) on the carbon cover of the MTD as
shown in Illustration 6-1.

Illustration 6-1: Positioning of the acrylic plate
5. Lower the Compression Paddle so that it is in contact with the 60 mm acrylic plate (of known
thickness), and apply a compression of 10 daN.
6. Calculate the offset between the thickness reported on the Gantry LCD Readout and the 60
mm acrylic plate (of known thickness), using the following equation:
Offset (in mm) = (known thickness of 60 mm acrylic plate - Gantry LCD Readout)
The offset can be a positive or negative value. The offset is positive if the known
thickness is greater than that displayed on the Gantry LCD Readout. The offset is
negative if the known thickness is less than that displayed on the Gantry LCD Readout.
7. Convert the calculated offset in 1/10 th of a mm by multiplying the offset by 10. Record this
converted value in column C of Table 6-3.
4.4.4 Specify final the Offset for Each of the Compression Paddles
Specify the final offset (in 1/10 th of mm) of the Compression Paddles on the Gantry CPU
board, as follows:
1. Calculate the final offset (in 1/10 th of mm) by adding the value from column A and column
C of Table 6-3.
2. At the -> prompt that appears, execute the following command for each of the Compression
Paddles whose offset you want to declare:
setPaddleOffset <paddle number>, <final offset in 1/10th of a mm>
where:
• <paddle number> is the paddle number corresponding to the Compression Paddle
you want to declare (see Table 6-2 for a mapping or paddle number to Compression
Paddles).

Calibration MTD
• <final offset in 1/10th of a mm> is the final offset (in 1/10th of a mm) that
you recorded in column D of Table 6-3.
For example, if for the Standard 24x31 paddle for MTD (paddle number 24) the initial
offset was -0.2 mm and the existing offset was -0.2 mm, the final offset is -0.4 mm. In
this case you would specify –4 for the final offset, by entering:
setPaddleOffset 24,-4
3. Repeat Step 2 for each of the Compression Paddles whose final offset you want to declare.
4. Check that the offsets for the Compression Paddles are correctly registered on the Gantry
CPU board, by entering:
displayPaddleOffsets
A list of paddle offsets similar to the following appears.
---------------------------------------------------
No - Paddle Deformation Offset (1/10th mm))
---------------------------------------------------
1 - Flex 19x23 0
2 - Std 19x23 0
...
Only paddles for the MTD are useful here.
...
24 — 3D Standard 24x31 —4
25 — 3D Std 19x23 Sliding 0
26 — 3D Elevated 24x31 0
5. If any of the final offset values are not as expected, repeat the procedure from Step 2 for the
appropriate Compression Paddle(s). If all of the offset values are as expected, continue with
the next step.
6. If you removed the 60 mm acrylic plate (of known thickness), place it back as shown in
Illustration 6-1.
7. For each Compression Paddle you changed the offset for, follow these steps:
a. Insert the Compression Paddle.
b. Apply a compression of 10 daN .
c. Verify the Gantry LCD Readout displays exactly the known thickness of the 60 mm
acrylic plate, as measured in Section 4.4.3, Step 3.
d. If the LCD readout does not display exactly the known thickness of the 60 mm acrylic
plate, repeat the calibration procedure starting from Section 4.4.3, Step 3.
8. If all of the values are as expected then exit the Telnet connection with the Gantry CPU
Board, by entering:
logout

Table 6-3: COMPRESSION PADDLE OFFSETS
Paddle Compression Paddle A B C D

Number Name (Ref. Number on Existing Offset Known Thickness in Calculated Offset in Final Offset to de‐
Label) displayed in 1/10th 1/10th of a mm 1/10th of a mm clare in 1/10th of a
of a mm mm
(i.e. value from Col‐
umn A + value from
column C)
24 Standard 24x31 Paddle

for MTD
5371140
25 Sliding 19x23 Paddle for

MTD
5480456
26 Elevated 24x31 Paddle for

MTD
5477279
4.5 Finalization
Restart the Gantry by powering OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.

Calibration MTD
5 Job Card CAL A050 - Compression Thickness Calibration MTD

Personnel
Requirements
5.2 Overview
The purpose of breast thickness calibration is to calibrate the absolute breast thickness
measurement which is given by a linear potentiometer linked to the compression carriage. This
is done by defining two points in the range of travel of the compression carriage.
5.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
5.4 Procedure
5.4.1 Compression Thickness Calibration
1. Insert the MTD.
3. In the Calibration tab, click on the [Positioner] button.
The Calibration : Positioner Summary page appears.
4. Click on the [MTD Breast thickness] button.
The MTD Breast Thickness Calibration page appears.
5. Read and follow the displayed instructions, and click on the [START] button.
The Gantry Readout displays the procedure to follow.

NOTE: If the message Prerequisite not fulfilled or wrong

configuration for calibration appears, you must adjust the position
of the MTD paddle holder to be in the middle of the vertical travel distance (i.e.
the bottom of the MTD paddle holder is 12 cm above the MTD Carbon Cover,
as shown in Illustration 6-2).
Illustration 6-2: MTD Paddle Holder Position
6. Press the footswitch continuously (do not release the compression pedal until the movement
stops automatically) to reach the lowest mechanical position of the MTD compression. Press
the collimator FOV size button (lower button behind the tube head) to register this position.
7. Press the footswitch continuously to reach the upper position and register this position with
the FOV size button.
8. If an error message appears, follow the instructions of the message.
9. Save the calibration results by clicking the [Save] button on the AWS screen.
NOTE: If you wish to exit the calibration without saving the results (leaving the system
un-calibrated or using the previous settings), click the [Cancel] button on the
AWS screen.
10. Click [OK].
11. Navigate to the Calibration : Positioner Summary page.
408 5 Job Card CAL A050 - Compression Thickness

Calibration MTD
12. Check that the LAST RUN STATUS of the MTD Thickness Calibration is GOOD.
5.4.2 Compression Thickness Calibration Check
NOTE: If you are re-calibrating a Compression board that already contains calibration
information (e.g. you are performing a re-calibration of an existing Compression
board) then you can directly follow the verification steps below.
If you are calibrating a Compression board that does not contain calibration
information then you must perform Compression Force Calibration described in Job
Card CAL A048 - Calibration of Compression Force Sensor MTD before you follow
the verification steps below, otherwise you will witness a compression-related error.
1. Insert the Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD.
2. Place the corner of a 40 mm thick acrylic plate, see A on Illustration 6-3.
The plate must be positioned at 45°, entering about 80 mm from the chest wall.
Illustration 6-3: Acrylic Plate Positioning
3. Lower the compression paddle into contact with the acrylic.

4. Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on
the Gantry readout), that the breast thickness displayed on the Gantry readout is equal to 40
mm +/- 2 mm.
5.5 Finalization
If the check fails, perform the Compression Thickness calibration again.
If after re-calibrating the check still fails, perform JC CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset
Calibration MTD.

6 Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration with MTD

Personnel
Requirements
6.2 Overview
This procedure will be done with the MTD.
NOTE: AOP Calibration is required to adapt AOP parameters to tube yield (mGy/mAs).
Flat Field Phantom 1 - 5144828 -
6.3.2 Safety
WARNING
THE PROCEDURES IN THIS JOB CARD PRODUCE X-RAYS. ENSURE THAT
YOU TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING WITH X-
RAYS (FOR EXAMPLE, STAY BEHIND THE RADIATION SCREEN DURING
AN X-RAY EXPOSURE).

6.4 Procedure
1. Close the exam window if it is open.
2. Install the MTD.
3. Insert the Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD (5371140).
4. Place the Flat Field Phantom on the MTD carbon cover.
5. Compress the Flat Field Phantom at 4 daN.
6. From the X-ray Console, enter the SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/
CALIB/MTD menu.
7. Press CALIB.
8. Press the [Exposure] button on the X-ray Console and hold it down. Three exposures are
taken (about 20 seconds) during which time the exposure status (1, 2, 3) appears on the X-
410 6 Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration with MTD

ray Console, then CALIBRATION END appears on the X-ray Console display. Release the
[Exposure] button .
NOTE: When making the AOP calibration exposure, there is a wait dig ready
message on the X-ray Console between prep and exposure. This message is
normal and you must keep the [Exposure] button pressed until the exposure is
complete.
9. Perform a checksum (SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CKSUM/CKSUM).
10. Exit the Calibration Menu by pressing SETUP five times.
6.5 Finalization
Restart the Gantry by powering OFF/ON from the X-ray Console.
If DMR version is 6.70 or higher and CESM is installed on the system, perform AOP CESM
calibration each time you perform AOP MTD calibration.

7 Job Card CFG A001 - Reconstruction Computer Configuration

NOTE: The sections below describe how (but not when) to configure the Reconstruction
Computer in terms of using the Service Desktop. The installation steering guide and
corresponding installation (IST) Job Cards later on in this Service Manual describe
when to perform the appropriate configuration.
7.1 Accessing the Reconstruction Computer Configuration Pages
The procedures in this Job Card assume you have already launched the Service Desktop.
The configuration interface of the Reconstruction Computer parameters is located in the
Configuration tab of the Service Desktop. To access it click on the Configuration→
Reconstruction node in the left part of the page. The right hand side of the Service Desktop
updates with links to each of the Reconstruction Computer configuration pages (see Section
7.2).
7.2 Reconstruction Computer Configuration Pages
In the right hand side of the Service Desktop, each Reconstruction Computer Configuration
Page is accessed by clicking the hyperlink corresponding to its name (1) (see Illustration 6-4).
Upon clicking any of the hyperlinks, the far right hand side (2) of the Service Desktop updates
with a corresponding Reconstruction Computer configuration page.
Illustration 6-4: Reconstruction Computer Configuration Page Navigation
The following Reconstruction Computer configuration pages exist, which allow you to configure
various aspects of the Reconstruction Computer:
• Access: Section 7.3
• DICOM: Section 7.4
412 7 Job Card CFG A001 - Reconstruction Computer

Configuration
• Image Quality: Section 7.5
• Networking: Section 7.6
To access a Reconstruction Computer configuration page, click on the appropriate hyperlink (1),
and the far right hand side (2) of the Service Desktop updates with a corresponding
Reconstruction Computer configuration page.
7.3 Access
The Access page (Illustration 6-5) is used to change the recon user and root user password.
Illustration 6-5: Access page
1. Select the appropriate user name (recon or root) from the User Name drop-down list.
2. Type the existing password for the selected user in the Old Password field.
3. Type the new password for the selected user in the New Password field.
4. Type the new password for the selected user in the Retype Password field.
5. Click on [Change password].
7.4 DICOM
The DICOM page (Illustration 6-6) is used to enable or disable the Lossy Compression option.
NOTICE
Turning Lossy compression mode ON reduces the quality of the sent sequence.
Check local regulations before activating the setting.

Illustration 6-6: DICOM page
1. Select ON or OFF.
NOTE: When set to YES, the Reconstruction Computer attempts to negotiate lossy
compression with the receiving reading workstation. If the receiving reading
workstation does not accept then the Reconstruction Computer it attempts to
negotiate Lossless and then no compression.
When this is set to NO, the Reconstruction Computer attempts to negotiate
Lossless or No Compression with the receiving workstation.
2. Click on [Submit].
7.5 Image Quality

The Image Quality page (Illustration 6-7) defines parameters affecting the quality of the images
produced by the Tomosynthesis application.
NOTE: Each parameter is followed by a quick definition explaining how it affects the quality of
the image produced by the Tomosynthesis application.
Illustration 6-7: Image Quality Page
To use this page see below:

1. Define the parameter or parameters (see Section 7.5.1).

Configuration
7.5.1 General IQ Configuration Parameters

The IQ page contains the following general IQ parameters:
• Z sampling
The Z sampling parameter defines the space between two planes in the reconstructed
volume. The permitted values are 0.5 and 1, corresponding to 0.5 mm and 1 mm sampling
granularity, respectively. The default value of 0.5 generates larger reconstruction volume file
sizes with a longer reconstruction time. The default value of 0.5 was used for clinical trials,
however both 0.5 and 1.0 are acceptable for clinical use. Unless the customer has limited
storage requirements or limited time requirements, it is recommended to leave the Z
sampling parameter to the default value of 0.5.
7.6 Networking
The Networking (Illustration 6-8) page is used to configure the Reconstruction Computer
external IP Address, external netmask, and Default gateway.
Illustration 6-8: Networking Page
1. Define the parameter or parameters.

7.6.1 Configuring the external network IP address and netmask

To configure the IP address and netmask of the eth1 network card connected to the hospital
network, do the following:
4. On the Networking page that appears, do the following:

○ In the External IP fields, enter a valid IP address for the Reconstruction Computer eth1
network card connected to the hospital network. The IP address will be provided by the
hospital network administrator.
NOTE: Before the system was upgraded, the External IP address was on the ADS
Computer. Typically (unless the hospital network administrator wants you to
use a different IP address) you will use the same External IP address that was
used on the ADS Computer before the system was upgraded.
○ In the Netmask fields, enter a valid netmask for the Reconstruction Computer eth1
network card connected to the hospital network. The netmask will be provided by the
5. Click the [Submit] button to apply the settings.
NOTE: If you change the External IP address of the Reconstruction Computer from its
existing value, the IP filters of the firewall on the Reconstruction Computer need
reloading according to the following steps so that the defined network hosts can
access the system:
1. Right mouse click the Browser background, and from the Root menu that appears,
select Service Tools→ Command window.
2. Reload the IP filters, by entering:
IPFreload.sh
3. When the Password: prompt appears requesting you to enter the root password,
enter:
An End of script message appears. The declared network hosts can now access
the Senographe system via the firewall on the Reconstruction Computer.
If the IP filters of the firewall on the Reconstruction Computer are not reloaded after
changing the External IP address of the Reconstruction Computer, storage
commitment will not work for any of the defined network hosts.
NOTE: The “Reconstruction — Networking” page of the Service Desktop overwrites
the /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-eth1 file, and does not keep the existing
the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules. In some cases a limited hospital network speed
requires that you edit the default ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules in the /etc/sysconfig/
network/ifcfg-eth1 file so that the Senographe system can communicate with
the hospital network. If you use the “Reconstruction — Networking” page of the
Service Desktop overwrites after manually editing the ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules in
the /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-eth1 file, you will need to re-edit the
ETHTOOL_OPTIONS rules in the /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-eth1 file to
match the maximum permitted speed of the hospital network. For more information,
see Chapter 5, Section 35., Make hospital network connection, and if necessary
restore Network Interface Card (NIC) speed settings.

Configuration
7.6.2 Configuring the default gateway

The default gateway was previously configured and stored on the ADS Computer. The default
gateway is now configured and stored on the Reconstruction Computer. To configure the default
gateway of the hospital network on the Reconstruction Computer, do the following:
4. On the Networking page that appears, in the Default Gateway fields, enter a valid IP
address for the hospital network default gateway. The IP address will be provided by the
5. Click the [Submit] button to apply the settings.
NOTE: If additional gateways need adding, they must be added manually by editing
the /etc/sysconfig/network/routes file. For more information, see Chapter 5,
Section 35., Adding additional gateways or default routes.

8 Job Card CFG A002 - Modify Tomo Volume Images Windowing Preset Order
Personnel
Requirements
8.2 Overview
This procedure can be used if:
• the review station is not able to toggle between windowing presets (NORMAL\HARDER
\SOFTER);
• the review station cannot change the default windowing preset;
• the review station user prefers to review the images with another window width than the
standard one.
This procedure permits to change the windowing width value in the default place in image
DICOM header (window width DICOM tag (0028,1051)). Once the procedure is applied, all DBT
volumes images generated have the window width modification in their DICOM header.
Therefore, an existing tomosynthesis acquisition can be reconstructed on the acquisition station
to get the change.
By Default, the windowing settings in the image DICOM header are the following: [NORMAL
\HARDER\SOFTER]. For instance these values can be changed to: [HARDER\NORMAL
\SOFTER]. To do so, enter the [HARDER] windowing width value in first position (default
position). The review station now displays the image by default with the "first position" window
width value.
NOTE: First reconstruction software version 0.10 (M3) has only one windowing preset.
Reconstruction software version that follows has three windowing presets.
Illustration 6-9: Review Station Windowing Default Preset Order NORMAL\HARDER\SOFTER.
3D windowing values in the scope of this service note are computed.

2D values out of the scope of this service note are fixed. For example 2D values are set to
normal=900/ harder=750/ softer=1050.
8.3 Procedure
1. From behind the Browser, right click the background, and from the Root menu that appears,
select Service Tools > Command window to launch a command window.
2. Login as root as follows:
418 8 Job Card CFG A002 - Modify Tomo Volume Images

Windowing Preset Order
1. At the ADS prompt enter:

su -
2. When requested to specify the root password, enter:
operator (or the customer-specified root password).
3. Establish an ssh connection as a recon user to the Reconstruction Computer, by entering:
ssh recon@reconbox
4. To retrieve current Contrast/Brightness setting, type:
/recon-software/recondoctor/recondoctor.sh -s /recon-software/
config/ Site.cfg WINDOWING_ORDER
NOTE: If the command displays no result, the windowing preset is the default one:
[NORMAL\HARDER\SOFTER.]
5. To modify Contrast/Brightness setting ordering, type:
/recon-software/recondoctor/recondoctor.sh -s /recon-software/
config/ Site.cfg WINDOWING_ORDER HARDER NORMAL SOFTER
This command line enables changing the order of the 3 settings. The order must reflect
customer's wish. The setting entered in first position becomes the default setting. The
new windowing preset order is applied to all the new Volumes images pushed to the
review station.
NORMAL HARDER SOFTER
NORMAL SOFTER HARDER
SOFTER NORMAL HARDER
SOFTER HARDER NORMAL
HARDER NORMAL SOFTER
HARDER SOFTER NORMAL
There is no need to reboot after changing the order of the settings. All 3D reconstruction
volumes will have the modified windowing preset.
NOTE: Windowing preset order (Contrast/Brightness) is part of recon backup/restore.
(See Job Card ELE A052 - Back-up/Restore Procedure in the core SIP and
Job Card UPG A007 - Reconstruction Configuration Restore in the Senoclaire
IM).
8.4 Finalization

420 8 Job Card CFG A002 - Modify Tomo Volume Images

Windowing Preset Order
Chapter 7 Checks
1 Job Card CHK A001 - Angulation Check
Personnel
Requirements
1.2 Overview
When the MTD is installed on a Senographe that is already in service, the cables between the
gantry arm and detector/MTD can be overstressed during angulation in 3D mode. This
procedure describes how to check for this problem, and how to rectify it by modifying the
detector cable set.
1.3.1 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
The MTD is plugged in. - -
1.4 Procedure
1.4.1 Column to Detector Earth Cables
1. Disassemble the Rotation arm and Detector covers.
2. On the column side, check the column-to-detector connections of the earth cables that are
connected to the lower three terminals. If they are connected as shown in Illustration 7-1:
Earth cable re-routing Before. Change the connections as follows:
a. Move W316 earth cable from the right terminal to the left terminal.
b. Move W001 earth cable from the left terminal to the middle terminal.
c. Move W317 earth cable from the middle terminal to the right terminal.
See Illustration 7-1: Earth cable re-routing After.
Chapter 7 Checks 421

Illustration 7-1: EARTH CABLE RE-ROUTING
NOTE: If the earth cables are not labelled, they will be easy to identify as follows:
• The W001 earth cable has a yellow end.
• The W316 and W317 earth cables have a red end. You can follow both
cables to their terminating point. The cable with the red end that terminates
at the base of the detector is the W316 cable.
3. Re-route the detector earth cable W316 and earth cable W001, so that they go directly to
the detector without turning around the metal plate, as shown in Illustration 7-2: New earth
cable routing.
Illustration 7-2: NEW EARTH CABLE ROUTING
422 1 Job Card CHK A001 - Angulation Check

NOTE: The ground bar shown in Illustration 7-2 is located on the lower right side of
the rotating arm, behind the right side of the detector.
1.4.2 Detector Cable Set
To verify whether the cabling needs to be modified, perform these steps.
1. Insert the MTD.
NOTICE
Be careful not to damage the cables while performing this test.
Stop the angulation and adjust the cables as described in Illustration 7-3: Cable
and hose alignment before they are over-stressed.
2. Observe the movement and the tension of the detector hoses and cables and the ground
wires in the following configurations:
• Rotation arm set at 0° with angulations from the start and end extremes.
• Rotation arm set at +90° with angulations from the start and end extremes.
• Rotation arm set at -90° with angulations from the start and end extremes.
3. There are marks (called the M3 marks) on the cables to show where they must align with the
lower face of the cable set retaining ring. Remove the cable set retaining ring half, and
check that the marks on the cables are aligned with the lower face of the retaining ring. The
M3 marks may be hidden by cable sheathing. Move the cable and hose set to align the M3
marks as shown in Illustration 7-3: Cable and hose alignment.
4. Check that the cables and hoses are arranged exactly as shown in Illustration 7-3: Cable
and hose Alignment and reposition them if not.
Illustration 7-3: CABLE AND HOSE ALIGNMENT

5. Measure the position of the M3 marks on the cables and hoses. They should conform to the
drawings in Illustration 7-4: M3 mark position. If the marks are not at the correct
measurement, the cable or hose must be replaced.
Illustration 7-4: M3 MARK POSITION
6. Replace the cable ties that were removed. It is important to leave a small amount of
movement of the cables and hoses, so do NOT tighten the cable ties to the maximum
possible.
424 1 Job Card CHK A001 - Angulation Check

7. Do the +/-12° angulation check described in step 1 above. If there is still too much tension in
the detector cable set, contact your OLC.
1.5 Finalization
Reassemble the Rotation arm and Detector covers.

2 Job Card CHK A002 - Compression Paddle Chest Wall Test

Personnel
Requirements
2.2 Overview
This test verifies that the paddle border aligns with the chest wall side of the detector.
Coin (e.g., a nickel, or a 5- 1 - - -
Eurocent coin).
2.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
2.4 Procedure
2.4.1 Compression Paddle Chest Wall Test
Both the Mo and Rh X-ray sources must be tested. Therefore, perform the test for both the Mo
and the Rh anode tracks with the following paddles:
• Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD
• Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD
• Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD
426 2 Job Card CHK A002 - Compression Paddle Chest

Wall Test
1. Install the MTD.

2. Tape the coin to the underside of the compression paddle as illustrated in Illustration 7-5.
The coin must be as close as possible to the tangent of the inner, vertical surface of the
compression paddle at the chest wall edge. Position the coin near the center of the chest
wall edge.
Illustration 7-5: Coin positioning on Compression Paddle
3. Insert the compression paddle and position it approximately 50 mm from the Breast Support.
NOTE: Use the thickness value displayed on the Gantry LCD readout.
4. From the Browser, open a new exam.
5. Make a manual exposure using the following parameters:
• track/filter combination:
○ Mo/Mo for the first exposure

○ Rh/Rh for the second exposure
• 25 kVp
• 4 mAs
6. Perform the measurements described in Section 2.4.2. Then determine if the Action Limits
have passed, as described in Section 2.4.3.
2.4.2 Compression Paddle (Coin) Measurements
You must perform the measurements and calculations described in the present section, and
complete the Step 6 tables based on the results. Items in bold italics are measured and items in
bold are calculated.
1. There are two possible geometric cases for the coin:

Illustration 7-6: Case 1 Illustration 7-7: Case 2
Case 1: The outer edge of the coin on the Case 2: The outer edge of the coin on the
compression paddle does not go past the de‐ compression paddle goes past the detector
tector edge. All of the coin is therefore in the edge. Part of the coin is therefore outside of
detector. the detector.
2. Examine the image and determine the geometric case.
• Case 1: all of the coin is in the detector,
there is a problem with the position of the compression paddle relative to the chest
wall edge of the detector:
○ remove the compression paddle,

○ verify that the coin did not move and is still positioned as shown in Illustration
7-5,
○ if the coin has moved, position it again and make another exposure and return to
Step 1 in the present section.
• If the problem is not solved:
○ verify that the MTD is correctly inserted and the red lines at the back of the
detector are hidden,
○ verify that there is no play between the that the plastic part and the metallic part
of the paddle,
○ verify that the paddle connection panel on the rear of the paddle is securely
fastened to the paddle,
○ if the play of the compression paddle or connection panel of the compression

paddle cannot be fixed, change the compression paddle according to Job Card
D/R A005 - Change compression paddle,
○ otherwise, make another exposure and return to Step 1 in the present section.

Wall Test
○ If none of the corrective actions above solved the problem, the mechanical parts
of the MTD may be faulty. Contact the OLC before changing the MTD.
• Case 2: part of the coin passes past the edge of the detector,
there is no problem with the position of the compression paddle relative to the chest
wall edge of the detector.
Continue with the measurements in the present procedure to determine whether the
edge of the compression paddle passes.
3. From the RAW digital image in the AWS, zoom in and use the Segment tool to measure the
following in the plane of the segment tool:
• diameter of the coin (Wd)
• partial diameter of the coin perpendicular to the edge of the image receptor (Pd)
Insert the measured values of Wd and Pd in the tables of Section 2.4.3, Step 1.
4. From the measured values of Wd and Pd, calculate the deviation (Z’d) between the alignment
of the edge of the compression paddle and the edge of the image receptor (in the plane of
the segment tool), from the following equation:
Z’d = (Wd - Pd)
NOTE: Because the reference plane of the Segment tool is 2 cm above the MTD carbon
cover the value needs to be scaled to the plane of the image receptor.
5. Use the following equation to scale the deviation calculated in the plane of the segment tool
(Z’d) to the deviation in plane of the image receptor (Zd):
Zd = Z’d • M
where:
• Zd = the calculation referenced to the image receptor plane.
• Z’d = the calculation made using the Segment tool.
• M = 1.063.
6. Insert the calculated value of Zd in the tables below and in the tables for in Section 2.4.3
Action Limit.
Table 7-1: Mo/Mo - Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD
Step 1 & 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Action limit

Geometric Wd Pd Z’d Zd(1.063 x Is the value of
Case Z’d) Zd less than
6.6 mm?
Coin (Bot‐
tom Edge)
(Chest
Wall)

Table 7-2: Rh/Rh - Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Coin (Bot‐
tom Edge)
(Chest
Wall)
Table 7-3: Mo/Mo - Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Coin (Bot‐
tom Edge)
(Chest
Wall)
Table 7-4: Rh/Rh - Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Coin (Bot‐
tom Edge)
(Chest
Wall)
Table 7-5: Mo/Mo - Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Coin (Bot‐
tom Edge)
(Chest
Wall)

Wall Test
Table 7-6: Rh/Rh - Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Coin (Bot‐
tom Edge)
(Chest
Wall)
2.4.3 Action Limits

The results from the Mo/Mo and Rh/Rh tests above must adhere to the following action limits:
• The chest wall edge of the compression paddle must be aligned just beyond the chest wall
edge of the image receptor, such that the chest wall edge of the compression paddle does
not appear in the mammogram.
• In addition, the chest wall edge of the compression paddle must not extend beyond the
chest wall edge of the image receptor by more than 1% of the SID, i.e. 6.6 mm.
1. Enter in the following tables the determined deviation between the alignment of the edge of
the compression paddle and the edge of the image receptor in the plane of the image
receptor for the coin. That is, the value Zd determined in Section 2.4.2, Step 5.
• If the value of Zd for the coin is less than 6.6 mm then this action limit has passed.
• If the value of Zd for the coin is more than or equal to 6.6 mm then this action limit
has failed.
Table 7-7: Mo/Mo - Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD
Edge Zd Is the value of Zd less than

6.6 mm?
Posterior (chest wall)
Table 7-8: Rh/Rh - Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Table 7-9: Mo/Mo - Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?

Table 7-10: Rh/Rh - Elevated 24x31 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Table 7-11: Mo/Mo - Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
Table 7-12: Rh/Rh - Sliding 19x23 Paddle for MTD

6.6 mm?
2. If any of these Action Limits are exceeded, the source of the problem must be identified, and
corrective actions must be taken, as follows:
• verify that the MTD is correctly inserted and the red lines at the back of the detector
are hidden,
• verify that there is no play between the plastic part and the metallic part of the
paddle,
• verify that the paddle connection panel on the rear of the paddle is securely fastened
to the paddle,
• if the play of the compression paddle or connection panel of the compression paddle
cannot be fixed, change the compression paddle according to Job Card D/R A005 -
Change compression paddle
• If none of the corrective actions above solved the problem, the mechanical parts of
the MTD may be faulty. Contact the OLC before changing the MTD.
2.5 Finalization

Wall Test
3 Job Card CHK A003 - Flat Field 3D

Personnel
Requirements
3.2 Overview
Objective
The Flat Field test measures the ability of the detector to reproduce the image of a flat and
homogeneous phantom.
The ideal response of the detector is a uniform image with:
• no pixel having a signal much higher or much weaker than its neighbors
• a uniform signal-to-noise ratio
The metrics to measure for are thus:

• Brightness Non Uniformity (BNU): the variation of the low spatial frequency brightness over
the image.
• Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) Non uniformity: the variation of signal-to-noise ratio over the
image.
Method
The flatfield image is analyzed by measuring the mean signal level and the noise in a moving
region of interest. The moving region of interest is a 20 mm x 20 mm region of interest scanning
the flatfield image with a 10 mm overlap.
The following checks are performed:
• Brightness Non uniformity (BNU): compute maximum deviation of the mean signals
measured in each ROI.
• Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) Non uniformity: compute maximum deviation of the SNR
measured in each ROI.

Flat Field Phantom 1 The phantom 5144828 -
must be clean
and free from
scratches.

3.3.2 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
No paddle is inserted. - -
The system is in 3D mode, i.e., the MTD - -
3D light is on.
To allow temperature of the detector to - -
stabilize, the system must be powered on
for at least 10 minutes before performing
any measurements related to detector
image quality. If any test is not passed
after allowing a 10 minute warm-up
period, see the Guidance section
reference in Action Limit.
The IQ Tools flat field test MTD 2D passes - -
successfully.
434 3 Job Card CHK A003 - Flat Field 3D

3.4 Procedure
3.4.1 Accessing the test
2. In the Image Quality tab, click on the [New Acquisition] button.
3. Click on the [MTD] button.
The MTD page is displayed.
4. Click on the [Flat field] button.
3.4.2 Performing the test
Follow the on-screen instructions.
1. Install the MTD and remove the compression paddle.
2. Press the 2D/3D motion selection button on the top of the MTD, and ensure that the 3D light
indicator on the MTD is illuminated.
3. Place the Flat Field Phantom on the MTD Carbon Cover.
4. Go to the 3D start position by pressing the angulation preset button.
5. Perform 1 tomographic acquisition (the parameters Mo/Mo, 26 kv, 40 mAs are automatically
set by the system), as follows:
• Press the 3D foot pedal.
• While keeping the 3D foot pedal pressed, press the Prep and Exposure buttons.
• Keep the 3D foot pedal, Prep button and Exposure button pressed for all the nine
exposures.
• When the blue Exposure Disabled indicator lights up, or you hear a beep, indicating
the end of the exposure sequence, release the 3D foot pedal, Prep button and
Exposure button.
6. After the tomographic acquisition is performed, several actions take place:
• The image of the flat field is displayed on the screen.
• The disabled buttons are enabled.

Clicking on [Brightness unif] or the [SNR uniformity] opens a new window showing
the image and the ROIs in which the measurement of the related parameter is
performed.
• The results of the test are displayed after approximately 5 to 7 minutes as a table, as
shown below:
Test Measurement LSL USL Status
Brightness Non value N/A 15.00 PASS/FAIL

Uniformity
SNR Non Uniform- value N/A 50.00 PASS/FAIL

ity

If any of the value in the Measurement column is above the corresponding USL, refer
to the corresponding section in Section 3.4.3 Corrective action in case of failure.
3.4.3 Corrective action in case of failure
3.4.3.1 Brightness Non Uniformity Test Fails
Typical causes are:
1. The Flat Field Phantom is scratched or there is dust on the detector.
a. Ensure the image receptor is completely clean.
If not, clean it.
b. Ensure the Flat Field Phantom is very clean and free from imperfections.
If the phantom is damaged replace it.
c. Run the test again.
2. The system’s default configuration parameters are not compatible with the Flat Field
Phantom.
a. From the Service Desktop, click the [Configuration] button.
b. Click the Reconstruction node.
c. On the Reconstruction page that appears, click the QAP link.
d. On the QAP page that appears, change the Z position flat field from its default value
of 25 mm to a different value (for example, 24 or 26). This value defines the top
plane of the Flat Field Phantom. For more information, see Flat Field 3D Test
Configuration Parameter.
e. Click the [Submit] button.
f. Run the test again.
g. Determine your next step:
• If the test passes, no further steps are necessary.
• If the test fails, set a different Z position flat field and try the test again
according to sub-steps Step 2.a to Step 2.f above.
• If the test fails after trying all the permitted Z position flat field values, set
the Z position flat field back to its default value of 25 according to sub-
steps Step 2.a to Step 2.e above, and continue with the rest of the trouble
shooting steps below.
3. The Flat Field phantom does not cover the full FOV. Check the position of the Flat Field
Phantom. The Flat Field phantom must exceed the detector field of view in every direction.
4. A collimator blade is within the FOV:
a. Make a 3D acquisition in the Medical application in the following conditions:
• Track/Filter: Mo/Mo
• 26 kV

• 40 mAs
b. On the ADS, check in the projections that the X-ray beam field covers the detector
field of view by adjusting the contrast such that window width is less than 200.
c. If collimator blades are visible at the borders, check tube tilt, centering, and
collimator format calibrations. If necessary repeat these calibrations.
5. The gain map is no longer valid.
a. Perform 3D gain calibration: Chapter 6, JC CAL A001 - Detector Gain Calibration 3D.
b. Flip the phantom and run the test again.
6. There is Dust on the light beam alignment mirror or on the Mo filter
a. Clean the mirror and Mo filter without direct contact according to the directions in Job
Card PM A255 - Collimator and Tube Head Cleaning in the Core SIP.
b. Run the flat field test again.
NOTE: In case dust is found, it is recommended to install the Dust Reduction Kit (P/N
5394527) to reduce this problem occurrence.
3.4.3.2 Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) Non uniformity Fails
Typical causes are:
1. The detector sensitivity is not uniform.
a. Locate in the graphical window the area having a poor SNR (low mean signal or high
standard deviation).
Check that there is no object in the field of view.
If there is an object, remove it and perform the test again.
b. Perform 3D gain calibration: Chapter 6, JC CAL A001 - Detector Gain Calibration 3D.
c. If the SNR Non uniformity result is still above the Upper Specification Limit, contact
your OLC for a possible detector replacement.
2. The system’s default configuration parameters are not compatible with the Flat Field
Phantom.
Contact GE Healthcare for a GE Field Engineer to re-configure the MTD Z-position.
3. The X-ray beam is badly centered.
a. Carry out the Job Card CAL A027 - Tube Tilt Calibration, described in the Core SIP.
b. Carry out the Job Card CAL A029 - Collimator Format Calibration, described in the
Core SIP.
4. There is Dust on the light beam alignment mirror or on the Mo filter
a. Clean the mirror and Mo filter without direct contact according to the directions in Job
Card PM A255 - Collimator and Tube Head Cleaning in the Core SIP.
b. Run the flat field test again.
NOTE: In case dust is found, it is recommended to install the Dust Reduction Kit (P/N
5394527) to reduce this problem occurrence.

3.5 Finalization
If after investigating and correcting the suggested causes of error, the test still fails, call your
OLC.

4 Job Card CHK A004 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score 3D

Personnel
Requirements
4.2 Overview
ACR Phantom
The phantom used in this procedure is a block of acrylic containing 16 cells. Each cell simulates
an anatomical structure which can be found in breast tissue.
The acrylic gives attenuation equivalent to a breast of average density compressed to a
thickness of 45 mm.
Starting from the top left-hand corner, as
shown in the illustration, the cells are of three
types:
• Fibers
Six cells represent fibrous calcifications;
they contain fibers with sections from 1.56
mm to 0.40 mm.
• Specks (Calcifications).
Five cells represent groups of specks or
microcalcifications, with sizes from 0.54
mm to 0.16 mm.
• Masses.
Five cells represent tumors or masses,
with sizes from 2 mm to 0.25 mm; each
has a different attenuation.
ACR Score
The ACR Score check program obtains and displays an image of the phantom. After suitable
adjustment of the viewing parameters, the user notes the visibility of the object in each cell,
using a 3-point scale of 1, 0.5, or 0. For each cell, score:
1 If the object (fiber, mass, or group of six specks) is completely visible.
0.5 If the object is partially visible, according to the following guidelines.
Fibers: More than half of the fiber is visible.
Masses: The mass does not appear circular, but is visible.
Specks: At least two specks are visible.
0 For all other cases


ACR standard phantom (16 1 The phantom - -
cells: Fluke Biomedical must be clean
Nuclear Associates 18-220 and free from
or RMI-156) scratches.
Review workstation capable 1 - - -
of viewing 3D volumes (for
example IDI station).
4.3.2 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD is - -
inserted.
440 4 Job Card CHK A004 - Image Acquisition and ACR

Score 3D
4.4 Procedure
1. Place the ACR phantom on the MTD carbon cover, against the chest wall side and laterally
centered, as shown in Illustration 7-8.
Illustration 7-8: ACR phantom positioning
NOTE: In order to center the phantom on the detector, you can use the 9x9 FOV light
localizer.
2. Lightly compress the phantom with the compression paddle.
3. Check that the collimator is in full FOV.
4. Go to the 3D start position by pressing the angulation preset button.
5. Make a manual Tomo acquisition in applications mode using the following parameters:
• track/filter combination: Rh/Rh
• 29kV
• 56mAs
6. Review the phantom reconstructed planes and slabs on the Review workstation capable of
viewing 3D volumes (for example IDI station).
NOTE: Different cells may be visible at different planes within the reconstructed
volume. When reviewing each of the 16 cells, move to the plane which best
displays that cell, and use the chosen plane for the scoring of that particular
cell. For more information about moving within different planes, refer to your
Review Workstation documentation.
7. Note the ACR score (1, 0.5, or 0, as described in the Procedure Overview) for each cell, and
total the scores for each type of cell (fibers, masses, speck groups). Enter the sum for each
type of cell in the corresponding cell of the Measurement column in the table below.
Pass/Fail
Masses 3.00 5.00
Speck groups 3.00 5.00
Fibers 4.00 6.00
Score 11.00 16.00

8. If the value in the measurement column is comprised between the corresponding LSL and
USL, the test status is Passed, otherwise it is failed.
4.5 Finalization
If the test fails, repeat the Job Card CHK A003 - Flat Field 3D and then try again. If the Flat
Field 3D test passes successfully but the ACR Score 3D test still fails, the cause must be
identified and corrected before further patient examinations are made.

Score 3D
5 Job Card CHK A005 - AOP check 3D

Personnel
Requirements
5.2 Overview
The test is designed to check the correct choice of parameters in AOP (Automatic Optimization
of Parameters) mode.
Set of acrylic plates 1 The plates 5151579 -
must be clean
and free from
scratches.
5.3.2 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION


The Standard 24x31 paddle for MTD is - -
inserted.
after allowing a 10-minute warm-up
5.4 Procedure
5.4.1 Accessing the test screen
1. From the Browser, click on the [QAP] button.
The MTD Tests page is displayed.
3. Click on the [AOP check] button.
The MTD 3D AOP check Tests screen is displayed with 4 buttons:
• [25mm]
• [50mm]
• [60mm]
• [Back]
These steps must be performed with 25 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm of triangular acrylic plates.
1. Click on the appropriate thickness button.
The MTD 3D AOP check Results screen is displayed:
2. Follow the on-screen instructions
1. Install the MTD and the Standard 24x30 paddle for MTD.
2. PutXmm acrylic plates on the MTD.
3. Align the longest side of the plates with the chestwall edge
of the MTD.
4. Center plates left-right. Apply a compression force of 5 daN.
444 5 Job Card CHK A005 - AOP check 3D

5. Perform 1 tomographic acquisition.

3. The acquisition parameters shall be within those displayed in the table below.
Exposure parameters
Thickness
Track/Filter mAs kVp
(mm)
25 Mo/Mo or Mo/Rh 20 - 70 26
50 Rh/Rh 40 - 90 29
60 Rh/Rh 50 -120 30 or 31
4. The results of the test for each thickness are displayed as a table.
5. If the value in the Measurement column is comprised between the corresponding LSL and
USL, the test status is PASS, otherwise it is FAIL.
6. Repeat the steps in this section for the remaining thicknesses.
5.5 Finalization
If you have a failure of one or more thicknesses during the execution of checks, perform the
following Job Cards in the order listed below:
1. Job Card CAL A045 - Conversion Factor Measurement from the Core SIP
2. Job Card CAL A053 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration from the Core SIP
3. Chapter 6, JC CAL A051 - AOP calibration MTD from this Service Manual
If after performing the Job Cards listed above, the AOP 3D check is still failing for one or more
thicknesses, perform the following Job Cards in the order listed below:
1. Chapter 6, JC CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset Calibration MTD from this Service
Manual
2. Chapter 6, JC CAL A051 - AOP calibration MTD from this Service Manual
If the test fails again, contact your OLC.

6 Job Card CHK A006 - Volume Coverage

Personnel
Requirements
6.2 Overview
This test ensures that the entire imaged object is reconstructed on the Z-axis.
Set of acrylic plates. 1 The plates 5151579 -
must be clean
and free from
scratches.
0.1 mm Aluminium sheets 2 - 800051–2060–2 Gammex
from Aluminium Half Value
Layer Attenuator Set
6.3.2 Safety
WARNING
RISK OF COLLISION.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
446 6 Job Card CHK A006 - Volume Coverage


To allow for temperature stabilization of - -
the detector, the system must be powered
on for at least 10 minutes before
performing any measurements related to
detector image quality.
6.4 Procedure
1. Place the Aluminium sheets and acrylic plates as shown on the figure below:
2. Insert the Standard 24x31 Compression Paddle for MTD, and compress the Aluminium
sheets and acrylic plates to 5 daN.
3. Make a manual exposure with the following parameters:
Thickness Track/filter kV/mAs
25 mm Mo/Mo 26 kV / 45 mAs
60 mm Rh/Rh 29 kV / 110 mAs
4. When the acquisition is done and the object is reconstructed, review the volume on the
review workstation and search the focal planes of the top and bottom Al sheets.
The focal plane of the top Aluminium sheet must be within the reconstructed volume.
The focal plane of the bottom Aluminium sheet must be within the reconstructed volume


If the test fails, Check the compression thickness calibration of the MTD (see Chapter 6, Section
5., Compression Thickness Calibration Check). Then perform the Volume coverage test again.
6.5 Finalization
448 6 Job Card CHK A006 - Volume Coverage

7 Job Card CHK A010 - Grid texture

Personnel
Requirements
7.2 Overview
The Grid Texture test aims the measurement of the amount of grid texture in 2D images. Grid
texture appears in images when the positioning of the MTD is different from the positioning used
to do the gain calibration.
Flat Field Phantom 1 The phantom 5144828 -
must be clean
and free from
scratches.
7.3.2 Safety
WARNING
OF THE MTD.
CAUTION
The rotation arm is at 0°. - -

7.4 Procedure
2. In the Image Quality tab, click on the [New Acquisition] button.
The MTD Tests page is displayed.
4. Click on the [Grid texture] button.
The MTD Grid texture Test screen is displayed.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions:
1. Install the MTD and remove the compression paddle.
2. Install the flatfield phantom on the MTD.
3. Perform ten 2D acquisitions.
NOTE: A progression bar shall inform the operator with the number of images
acquired.
After the acquisition is performed, several actions take place:

• The image of the flat field on which the measurements have been performed is
displayed.
• The results of the test are displayed as a table, as shown below:

Grid Texture Test Results YYYY_MM_DD,h:mn:sec
Texture Level value N/A 0.002 PASS/FAIL
Intermediate values
Parameters Values
Electronic Noise value
Quantum Noise value
Texture Noise value
Image Number Aquisition Parame- Average Detector Noise Energy

ters Dose (uGy) (counts)
1. MoMo 26 kV 5 mAs value value
450 7 Job Card CHK A010 - Grid texture

7.5 Finalization
If any of the value in the measurement column is higher than USL:
1. Remove the MTD.
Press the locking buttons under the detector.
2. Insert the MTD.
3. Perform the test again.
If any of the value in the measurement column is still higher than USL:
1. Perform Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A043 - Detector Gain calibration 2D MTD.
2. Perform the test again.
If any of the value are still higher than USL, contact your OLC.

8 Job Card CHK A011 - Ground Continuity and Leakage Current Tests
Personnel
Requirements
8.2 Overview
The parts of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option summarized in Table 7-13 must be tested for
protective earth resistance and leakage current, according to the values specified in IEC
62353:2007.
Table 7-13: Tests to perform on parts of the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option
Part on system Test Type Maximum allowable test result according

to IEC 62353
MTD Paddle holder Leakage Current 100 μA

Reconstruction housing front cover
Reconstruction housing left-hand cover
Reconstruction housing right-hand cover Protective earth resistance 300 mΩ
Reconstruction housing frame
Summary of procedure tasks

To do the leakage current tests, you will do the following:
• Configure the Electrical Safety Analyzer (see Section 8.4.1).
• Power off the system perform LOTO, and connect the one of the test probes to reference
point on the Generator (see Section 8.4.2).
• Perform protective earth resistance tests on the Reconstruction Station housing and the
MTD (Section 8.4.3).
• Reestablish power to the system, and perform the Leakage Current tests on the
Reconstruction Station housing and the MTD (see Section 8.4.4).
452 8 Job Card CHK A011 - Ground Continuity and Leakage

Current Tests
NOTE: This Job Card describes both protective earth resistance and leakage current tests.
The tests can be run with a Fluke ESA612 for example. The usage principles of other
meters are similar (refer to the meters accompanying documentation for more
information). For a Fluke ESA612, the Patient Leakage Current and Enclosure
Leakage Current test are achieved using a Point to Point Leakage test. If you choose
to use a different meter to the Fluke ESA612, it must respect the following
specifications:
• Earth Resistance
○ Test current : >200 mA AC
○ Earth resistance test range : 0.000 to 2.000 Ω
○ Accuracy : ±(2 % of reading + 0.015 Ω)
• Leakage Current
○ Modes : AC+DC (True-rms), AC only, DC only

○ Patient Load Selection : IEC 60601: Fig. 15
○ Range : 0.0 to 199.9 μA
○ Accuracy :±(5 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
Electrical Safety Analyzer 1 - -
8.3.2 Safety
WARNING
(LOTO) PROCEDURES.
The system installation is completed. - -


8.4 Procedure
8.4.1 Zero the Resistance Offset of the Electrical Safety Analyzer
Use the following steps to set up the Electrical Safety Analyzer.
1. Connect an inactive (usually black) probe cable with crocodile clip to the lower V/Ω/A
connector on the Electrical Safety Analyzer. The inactive probe cable will be connected to
the Generator earth connection next to the power input connection. If necessary, plan for
and add additional probe extension cables before zeroing the resistance offset of the
Electrical Safety Analyzer.
2. Connect an active (usually red) probe cable with crocodile clip to the upper V/Ω/A connector
on the Electrical Safety Analyzer. The active cable will be connected to the Reconstruction
Station covers. If necessary, plan for and add additional probe extension cables before
zeroing the resistance offset of the Electrical Safety Analyzer.
3. Connect the AC input cable of the Electrical Safety Analyzer into the mains AC supply.
4. Connect the crocodile clips of the active and inactive probe cables together.
5. Power on the Electrical Safety Analyzer, and do the following:
a. Press the [POINT TO POINT] button.
The Electrical Safety Analyzer defaults to the Voltage type point to point test.
NOTE: For a Fluke ESA612, the Patient Leakage Current and Enclosure
Leakage Current test are achieved using a Point to Point Leakage
test. The test configuration for other Electrical Safety Analyzers
may be different.
b. Press the soft key labeled [Resistance].
The Electrical Safety Analyzer displays the resistance of the probe cables.
c. Allow several seconds for the resistance of the probe cables to stabilize. Once the
resistance of the probe cables stops changing, press the soft key labeled [Zero
Leads].
The resistance offset of the Electrical Safety Analyzer is now set, and the
Electrical Safety Analyzer now displays a resistance 0 ohms.
The Electrical Safety Analyzer is now ready to be used for the Ground
continuity tests.
6. Disconnect the crocodile clips of the active and inactive probe cables from each other.
8.4.2 Prepare the System for the Tests
1. Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room.
2. Execute a LOTO procedure on the system, described in Chapter 1, Job Card LOTO A001 -
Lock-Out / Tag-Out (LOTO) Procedures.

Current Tests
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
WAIT 10 MINUTES FOR THE COMPONENTS WITHIN THE GENERATOR TO
DISCHARGE.
3. Remove the four Generator side panels to reveal the Power Line Filter, see Job Card PHY
A042 - Remove/Reinstall Generator Covers in the Core SIP.
4. Switch off the electrical power supply on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet (position
0), see illustration below.
5. Find the earth cable marked FILTRE next to the Generator Relay board.
The FILTRE cable is connected to the ground terminal that is used as reference for both
tests.

6. Use a crocodile clip to connect the inactive probe to the ground terminal.
8.4.3 Perform Protective Earth Resistance Tests
Use the following steps to perform protective earth resistance tests on the Reconstruction
Station covers. The protective earth resistance tests must be performed with the system power
off, so leave the LOTO in place for the following steps.
NOTICE
Do not remove LOTO, this test must done with power OFF.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect ground cables while opening or closing covers of the
Reconstruction housing.
1. On the Electrical Safety Analyzer, do the following:

NOTE: For a Fluke ESA612, the Enclosure Leakage Current test is
achieved using a Point to Point Leakage test. The test configuration
for other Electrical Safety Analyzers may be different.
b. Press the soft key labeled [Resistance].
The Electrical Safety Analyzer displays the resistance value.
2. Connect the crocodile clip of the active probe cable to the appropriate testing point (Table
7-14).
Table 7-14: Protective earth resistance test results — Reconstruction Station Housing
Testing point Maximum result Result

Reconstruction housing front cover 0.3 Ω (300 mΩ)
Reconstruction housing left-hand cover 0.3 Ω (300 mΩ)

Current Tests

Reconstruction housing right-hand cover 0.3 Ω (300 mΩ)
Reconstruction housing frame 0.3 Ω (300 mΩ)
1. To access the testing point of a side cover of the housing follow these steps:
○ Unscrew the cover using a 1.5 Allen key.

○ Open the cover without removing it (see Illustration 7-9).
Illustration 7-9: Reconstruction housing removable covers
○ Use the crocodile clip of the active testing probe cable to connect it to the testing
point on the side cover. The other end of the second testing probe cable will be
connected to the upper .
2. To access the testing point of a front cover of the housing follow these steps:
○ Open the front cover without removing it (see Chapter 5, Section 11., Opening
the Reconstruction housing).
○ Use the crocodile clip of the second probe cable to connect the second testing
probe cable to the testing point on the front cover. The other end of the active
probe cable will be connected to the upper V/Ω/A connector on the Electrical
Safety Analyzer.
3. To access the testing point of the Reconstruction housing frame follow these steps:
○ Open the Reconstruction housing left-hand panel.

Illustration 7-10: Reconstruction housing frame
○ Use the crocodile clip of the second probe cable to connect the second testing
probe cable to the testing point on the Reconstruction Station housing frame. The
other end of the probe cable will be connected to the upper V/Ω/A connector on
the Electrical Safety Analyzer.
3. Read the value on the display, and fill the Result column in the appropriate line of Table
7-14.
4. If any of the values are above the maximum result, check the tightness of all the earth cable
connections in the system, and repeat the tests. If the test fails after checking all earth cable
connections, contact OLC.
The problem must be solved before handing back the system to the client.
5. Connect the crocodile clip of the probe cable to the to the appropriate testing point on the
MTD (see Table 7-15).
Table 7-15: Protective earth resistance test results — MTD
Testing point Maximum re‐ Result

sult
Paddle holder (A in Illustration 7-11) 0.3 Ω (300 mΩ)

Current Tests
Illustration 7-11: MTD Patient Leakage Current Testing Points
6. The Electrical Safety Analyzer displays the measured protective earth resistance for the
tested point on the MTD. Read the value on the display, and fill the Result column in the
appropriate line of Table 7-15.
7. Determine your next step based on the results as follows:
• If the results of the protective earth resistance test is above the maximum result
summarized in Table 7-15, the cause of the problem must be resolved before
handing the system over to the customer for clinical use.
• If the results of the protective earth resistance test is below or equal to the maximum
result summarized in Table 7-15, no further action is necessary.
8.4.4 Perform Leakage Current Tests
Use the following steps to test the leakage current of the Reconstruction Station housing frame,
each of the Reconstruction Station removable covers, and the MTD paddle holder. The leakage
current tests must be performed with the system power on.
1. Remove LOTO and power on the system from the X-ray Console.
2. On the Electrical Safety Analyzer, do the following:
NOTE: For a Fluke ESA612, the Patient Leakage Current test is achieved
using a Point to Point Leakage test. The test configuration for other
Electrical Safety Analyzers may be different.
b. Press the soft key labeled [Leakage].
The Electrical Safety Analyzer displays the leakage value in μA.

Reconstruction Station housing (Table 7-16).
Table 7-16: Leakage current test results — Reconstruction Station Housing

Reconstruction housing front cover 100 μA
Reconstruction housing left-hand cover 100 μA
Reconstruction housing right-hand cover 100 μA
Reconstruction housing frame 100 μA
1. To access the testing point of a side cover of the housing follow these steps:
○ Unscrew the cover using a 1.5 Allen key.

○ Open the cover without removing it (see Illustration 7-12).
Illustration 7-12: Reconstruction housing removable covers
○ Use the crocodile clip of the second testing probe cable to connect the second
testing probe cable to the testing point on the side cover. The other end of the
second testing probe cable will be connected to the Electrical Safety Analyzer
upper V/Ω/A connector.
2. To access the testing point of a front cover of the housing follow these steps:

Current Tests
○ Open the front cover without removing it (see Chapter 5, Section 11., Opening
the Reconstruction housing).
○ Use the crocodile clip of the probe cable to connect it to the testing point on the
front cover. The other end of the probe cable will be connected to the upper
Electrical Safety Analyzer V/Ω/A connector.
3. To access the testing point of the Reconstruction housing frame follow these steps:
○ Open the Reconstruction housing left-hand panel.

Illustration 7-13: Reconstruction housing frame
○ Use the crocodile clip of the probe cable to connect it to the testing point on the
Reconstruction Station housing frame. The other end of the probe cable will be
connected to the Electrical Safety Analyzer upper V/Ω/A connector.
4. The Electrical Safety Analyzer displays the measured leakage current for the tested point on
the Reconstruction Station housing. Read the value on the display, and fill the Result
column in the appropriate line of Table 7-16.
• If the results of the enclosure leakage current test is above the maximum result
• If the results of the enclosure leakage current test is below or equal to the maximum
MTD (see Table 7-17).

Table 7-17: Leakage current test results — MTD
Testing point Maximum re‐ Result

sult
Paddle holder (A in Illustration 7-14) 100 μA
Illustration 7-14: MTD Patient Leakage Current Testing Points
7. The Electrical Safety Analyzer displays the measured leakage current for the tested point on
the MTD. Read the value on the display, and fill the Result column in the appropriate line of
Table 7-17.
• If the results of the patient leakage current test is above the maximum result
• If the results of the patient leakage current test is below or equal to the maximum
8.5 Finalization
1. Execute a LOTO procedure on the system, described in Chapter 1, Job Card LOTO A001 -
Lock-Out / Tag-Out (LOTO) Procedures.
2. Remove the inactive probe cable from the earth cable marked FILTRE next to the Generator
Relay board.
3. Reinstall the Generator covers according to Job Card PHY A042 - Remove/Reinstall
Generator Covers in the Core SIP.

Current Tests
4. Copy the ground continuity and leakage current results that you noted down in Table 7-14 ,
Table 7-16 , and Table 7-17 in the site log book.

9 Job Card CHK A012 - Overall system behavior check

The objective of the procedures described in this Job Card is to check the system for problems
that could critically interfere with the intended use of the option.
9.1 Check the system for Gantry related errors
In the Error Log section of the Service Desktop (see How to use the Error Log in the Core SIP),
check the presence of any Gantry related errors.
If any Gantry related errors are present, follow the recommended actions described in the Error
Messages chapter of the Core SIP.
464 9 Job Card CHK A012 - Overall system behavior check

10 Job Card CHK A020 – Collimator Compatibility Check

Personnel
Requirements

The Collimator Checker script has been Chapter 5, Job Card IST -
installed on the ADS Computer A013a – Collimator Check
Script Installation
10.3 Procedure
Service Tools→ Command window.
su –
3. In the command window, change to the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/ directory, by
entering:
cd ~sdc/senovision/scripts/
4. Execute the CollimatorDBTCheck.sh script, by entering:
./CollimatorDBTCheck.sh
5. The CollimatorDBTCheck.sh script will check whether the existing Collimator on the
system is compatible with the current optical configuration (i.e. Digital Detector, X-ray Tube,
and Collimator).
• If the Collimator is compatible with the current optical configuration, the
CollimatorDBTCheck.sh script will report that the existing Collimator is
compatible, and will either have adjusted the maximum Collimator blade opening or
left the Collimator blade opening to its default values.
• If the Collimator is not compatible with the current optical configuration, the
CollimatorDBTCheck.sh script will report that the existing Collimator is
incompatible and needs changing.

Determine your next step based on the results of the CollimatorDBTCheck.sh script,
as follows:
• If the results pass, and the Collimator is compatible, no further action is necessary.
Proceed with the rest of the installation.
• If the results fail, and the Collimator is not compatible, change the Collimator
according to Job Card D/R A280 - Collimator Set in the Core SIP. Proceed with the
rest of the installation.
6. Reboot the system.
10.4 Finalization
466 10 Job Card CHK A020 - Collimator Compatibility

Check
11 Job Card CHK A029 - Breast Support Tests for the MTD
Personnel
Requirements

IQST Standard Phantom 1 - 5151579 -
11.2.2 Safety
WARNING
THE PROCEDURES IN THIS JOB CARD PRODUCE X-RAYS. ENSURE THAT
YOU TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING WITH X-
RAYS (FOR EXAMPLE, STAY BEHIND THE RADIATION SCREEN DURING
AN X-RAY EXPOSURE).
WARNING
OF THE MTD.
CAUTION
Risks of pinching fingers during the insertion of the Motorized Tomosynthesis
Device (MTD).
Slide the MTD onto the rails and push it in place by pressing on its front side until
the locking motor starts. During the automatic locking phase, keep hands away
from the MTD and Image Detector cover.
CAUTION
CAUTION


The software must be at tomo level. - -
The system must have the detector and - -
detector covers installed.
11.3 Procedure
11.3.1 MTD Locking Mechanism Tests
Undertake the following sections a few times to ensure that the locking and release actions of
the MTD Locking Mechanism are functioning correctly.
11.3.1.1 Test MTD Locking Mechanism Locking Action
Ensure that the MTD can automatically lock on to the back of the detector:
1. Remove paddle if present.
2. Move up the paddle holder.
3. Set the rotation arm to 0°.
CAUTION
There is a risk of pinching your fingers during installation of the MTD.
To avoid this risk, slide the MTD onto the rails and push it toward the back of the
Image Receptor by pressing on its front until the locking motor starts.
NOTICE
Inserting the MTD at an angle can scratch the detector and/or damage the MTD
electrical connectors.
Carefully align the MTD cover to be parallel to the detector when you slide the
MTD onto the rails.
NOTICE
Before locking the MTD into place, check that there is no small object that would
prevent good contact between the MTD and the cover. This could damage the
grid inside the MTD and degrade image quality.
4. Align the MTD with the rails and slide the MTD onto the rails.
CAUTION
During the automatic locking phase, keep your hands away from the moving
MTD and the white covers of the Image Receptor.
5. Press on the front of the MTD until a motor noise is heard, indicating the start of the locking
phase.
NOTE: The MTD locking mechanism motors can be heard during the entire locking
phase.
468 11 Job Card CHK A029 - Breast Support Tests for the
MTD
6. When the locking is complete (the motor noise stops), check that the MTD is in place and
cannot be manually moved.
7. Check that the Gantry LCD readout displays a message indicating that the MTD is present.
11.3.1.2 Test MTD 3D light
This part of the procedure ensures that the MTD 3D light informs the operator of the current
state (2D/3D) of the system.
1. When the locking is complete (the motor noise stops), check that the MTD 3D light blinks
NOTE: The blinking can be very short.
The MTD is establishing communication with the positioner.
Illustration 7-15: MTD 3D light
When communication is established, the light can be either ON of OFF, depending on

the last mode of the positioner : 2D = light OFF, 3D = light ON.
2. After the 3D light stops blinking, press 2D/3D switch on the left (see Illustration 7-16) to
change the state of the system.

Illustration 7-16: MTD 2D/3D switches - view from above
Expected result:
• If the 3D light is ON it must go OFF.
• If the 3D light is OFF it must go ON.

3. Press the left-hand button again to change the state of the system.
Expected result:
• If the 3D light is ON it must go OFF.
• If the 3D light is OFF it must go ON.

4. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 with the button on the right (see Illustration 7-16).
11.3.1.3 Test MTD Locking Mechanism Release Action
This part of the procedure ensures that the MTD can be automatically released from the back of
the detector:
1. Push the 2 release buttons (see Illustration 7-17 ,1) below the white covers of the detector to
release the MTD.
MTD
Illustration 7-17: Breast support release buttons
CAUTION
The rear of the MTD is heavier than the front. Ensure that you are prepared for
this extra weight by grasping the MTD firmly by the handles throughout the entire
process.
You must use both hands during the entire MTD removal procedure.
NOTICE
Pulling on the MTD during the automatic release phase can damage the
mechanism.
NOTICE
The MTD is a delicate device and must be handled carefully. When it is not in
use, it must be stored on the table stand delivered with the option. Any other
support could result in permanent damage of the equipment.
NOTE: During the automatic release phase, you will hear the MTD locking mechanism
motors moving.
2. When the motorized release movement stops (after roughly 4 seconds), manually remove
the MTD by sliding it along the rails.
11.3.2 Red Line Test
This part of the procedure ensures that when the MTD is installed on the detector, the red line is
hidden.
1. Insert the MTD (see Section 11.3.1.1).
2. Look at the back of the MTD where it comes into contact with the upper detector covers.

A red line is painted on the back of the Image Receptor covers.

3. Check that the red line is hidden on each side of the detector as indicated below.
If the line is visible, it can be due to the following:

• The MTD is going through its locking phase. Wait until the locking phase is complete.
MTD
• The MTD is incorrectly locked. In this case, gently slide the MTD off the rail and re-
install it by sliding it onto the rails until the locking motor starts.
• If none the above cases explains why the red line is visible, the covers of the
detector are not well adjusted. Readjust the covers, and if the problem persists stop
all examinations and contact your OLC.
11.3.3 5 mm Test
The 5 mm test checks that the distance between chestwall and the first active pixel of the
detector is less than 5 mm. This test is done on the ADS monitor from the IQST image. Perform
the test as follows:
1. Place the IQST phantom on the MTD carbon cover and push it to the chestwall.
2. Go to the medical application and take an image of the IQST phantom using settings:
RhRh; 30 kV; 56 mAs; MTD installed; IQST phantom on the MTD carbon cover.
3. Check that the distance between the chestwall and the first active pixel of the detector is
less than 5 mm.
The 5 mm graduation must be seen in each of the two rulers placed at the border of the
IQST phantom at the chestwall side.
Illustration 7-18: 5 mm graduation marks at chestwall side
11.4 Finalization

12 Job Card CHK A033 — CNR and MTF Measurement with MTD
Personnel
Requirements
12.2 Overview
The test is designed to check the consistency of the contrast to noise ratio (CNR) and to ensure
that contrast is adequate over the 0-5 lp/mm spatial frequency range by obtaining an estimate of
the MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) values at 2 and 4 lp/mm.
CNR measurement is done in two steps:
• Establishment of a baseline operating level CNRol (CNR Operating Level).
• Comparison of CNR value to this operating level.
NOTE: The phantom image quality test for screen-film imaging systems as described in the
MQSA Quality Mammography Standards includes a test for the consistency of image
contrast as represented by the density difference (DD) between the image of a test
object, e.g., a 4 mm thick acrylic disk, and the background density of the phantom. In
digital imaging the relative level of a signal or contrast to the image noise is the more
relevant measure of image quality. Hence, the measure of consistency of Contrast–
to–Noise Ratio (CNR) is introduced as a replacement for the measure of consistency
of DD.
Under certain conditions it will be necessary to reestablish the CNRol. These include, but are not
limited to:
• Replacement of the X-ray tube.
• Replacement of the filter wheel (due to a different Rh filter).
• Replacement of the IQST device.
• Replacement of the MTD (due to a different anti-scatter grid).
• Replacement of the detector.
• Re-calibration of detector gain.
Following any of these events it is necessary to establish a new CNRol. To initiate the
establishment of a new CNRol, use the [RESET] button in the results pop-up window. This
[RESET] button is available only if five CNR values have been measured and a CNRol has been
calculated; the [ERASE] button allows you to cancel the last CNR value.
IQST Phantom
474 12 Job Card CHK A033 - CNR and MTF Measurement

with MTD
NOTE: To avoid false results, the IQST phantom must be clean and free from scratches.
Allow for temperature stabilization of the - -
detector. The system must be powered on
image quality.
The measurement must be made only - -
after successful completion of the Flat
field Test on the Senographe Essential.
12.4 Procedure
1. Click on the QAP button on the right column of the Browser window.
2. Select MTD. A list of tests is displayed.
3. Select the CNR and MTF Tests and follow the on-screen instructions:
a. Enter or verify the reference of the IQST phantom (Serial Number or SN, written on
the side of the IQST phantom).
b. On the AWS screen, click [Start].
NOTE: If the IQST phantom reference entered is different from the
previous one, you will be asked if you want to restart the calibration
process with this new reference.
c. Install the MTD on the digital detector if it is not already installed, set it to 2D
acquisition mode and remove the Compression Paddle.
The following parameters are selected automatically: Rh/Rh/30kV/56mAs.
d. Perform one exposure.
4. After the image has been captured, the results of the tests are displayed:
• The values of MTF at 2 lp/mm and MTF at 4 lp/mm.
• The value of the change in CNR, computed as follows:

Change in CNR = |CNR - CNRol| / CNRol
where CNRol = the CNR Operating Level as described above in the Procedure
Overview.
If CNRol has not been calculated yet, the change in CNR is computed as follows:
Change in CNR = |CNR - mean| / mean
where mean = the mean of the CNR values previously stored.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Back] to come back to the main QAP screen.

12.5 Finalization
Action Limit:
The system passes the MTF Measurement test if all of the following conditions are met:
• MTF Parallel at 2 lp/mm > 49%
• MTF Parallel at 4 lp/mm > 18%
• MTF Perpendicular at 2 lp/mm > 49%
• MTF Perpendicular at 4 lp/mm > 18%
For each condition that is met, the Status will be PASS.

The system passes the CNR Measurement test:
• if the change in CNR does not exceed 0.2 when computed with an existing CNRol value,
such that Change in CNR = |CNR - CNRol| / CNRol .
• if the change in CNR does not exceed 0.4 when computed with the mean of the CNR values
previously stored, such that Change in CNR = |CNR - mean| / mean.
If this condition is met, the Status will be PASS.
Use of Test Results:

If the system fails either of these tests, the source of the problem must be identified, and
corrective action taken, before any further mammographic images are acquired using the MTD
that failed.
476 12 Job Card CHK A033 - CNR and MTF Measurement

with MTD
13 Job Card CHK A037 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score 2D MTD
Personnel
Requirements
13.2 Overview
ACR Phantom
The phantom used in this procedure is a block of acrylic containing 16 cells. Each cell simulates
an anatomical structure which can be found in breast tissue. The acrylic gives attenuation
equivalent to a breast of average density compressed to a thickness of 45 mm. Starting from the
top left-hand corner, as shown in the illustration, the cells are of three types.
• Fibers.
Six cells represent fibrous calcifications;
they contain fibers with sections from 1.56
mm to 0.40 mm.
• Specks (Calcifications).
Five cells represent groups of specks or
microcalcifications, with sizes from 0.54
mm to 0.16 mm.
• Masses.
Five cells represent tumors or masses,
with sizes from 2 mm to 0.25 mm; each
has a different attenuation.
ACR Score
The ACR Score check program obtains and displays an image of the phantom. After suitable
adjustment of the viewing parameters, the user notes the visibility of the object in each cell,
using a 3-point scale of 1, 0.5, or 0. For each cell, score:
• 1: If the object (fiber, mass, or group of six specks) is completely visible.
• 0.5 If the object is partially visible, according to the following guidelines:
○ Fibers: More than half of the fiber is visible.

○ Masses: The mass does not appear circular, but is visible.
○ Specks: At least two specks are visible
• 0: For all other cases


ACR standard phantom (16 1 - - -
cells Nuclear Associates
18-220 or RMI-156)
13.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The JC CHK A029 - Breast Support Test - -
MTD has been performed successfully.
The collimator is in full FOV. - -
The tube arm angle is 0°. - -
13.4 Procedure
13.4.1 Preparing the test
1. Insert the Standard 24x31 Paddle for MTD.

Score 2D MTD
2. Place the ACR phantom on the carbon cover of the MTD, against the chest wall side and
laterally centered.
3. Lightly compress the phantom with the compression paddle.
4. Check that the collimator is in full FOV and that the tube arm angle is 0 degrees.
1. Open the Browser (see How to use the browser in the Core SIP).
2.
From the Browser, click on the QAP button .
4. Click on the [Phantom IQ] button.
1. Make an exposure and display the image.
The system applies suitable parameters (Rh/Rh, 29 kV, 56 mAs, LF).

2. The image appears with standard parameters which may need adjusting for your system:
a. Press the right mouse button to display a 2-item menu which allows you to select the
middle button function.
b. Use it either to:
• control brightness and contrast
NOTE: Window level (WL) changes with vertical movement and
window width (WW) changes with horizontal movement.
As a rough guide, it is suggested that the contrast is adjusted to
obtain an on-screen displayed value for WW of less than 200
for good viewing.
or
• obtain the magnifying glass function

3. Obtain the best viewing conditions for an accurate assessment of the score. If necessary:
a. Complete the test and repeat it with the phantom in a better position, and observe
the 16 cells in the phantom image.
b. Note the ACR score (1, 0.5, or 0, as described in the Procedure Overview) for each
cell, and total the scores for each type of cell (fibers, masses, speck groups).
4. A group of three on-screen sliders are displayed at the top right of the screen.
a. For each type of cell, move the on-screen slider (with the cursor on the slider, press,
and hold the mouse button while moving the mouse) until the correct score appears.
b. Then click OK to enter the score into the system.
5. The results of the test are displayed as a table, as shown below. The LSL column shows the
minimum acceptable score (Lower Specification Limit) and the USL column shows the
maximum score (Upper Specification Limit) for each item.
The values given here in the Measurement and Status columns are for example only.
Table 7-18: Example of a test result table
Masses 4.00 3.00 5.00 PASS

Speck groups 2.50 3.00 5.00 FAIL
Fibers 5.00 4.00 6.00 PASS
Score 11.50 11.00 16.00 PASS
6. The test is successful if:

• the sum of the scores for masses is 3 or more,
• the sum of the scores for speck groups of at least 3 or more,
• the sum of the scores for fibers is 4 or more,
• the total score is 11 or more.

Score 2D MTD
In the example above the total score is 11.5, but the test fails because the speck group
score is less than 3.
13.5 Finalization
If the ACR Score test fails, the cause must be identified and corrected before further patient
examinations are made.

14 Job Card CHK A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check 2D MTD
Personnel
Requirements
14.2 Overview
The test is designed to check the following aspects of system operation:
• Correct choice of parameters in AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) mode.
• Correct level of SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) in the image.
This check is also described in the section AOP Mode and SNR Check of the QC Manual.
Set of acrylic plates 1 the plates 5151579 -
must be clean
and free from
scratches.
14.3.2 Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
482 14 Job Card CHK A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check
2D MTD

The Standard 24x31 paddle for MTD is - -
inserted.
after allowing a 10-minute warm-up
14.4 Procedure
1.
From the Browser, click the [QAP] button .
A list of tests appears.
3. Click on the [AOP and SNR Check] button.
These steps must be performed with 25 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm of acrylic plates.
1. Place the acrylic plates so that they lie flat on the MTD carbon cover, and stack them to
make the required thickness.
2. Position the plates with the largest side aligned with the chest wall edge of the MTD carbon
cover.
3. Center the plates left-to-right.
4. Apply a compression force of 5 daN to the plates.
NOTE: To easily apply a compression force of 5 daN with precision, you can use the
MEDICAL/COMP/FORCE menu on the X-ray Console to set the maximum
compression force limit to 5 daN. If you do this, remember to return the
maximum compression force limit to the clinically used value following
completion of the test.
AOP STD mode is selected automatically.
5. Make an exposure.
6. After the image has been captured, the results are displayed (exposure parameters used as
well as SNR).
7. Record these results in Table 7-19 below.

Table 7-19: AOP MODE AND SNR CHECK RESULTS
Thickness kVp Track Filter mAs SNR
25 mm
50 mm
60 mm
8. Repeat the steps in this section for the remaining thicknesses.

14.5 Finalization
If at the end of the results displayed on the Service Desktop, AOP B is displayed, the AOP
Mode test is successful if the exposure parameters are in accord with the values specified in the
following table:
Acrylic Thickness (mm) Exposure Parameters For AOP STD mode only
Track/filter mAs kVp
25 Mo/Mo 20 - 60 26
50 Rh/Rh 40 - 90 29
60 Rh/Rh 60 - 120 30 or 31
If at the end of the results displayed on the Service Desktop, AOP B is NOT displayed, the AOP
Mode test is successful if the exposure parameters are in accord with the values specified in the
following table:
Acrylic Thickness (mm) Exposure Parameters For AOP STD mode only
Track/filter mAs kVp
25 Mo/Mo 20 - 60 26
50 Rh/Rh 40 - 90 29
60 Rh/Rh 45 - 95 30 or 31
The value of SNR must exceed 50.

NOTE: For the 60 mm acrylic thickness, either 30 kVp or 31 kVp can be selected by the AOP
algorithm. This is normal operation. It is also normal operation that the mAs used with
30 kVp is greater than the value used with 31 kVp. It is only necessary that the mAs
remain within the range given in the previous table.
If the system fails the test, apply Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A049 - Compression Paddle Offset
Calibration on the compression paddle that you used to perform the test. Setting a compression
paddle offset may resolve the issue of the failing test.
If the test fails again, perform Chapter 6, Job Card CAL A051 - AOP Calibration with MTD and
perform the test again.
If the system continues to fail the test after declaring a paddle offset, the source of the problem
must be identified, and corrective action taken, before any further mammographic images are
acquired.
484 14 Job Card CHK A038 - AOP Mode and SNR Check
2D MTD
15 Job Card CHK A050 - Breast Tomosynthesis Object Construction Checks

Personnel
Requirements
15.2 Overview
For a Breast Tomosyntesis Object (BTO) to be constructed from a worklist entry queried from a
HIS/RIS, some DICOM attributes are needed, that are not mandatory for conventional 2D image
creation. In some cases the HIS/RIS might not send some mandatory information and during
acquisition, the volume cannot be reconstructed. In order for the Reconstruction Computer to be
able to successfully create volumes for a worklist entry retrieved from the HIS/RIS, all
mandatory DICOM Attributes on the HIS/RIS must be configured. If all the mandatory DICOM
attributes are not configured on the HIS/RIS, then the Reconstruction Computer cannot
reconstruct a volume, and the following warning pop-up appears on ADS suggesting to try a
manual reconstruction: Volume reconstruction not completed. Try to launch
reconstruction manually. (see Illustration 7-19).
Illustration 7-19: Error message : Volume reconstruction not completed
NOTE: Even though the warning pop-up suggests to reconstruct manually, the manual
reconstruction will not succeed in this case.
The Modality Worklist section of the DICOM Conformance Statement lists all of the mandatory
DICOM attributes that must be configured on the RIS/HIS so that the RIS/HIS contains all the
necessary DICOM attributes.
This Job Card checks the following:
• The worklist on the ADS Computer populates correctly with the HIS/RIS data.
• The HIS/RIS data received allows you to correctly reconstruct tomosynthesis volume.
NOTE: Volume construction will be possible for worklist entries manually entered in the
Worklist locally on the ADS Computer because they will have the necessary DICOM
attributes. This is because the necessary DICOM attributes for those locally created
worklist entries are given by the ADS Computer. Even if you can construct volumes
for worklist entries created locally on the ADS Computer, you must always execute
this Job Card in order to check the integrity of the necessary DICOM attributes sent
from the HIS/RIS.


The GE Breast Tomosynthesis option is - -
installed and calibrated, and the HIS/RIS
host is correctly defined on the system.
The worklist AETitle of the Senographe Chapter 5, Job Card ELE A022 -
Essential system defined on the RIS/HIS – Worklist AE Title
must match that (including letter case) of Configuration
the worklist AETitle of the Senographe
Essential system.
15.4 Procedure
15.4.1 Initial RIS/HIS Configuration Check
You can only get a worklist entry from the HIS/RIS if (1). some of the mandatory DICOM fields
from the worklist that are checked by ADS are present in the RIS/HIS information, and (2). if the
Worklist AETitle defined for the Senographe system on the RIS/HIS match Worklist AETitle of
the Senographe. Use the following steps to test if you can get a new test worklist entry (no
images) from RIS/HIS to the ADS Computer.
1. On the HIS/RIS, create a test worklist entry.
2. From the Senographe Essential system running the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option, query
the HIS/RIS and retrieve the test worklist entry in the worklist.
Determine your next step as follows:
• If the Senographe Essential system successfully retrieves the test worklist entry from
the HIS/RIS, there is no issue with the Worklist AETitle or with some of the
mandatory DICOM fields that are checked by ADS. In this case, proceed to Section
15.4.2 to check whether all of the mandatory DICOM fields are sent from the HIS/
RIS.
• If the Senographe Essential system does not successfully retrieve the test worklist
entry from the HIS/RIS, there is either a Worklist AETitle mismatch or some of the
mandatory DICOM attributes that are checked for by ADS are missing from the
HIS/RIS information. In this case, do the following:
○ Double check that the Worklist AETitle of the Senographe system defined on the
RIS/HIS matches (including case) the actual Worklist AETtile of the Senographe
system. From ADS 56.10 delivered with the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option,
the AE title used for worklist no longer includes WL_ and keeps letter case. For
example, if the hostname of the Senographe Essential system is Ess001, then
the AE title for the worklist will now be Ess001 instead of WL_ESS001.
○ Check with RIS/HIS admin so that the mandatory DICOM attributes listed in the
Modality Worklist section of the DICOM Conformance Statement are sent by RIS/
HIS.
486 15 Job Card CHK A050 - Breast Tomosynthesis Object

Construction Checks
○ Return to the start of this step 2.

15.4.2 BTO Construction From a Worklist from RIS/HIS (DICOM Conformance
Statement)
Volume construction can only occur on the Reconstruction Computer if all mandatory DICOM
fields from worklist are present in the RIS/HIS information. Use the following steps to get a new
test worklist entry (no images) from RIS/HIS to the ADS Computer, and check you are able to
take a 3D sequence and construct it successfully.
1. On the HIS/RIS, create a test worklist entry.
2. Select the test worklist entry in the worklist and start a tomosynthesis exam.
3. Acquire a tomo sequence, then close the exam.
4. Check on the Browser that the test worklist entry is present, that it contains an exam with 2
series, one series with the 9 projections, one with 2 volumes (slabs and planes). Check all
volumes are constructed (present in Browser) and no popup is displayed stating that volume
reconstruction failed.
• If the volumes are created properly and no popup appears stating that volume
reconstruction failed, the RIS/HIS is configured correctly and sending all the
appropriate DICOM attributes to the Senographe system. No further action is
necessary.
• If the volumes are not created and a popup appears stating that volume
reconstruction failed (see Illustration 7-19), this means one or more mandatory
DICOM attributes is missing in information sent by RIS/HIS. In the Modality Worklist
section of the DICOM Conformance Statement, the mandatory attribute are listed.
Use the following sub-steps to determine which mandatory DICOM attributes are
missing from the RIS/HIS:
1. Check whether the RECON, 900102, Error during write of the
Volume error log exists within the Service Desktop error log pages. The 900102
error log is indicative of the fact that the mandatory DICOM attributes were not
sent from the RIS/HIS.
2. On the ADS Computer, from behind the Browser, right click on the background,
and from the Root menu, select Service Tools > Command window.
3. Change to root user on the ADS Computer as follows:
a. Change to root user on the ADS Computer, by entering:
su –
operator (or the customer specified root password)
a. Establish an ssh connection as a root user to the Reconstruction Computer,
by entering:

ssh recon@reconbox
b. If a password prompt appears, enter:
M0n!AgneU (or the customer specified, non default password)
5. Change to the /recon-software/traces/ directory on the Reconstruction
Computer, by entering:
cd /recon-software/traces/
6. The /recon-software/traces/ directory contains the trace files associated
to the Reconstruction Computer. You must look for ERR_FORMAT in the trace
files, and the line just after it contains the offending DICOM tag. To do this, enter
the following command:
grep -A1 ERR_FORMAT traceRecon*
Determine your next step, as follows:
■ If there are not any offending DICOM tags (i.e. there are no missing DICOM
attributes), no output is returned, and you are returned directly to the
command prompt.
In this case, the connectivity issue with the HIS/RIS is unknown. Contact OLC
for more information on resolving the issue.
■ If there are any offending DICOM tags (i.e. missing DICOM attributes), an
output similar to the following appears listing the missing DICOM attributes:
traceRecon.2013-08-30-11-26-08.log:2013-09-02 17:20:43,011 ER-

ROR [0x7fd14f147780:null] aiadicom (IMGenhancedGenerator.cc:
1381) - DicomBuilder Error ERR_FORMAT: No defined valuetraceR-
econ.2013-08-30-11-26-08.log-Attribute (0008,0102)
In the example above, the missing DICOM attribute is 0008,0102.

In this case, make a note of all the missing DICOM attributes listed in the
output and then proceed to resolve the issue with the hospital RIS/HIS
administrator, according to the information supplied in Table 7-20.
Table 7-20: DICOM Attributes To Look For With Associated Recommended
Action on How To Fix
DICOM At‐ How to fix on the Worklist DICOM Attribute copied in Re‐ Rules for RIS
tribute miss‐ HIS/RIS the image and that potentially gener‐ turned sending
ing in Pro‐ ate the error ex‐
jection im‐ pected
ages as key*
stated in re‐
con traces

Construction Checks
1. RIS to send the DI‐ 0008,1150 from Reference SOP 1C Expected if se‐
COM attribute as part of within 0008,1120 Class UID from quence
(0008,1120) Referenced within Referenced 0008,1120 con‐
Patient Sequence item. Patient Sequence tains an item
OR cannot be sent
2. RIS to send the empty
(0008,1120) Referenced
Patient Sequence emp‐
ty (i.e. without any item
in it).
0008,1150
COM attribute as part of within 0008,1110 Class UID from quence
Study Sequence item. Study Sequence tains an item
OR cannot be sent
Study Sequence empty
(i.e. without any item in
it).
COM attribute as part of within 0008,1120 Instance UID from quence
Patient Sequence item. Patient Sequence tains an item
OR cannot be sent
Patient Sequence emp‐
ty (i.e. without any item
in it).
COM attribute as part of within 0008,1110 Instance UID from quence
0008,1155
Study Sequence item. Study Sequence tains an item
OR cannot be sent
Study Sequence empty OR Study Instance 1 When 0008,1110
(i.e. without any item in If 0008, 1110 not UID is not sent from
it) and RIS to send the sent by RIS, the RIS, the se‐
(0020, 000D) not empty. 0020,000D will be quence is creat‐
used instead of ed for the image
0008,1155 from using
within 0008,1110 0020,000D.
0020,000D sent
by the RIS can‐
not be empty.
1. RIS to send the attrib‐ 0008,0100 from Code Value from 1C (0032,1064) is
ute in the Procedure within 0032,1064 within Procedure only expected if
Code Sequence Code Sequence (0032,1060) is
(0032,1064) not sent.
OR
0008,0100 2. RIS does not send at
all the Procedure Code
Sequence (0032,1064)
but sends the "Request‐
ed Procedure Descrip‐
tion" (0032,1060)

1. RIS to send the attrib‐ 0008,0100 from Code Value from 1C (0040,0008) is
ute in the Scheduled within 0040,0008 within Scheduled only expected if
Protocol Code Se‐ which is within Protocol Code Se‐ (0040,0007) is
quence (0040,0008). 0040,0100 quence which is not sent. Both as
OR within Scheduled part of
2. RIS does not send at Procedure Step (0040,0100) se‐
all the Scheduled Proto‐ Sequence quence.
col Code Sequence
(0040,0008) but sends
the "Schedule Proce‐
dure Step Description"
(0040, 0007).
1. RIS to send the attrib‐ 0008,0102 from Code Scheme 1C (0032,1064) is

ute in the Procedure within 0032,1064 Designator from only expected if
Code Sequence within Procedure (0032,1060) is
(0032,1064) Code Sequence not sent.
OR
2. RIS does not send at
all the Procedure Code
Sequence (0032,1064)
but sends the "Request‐
ed Procedure Descrip‐
tion" (0032,1060)
0008,0102 1. RIS to send the attrib‐ 0008,0102 from Code Scheme 1C (0040,0008) is
ute in the Scheduled within 0040,0008 Designator from only expected if
Protocol Code Se‐ which is within within Procedure (0040,0007) is
quence (0040,0008). 0040,0100 Code Sequence not sent. Both as
OR which is within part of
2. RIS does not send at Scheduled Proce‐ (0040,0100) se‐
all the Scheduled Proto‐ dure Step Se‐ quence.
col Code Sequence quence
(0040,0008) but sends
the "Schedule Proce‐
dure Step Description"
(0040, 0007).
0040,0109 RIS has to send the at‐ 0040,0109 from Scheduled Proce‐ 1 Mandatory
tribute and cannot send within 0040,0100 dure Step ID from
it empty as part of within Scheduled
Scheduled Procedure Procedure Step
Step Sequence Sequence
(0040,0100)
* — returned expected key (as per DICOM):

■ Type 1 : attribute is mandatory and cannot be empty in RIS response
■ Type 1C : attribute is mandatory under some conditions and cannot be empty in RIS response
■ Type 2 : attribute is mandatory but can be empty in RIS response
■ Type 2C : attribute is mandatory under some conditions but can be empty in RIS response
■ Type 3 : attribute is not mandatory in RIS response
15.5 Finalization

Construction Checks
16 Job Card CHK A051 - PACS Compatibility Tests With Breast Tomosynthesis
Objects
Personnel
Requirements
16.2 Overview
Before the GE Breast Tomosynthesis installation took place, it will have been confirmed that the
PACS (and/or other storage devices on site) are able to store the DICOM Breast Tomosynthesis
Object. All workflow actors (such as PACS, archiver…) that will receive the Tomosynthesis
images must support : DICOM Storage as SCP for : Breast Tomosynthesis Image
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.13.1.3 (SOP class UID) with at least one of the following proposed
transfer syntaxes:
• Explicit VR Big Endian - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.2
• Implicit VR Little Endian - 1.2.840.10008.1.2
• Explicit VR Little Endian - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
• Lossless JPEG Compression - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.70
• Lossy JPEG Compression - 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.51 (when authorized on site)
The PACS (and/or other storage devices on site) BTO compatibility can be tested from the IDI
workstation (once correctly upgraded to 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build 382) or above
and having a Tomo license), by loading BTO test objects to IDI and then pushing them from the
IDI to the PACS (and/or other storage devices on site).
The IDI Workstation is already upgraded - -
to 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build
382) or above and has a Tomo license.
You have obtained the test BTO images Chapter 3, Section 2.4.10, -
on a USB flash memory device. Obtaining Test BTO Images to
Check PACS Compatibility
16.4 Procedure
16.4.1 PACS Compatibility Checks With BTO
Use the following steps to obtain the test BTO, load the test BTO on the IDI workstation (running
at least 4.7.0 V-Preview (named MR3 or Build 382) or above and having a Tomo license), and

check that the IDI can push the test BTO to the PACS. The following steps can be done before
the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option has been installed on the Senographe Essential system:
1. On the IDI workstation, insert the USB flash memory device containing the previously
downloaded BTO test image and wait for it to be recognized as a drive with an assigned
letter (e.g. G:\).
NOTE: If you have not yet obtained the test BTO image and put them on a USB flash
memory device, you can do so by following Chapter 3, Section 2.4.10,
Obtaining Test BTO Images to Check PACS Compatibility.
2. On the IDI workstation, select Start > Programs > Image Diagnost >Tools > Import Files
from Disk.
3. In the DICOM File Browser window that appears, type the access path of the inserted USB
flash memory device (e.g. G:\) in the Folder field, then click on [Scan Folder] button.
The Browser Window of the IDI will list all DICOM Images contained in that folder.
4. Click on the [Import Documents] button. The process of importing will be displayed in %.
All the DICOM objects in all the sub-folders of the USB flash memory device will be
added to the IDI database (IDI cache data source) once the progress reaches 100%.
492 16 Job Card CHK A051 - PACS Compatibility Tests

With Breast Tomosynthesis Objects
5. Ensure that the PACS (and/or other storage devices on site) are already configured/listed as
a data source within the Patient Manager of the IDI workstation. If the PACS (and/or other
storage devices on site) are not yet configured/listed, you can add them according to Job
Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration in the IDI Mammography Workflow
Solutions — Service Manual.
6. From the IDI workstation, push the test BTO to each of the PACS (and/or other storage
devices on site) that need testing. To do this, perform the following sub-steps on the IDI
workstation:
a. Click the Search tab, select the Cache Data source, type GE_Mammo_* in the Name
field, and click the [Search] button.
The search results will include the test BTO.
b. Select the BTO example patient in the patient list or in the study/series list of the
Patient Manager. The BTO is labelled with a Patient Name of Ge_Mammo_Tomo,
Jul2012, Phantom, a Date of birth 10.07.1954, and a Patient ID of test01 within the
patient list of the Patient Manager.
The [Send to…] button (as well as other buttons) in the bottom task bar of the
Patient Manager become active.
c. Click the [Send to…] button in the bottom task bar of the Patient Manager.
d. In the Send Manager window that appears, do the following:
i. Select a destination (i.e. the PACS (and/or other storage devices on site)
you want to test).
NOTE: Only one destination can be selected at a time.

ii. Enable the Send also raw data check box.

iii. Click the [Send] button.
7. Check the send status on the IDI by going to Support Interface, and clicking the Send
Monitor button under the Runtime Status section.
If there are failed send requests you can check them in router - send requests or in
within the cachecontroller.log and sendscumerge.log files of the log-folder.
8. Observe the Send Statistics results associated with the PACS you have just attempted to
send the test BTO to. Determine your next step based on the results of the Send Statistics,
as follows:
• If there are no failed results, no further action is necessary as the PACS supports the
BTO.
• If there are failed results, do the following:

1. Examine the contents of the cachecontroller.log and sendscumerge.log
files within the %idi_home%\log directory for the logs of the following syntax:
■ In the cachecontroller.log file : YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS, 334

ERROR CacheController [Thread-617] Instances-Failed :
local-aet=AE_MHWS, remote-aet=PACS01, remote-
host=pacs01.idi.local, remote-port=104, compression=0 :
d:\dbcache\6426_1_137888426_644|Error openinig
association — Association negotiation failed as shown in the
example in Illustration 7-20.

Illustration 7-20: Example cachecontroller.log file
■ In the sendscumerge.log file :

■ (6596) DD-MM HH:MM:SS MC3(TL_conAddrInfo) E: TCP
connection timeout. Remote system “pacs01.idi.local”
may not be operational.
and
■ (6596) DD-MM HH:MM:SS MC3(Transport_Conn_Closed_Event)

E: Transport unexpectedly closed
as shown in the example in Illustration 7-21.
Illustration 7-21: Example MWL_SCU_merge.log file
2. Determine your next action based on the content of the

cachecontroller.log and sendscumerge.log log files:

■ If the logs with the syntax listed in the sub-step above exist, the PACS
currently does not support BTO. In this case, check with the hospital network
administrator whether the PACS (and/or other storage devices on site)
support the appropriate Breast Tomosynthesis Image with all the transfer
syntaxes quoted in the Overview section at the start of this Job Card.
■ If the logs with the syntax listed in the sub-step above do not exist, there is
another issue with the PACS. In this case, contact your OLC for more
information.
16.5 Finalization

Chapter 8 System Identification and Follow-up

1 About this chapter
This chapter contains a form to be completed at installation time. The form must be updated as
required to provide a record of the system history, including hardware and software changes.
Chapter 8 System Identification and Follow-up 497

2 LBK-A001 - System configuration form

2.1 General System Information
Complete a copy of this form at the end of installation.
Leave it attached to the site Log Book; upgrade it for each configuration change (new option,
new software release, etc.).
MACHINE TYPE:
SERIAL NUMBER:
HOSTNAME (see Note 1):
IP ADDRESS (seeNote 1):
NETMASK (see Note 2):
SDC PASSWORD:
HOSPITAL NAME:
USER INTERFACE LANGUAGE:
APPLICATION SUPPORT TELEPHONE:
MISCELLANEOUS:
Note 1
To obtain the hostname and the IP address, open the Service desktop and press the Home icon. Alter‐
natively, open a command window and enter: more /etc/hosts; the line ending by loghost tells you the IP
address and hostname.
Note 2
To obtain the netmask value (if it exists): open a Command window and enter: more /etc/netmasks. If
you get the answer: No such file, there is no netmask installed. Otherwise look at the end of the dis‐
played file.
Example: 192.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 (network address followed by netmask value).
SOFTWARE INITIAL REVISION:

SOFTWARE UPGRADE REVISION:
SOFTWARE PROTECTION KEY:
CD-R PROTECTION KEY:
498 2 LBK-A001 - System configuration form

NETWORK HOST NUMBER 1:

Hostname: IP address:
Host label: Port Number:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:

A.E. Title:
Protocol: Comments:
A.E. Title:
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER NUMBER 1:

Protocol: Port Number:
A.E. Title: Comments:
ROUTING TABLE:
route add net:
route add net:
route add net:
route add net:
route add net:
Note: To determine your routes, open a command window and enter netstat —r , then in the
results look for the IP address corresponding to the “default” router. Also, enter more /etc/
rc2.d/S93route and look for any IP address corresponding to the route add net entries.
500 2 LBK-A001 - System configuration form

2.2 CESM Option

The Service Desktop Home Page or Configuration Page displays the status of the CESM option
(Yes — installed, No — not installed).
CESM Option
(YES or NO)
2.3 CAD Configuration

The CAD pages describe whether the CAD option is enabled, and if enabled lists the CAD
configuration.
If CAD is enabled on the system it will appear with the Utilities section of the Service Desktop,
and the parameters for each CAD host on the network will need backing up, according to the
following steps:
2. Then from the Utilities page that appears, click the CAD icon to expand the CAD tree and
then click the CAD icon that is revealed.
The CAD Home page appears, with a list of the existing CAD Units declared on the ADS
Computer. The CAD Home page lists the Label, IP address, and Hostname for each of the
already declared CAD Units.
3. For each CAD Unit, note down the Label, IP address, and Hostname in the table below.
Label IP Address Hostname

3 LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS parameters manual record

sheets
Manual parameter backup
The following pages provide information and space to note each of the following sets of
parameters:
1. Site Information and General Configuration.
2. Filter Management.
3. Browser Preferences:
Layout.
Filter.
Sort.
4. Medical Application Preferences:
Auto Push.
Auto Print.
Annotations.
Auto windowing.
Quality Check.
Auto Delete.
Test Hosts.
Names.
Image Process.
5. Worklist management.
6. Worklist Query Definitions
7. Network management.
8. Printer management.
9. PPS management.
10. Needle data.
11. AOP configuration.
12. Network routing information.
13. IP filters information.
502 3 LBK-A003 - Back-up/restore procedure - AWS

parameters manual record sheets
3.1 Site information and general configuration
From the browser, click the Tools menu button and then click Service Desktop to launch
the Service Desktop. Then click the Configuration button . Click Site to view and note Site
information, then General to view and note the General Configuration.
Site Information Copy the current settings into the table below.
Parameter Current setting
Site Name:
Site Address:
Phone:
Fax:
Contact Person:
Phone:
Station Name:
System ID
Installation Date
Contract Number
Contract expiration date

General configuration. Copy the current settings into the table below.
Auto Delete: Language:
System clock Upper threshold: English
. . . . . . . yyyy-mm-dd ........% Français
. . . . . . . .hh:mm:ss of occupied disk
QAP timeout Lower threshold: Español
. . . . . . . days ........% Deutsch
of occupied disk
Screen Blank Timeout Minimum Image Storage Time: Italiano
. . . . . . . minutes . . . . . . . . hours Portugès
Dutch
Danish
Swedish
Norvegian
Finnish
Edit Patient: <> On
<> Off
3.2 Filter management
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click Filter management. For each
filter name, click Update to view the settings, and copy them into one of the tables below. Copy
this sheet if you need additional space.

1.
Filter name:
Circle the current value Note current value of the parameter
Patient level:
Patient Name Begins with/Contains/Is
Patient ID Begins with/Contains/Is
Exam level:
Exam description Begins with/Contains/Is
Performing Physi‐ Begins with/Contains/Is
cian
Referring physician Begins with/Contains/Is
Exam modality MG/DX N/A
Exam date Between/Before/After/On
Exam time
Series level:
Series description Begins with/Contains/Is
Series Type SCPT/RAW/ N/A
PROCESSED/SR
Application level:
Apply this filter up Patient/Exam/Series N/A
to the selected lev‐
el

2.
Filter name:
Patient level:
Exam level:
cian
Exam time
Series level:
PROCESSED/SR
Application level:
el

3.
Filter name:
Patient level:
Exam level:
cian
Exam time
Series level:
PROCESSED/SR
Application level:
el
3.3 Browser preferences
From the Browser click the Tools menu button , then click Browser preferences. Select
each set of preferences in turn: Layout; Filter; Sort.

Layout:
Record the current settings on the illustration.
Mark each selected button clearly with a cross.
Filter:
Record the current filter names for local and remote lists. If none, write "None":
Local lists. Current setting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote lists. Current setting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sort:
For each parameter, circle the currently selected option:
Sort patients by: Name/Identifier/Last study date
Sort exams by: Date/Identifier/Description/Performing Physician/Referring Physician
Modality: MG/DX
Sort series by: Type/Number
Sort images by: Number/Old-new date/New-old date
Split series: Yes/No
With Initial Series: Yes/No (active when Split series = Yes)
3.4 Medical application preferences
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click Medical application
preferences. Select each set of preferences in turn:
Auto Push; Auto Print; Annotations; Auto Windowing; Quality Check; Auto Delete; Names;
Image Process.
Auto Push

Circle the current selection: Auto Push ON/OFF.

If Auto Push is ON, use the table below to enter the names in the Remote Host window, and
circle the selected push criterion for each host:
Remote Host Name Criterion
Raw/Proc/Both/None
Raw/Proc/Both/None
Raw/Proc/Both/None
Raw/Proc/Both/None
Raw/Proc/Both/None

Auto Print
Circle the current selection: Auto Print ON/OFF.
If Auto Print is ON, enter DICOM printer information in the table below. For each named printer,
note the name, the selected print mode and the selected number of copies. Click the Printer
properties button to obtain the selected print parameters. Parameters shown in square brackets
in the table (e.g., [Fit to film]) are default values which normally do not change. Copy this sheet
if you need additional space.
DICOM printer Name Criterion Criterion
Print mode [Fit to film]
Number of Copies
Printer properties
Format [standard]
Media type Paper/Clear film/Blue film
Destination Magazine/Processor
Film orientation Portrait/Landscape
Magnification type [Cubic]
Film size [8 in by 10 in]
or
[10 in by 12 in]
Note: The sizes visible de‐
pend on the printers de‐
clared:
Annotations
Record the annotation settings: place a cross in the box beside each option currently selected:
Annotation level Selected annotations Printing annotations
Patient information
Acquisition date and time
Full Hospital information Model 1
Partial X-ray parameters Model 2
None Anatomical information Model 3
Custom Processing Information Model 4
Display parameters
Measurements
Auto Windowing

Circle the current selection: Standard/High/Low/User.

Quality Check
Circle the current selection: Enable Repeat and Reject Analysis YES/NO.
If Repeat and Reject Analysis is enabled, use the table below to record the Auto Push and Auto
Print configuration. For each parameter, place a cross in the appropriate YES/NO box:
Parameter YES NO
Auto Push Repeated images
Auto Push Rejected images
Auto Print Repeated images
Auto Print Rejected images
If Repeat and Reject Analysis is not enabled, circle the current selection below:
Default Image Quality Check OK/NOT OK.
Auto Delete
Circle the current selection: Auto Delete ON/OFF.
If Auto Delete is ON, use the table below to record the auto delete profile: place a cross in the
box beside each of the options currently selected:
Raw images sent Both images sent Processed images com‐
mitted
Processed images sent Raw images committed Both images committed

Use the table below to record the currently entered names:

Operators Performing Physicians Referring Physicians
Image Process
Circle the current selection: Fine View: Enable/Disable (applicable for both PV and eCon‐
trast)
NOTE: If the system has eContrast, backup the strength.
If the system has Premium View, choose according to the equivalence, see Table 8-1.
Table 8-1: Equivalence between Premium View and eContrast
Premium View eContrast
PV/Disable (TE/Enable) eContrast 1
PV/Low eContrast 2
PV/Medium eContrast 3
PV/High eContrast 4
None eContrast 5
PVi eContrast 6
3.5 Worklist management
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click Worklist management.
For each Host name listed, click Update to view the parameter settings, and copy them into the
table below. Copy this sheet if you need additional space:
Parameter Entry Entry
Host label
Host name
Application Entity Title
Network address
Port number

Parameter Entry Entry

Comments
3.6 Worklist Query Definitions

From the right side of the Browser, click the Worklist icon to open the Worklist window.
From the Worklist window, click the Query button to open the Query Definitions window.
Note down the settings of the Query Definitions window into the table below.
Which system Date
This system Today
All systems in modality Tomorrow
All systems From : __________________
To : ____________________
Patient Name
Patient ID
Accession #
Study ID
3.7 Network management
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click Network management.
For each Host name listed, click Update to view the remote host parameter settings, and copy
them into the table below. Where multiple choices are shown, circle the selected parameter.
Copy this sheet if you need additional space.
Parameter Host 1 Host 2 Host 3
Host label
Host name
Network address
Network protocol
Port number
Query retrieve Patient/Study/No pro‐ Patient/Study/No pro‐ Patient/Study/No pro‐
vider vider vider
Storage commitment Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Application Entity
Title
Network address
Port number

Parameter Host 1 Host 2 Host 3

Manage send Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Comments
3.8 Printer management
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click Printer management.
For each DICOM printer listed, click Update to view the printer parameter settings. Copy the
labels, names, etc., into one of the illustrations below and mark all selected check boxes with a
cross. Copy the illustration if you need additional space:

Printer 1:

Printer 2:
3.9 PPS management
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click PPS management.

Circle the current selection: APPS on RIS/Image Archiv‐ Selected/Not selected.

er:
PPS on CAD: Selected/Not selected.
If PPS on RIS/Image Archiver is selected, use the table below to record the parameter settings
Network address
Port
Related Image Archiver
If PPS on CAD is selected, use the table below to record the parameter settings
Network address
Port
Related Image Archiver
Use the table below to record the PPS Retries settings
Number of retries
Time before retries (Seconds)
3.10 Needle setup
From the Browser, click the Tools menu button , then click Needle Setup. From the
Needle Panel window that appears, select each of the needles that are listed in the Needle list
section, and copy down the needle data that appears in the Needle description section for each
of the needles.
When completing the table, use the following terms/acronyms for the different needle types:
• FNA — FNA
• Core Biopsy — CB
• Hook — Hook
• Vacuum Assisted Divice — VAD
• Lateral Approach Tool — LAT
The lengths you need to record vary for each needle type. In the cases where the parameter
does not exist for a particular needle types, simply enter N/A for that parameter.

Length (mm)
Needle Name Type
A B C D E
3.11 AOP configuration

Note down the AOP Mode configuration on the ADS Computer and the Generator in Table 8-2
and Table 8-3, respectively.
Table 8-2: AOP Mode Configuration on ADS Computer
AOP Configuration:

Table 8-3: AOP Mode Configuration on Generator
AOP DOSE Mode
AOP STD Mode
AOP CNT Mode
If the system you are upgrading is Penduick or above with the Stereotaxy option, additionally
note down the Stereotaxy AOP configuration in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4: Stereotaxy AOP Mode Configuration on Generator
AOP Stereo Mode:
3.12 Network routing information (S93ROUTE File)

NOTE: The S93route file will only exist on a system that has not yet been upgraded, and
never on an upgraded system running the GE Breast Tomosynthesis option.
Therefore, this section is for noting down the Gateways that exist before the upgrade
takes place. Once the system is upgraded, the Gateway is defined on the
Reconstruction Computer via the Service Desktop — Reconstruction pages instead.
To not down the Gateway defined on the Reconstruction Computer, us the table in
LBK-A004 - System configuration form Reconstruction Station.
From behind the Browser, right click the background, and from the Root Menu that appears,
View the contents of the /etc/rc2.d/S93route file with the textedit command, by entering:
more /etc/rc2.d/S93route
If the message file or directory not found appears, no route is set on the system and there is no
information that needs recording.
If a route has been set, the content of the /etc/rc2.d/S93route file appears of the following
format.
#!/bin/sh
# Section for routing
echo Starting route service
route add net <network number> <gateway address>
where <network number> is the address to be accessed through the gateway, and <gateway
address> is the IP of the gateway (router) indicated by the administrator. More than one route
(i.e. route add net) may exist. Note down the route(s) listed in the table below.
Route <network number> <gateway>
1
2
3
4
5

3.13 IP filters information (permitted network hosts)

2. Query the current list of permitted network hosts that are added to the IP Filter, by entering:
IPFls.sh
The command window updates with the list of currently permitted network hosts.
In addition to the default OLC Server IP address range of 150.2.0.0/16, note down the list (if
any) of the permitted network hosts.
Permitted Hosts e.g. N.N.N.N/nn

1 (default) 150.2.0.0/16
2
3
4
5

4 LBK-A004 - System Configuration form Reconstruction Computer

4.1 INTRODUCTION
Complete a copy of this form at the end of installation and update it at the beginning of every
system backup.
Leave it attached to the site Log Book; upgrade it for each configuration change (new option,
new software release, etc.).
4.2 MANUAL PARAMETER BACKUP
The following pages provide information and space to note each of the following sets of
parameters of the Reconstruction Station. They reproduce the structure of the Configuration
pages of the Service Desktop, plus a few network parameters:
Parameter Value
Access
recon password
root password
DICOM
Lossy compression (ON/OFF)
Image Quality
Z sampling
Calcification Artifact
Image Receptor to MTD distance
Z start offset
Z end margin
Conspicious
Fineview
Saturation Management
Crop to Breast
Networking
Firewal (ON/OFF)
Reconstruction Station External IP
Reconstruction Station Default Gateway
ADS computer External IP
ADS computer Internal IP
IDC IP
Positioner IP
QAP
Z sampling MTF
Z start MTF
Z end MTF

Parameter Value
Z position flat field
ROUTING TABLE: Additional Routes
To determine your routes, do the following:

1. Open a command window on the ADS computer.
2. Connect to the Reconstruction Computer, by entering:
ssh recon@reconbox
If necessary, at the password prompt, enter:
M0n!AgneU (or the customer defined recon user password)
3. View the Reconstruction Computer routes file, by entering:more /etc/sysconfig/
network/routes and note down the additional routes within this table.
4. Close the connection to the Reconstruction Computer, by entering:
exit
522 4 LBK-A004 - System Configuration form

© 2013-2016 General Electric Company. All Rights Reserved.
General Electric Company
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS SCS
283 RUE DE LA MINIERE, 78530 BUC
FRANCE
www.gehealthcare.com

SenoClaire INSTALLATION MANUAL - IM - 5415901-5-1EN - 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SenoClaire INSTALLATION MANUAL - IM - 5415901-5-1EN - 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SenoClaire

• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали

• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на

UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního

ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.

• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk

WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding

• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga

• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või pat‐

VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteis‐

ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur

WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendienst‐

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.

• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός

FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben

• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg

AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il pre‐

경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.

• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지

• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서

BRĪDINĀJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un sapraša‐

• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, me‐

ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio

ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.

OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręczni‐

• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisan‐

ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou

ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do

ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui

• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului

ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на

• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к

• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому,

UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca

UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a nepor‐

• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, ob‐

ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido

VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razu‐